ML5720/ML5721/ML5790/ML5791

Technical Reference Guide

PREFACE
Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this document is complete,
accurate, and up-to-date. The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for the results of
errors beyond its control. The manufacturer also cannot guarantee that changes in software
and equipment made by other manufacturers and referred to in this guide will not affect
the applicability of the information in it. Mention of software products manufactured by
other companies does not necessarily constitute endorsement by the manufacturer.
While all reasonable efforts have been made to make this document as accurate and helpful
as possible, we make no warranty of any kind, expressed or implied, as to the accuracy or
completeness of the information contained herein.
The most up-to-date drivers and manuals are available from the web site:
http://www.okiprintingsolutions.com
07118001 Iss.01 Copyright © 2011 Oki Europe Ltd. All rights reserved.
Oki is a registered trademark of Oki Electric Industry Company, Ltd.
Oki Printing Solutions is a trademark of Oki Data Corporation.
Energy Star is a trademark of the United States Environmental Protection Agency.
Microsoft, MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Apple, Macintosh, Mac and Mac OS are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.
Other product names and brand names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their
proprietors.
As an ENERGY STAR Program Participant, the manufacturer has determined
that this product meets the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency.

This product complies with the requirements of the Council Directives 2004/
108/EC (EMC), 2006/95/EC (LVD) and 2009/125/EC (ErP) as amended where
applicable on the approximation of the laws of the member states relating to
electromagnetic compatibility, low voltage and energy related product.
This product complies with EN55022 Class B. However, when fitted with the
optional network interface card or optional cut-sheet feeder, compliance to
EN55022 is Class A. In a domestic environment this configuration may cause
radio interference, in which case the user may be required to take adequate
control measures.
The following cables were used to evaluate this product to achieve EMC directive
2004/108/EC compliance and configurations other than this may affect that compliance.

CABLE TYPE LENGTH CORE SHIELD

(METRE)

Power 1.8 ✘ ✘

USB 5.0 ✘ ✔

Serial 2.1 ✘ ✔

Parallel 2.0 ✘ ✔

LAN 5.0 ✘ ✘

Preface > 2
MANUFACTURER
Oki Data Corporation,
4-11-22 Shibaura, Minato-ku,
Tokyo 108-8551,
Japan

IMPORTER TO THE EU/AUTHORISED REPRESENTATIVE

Oki Europe Limited (trading as Oki Printing Solutions)
Blays House
Wick Road
Egham
Surrey, TW20 0HJ
United Kingdom
For all sales, support and general enquiries contact your local distributor.

ENVIRONMENTAL INFORMATION

Manufacturer > 3
CONTENTS
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Importer to the EU/authorised representative. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Environmental Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Notes, cautions and warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
About this guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Online usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Printing pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Standard configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Identifying component parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Internal view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Interface specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
IEEE1284 parallel interface specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Connectors and cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Parallel interface signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Parallel interface levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Parallel interface circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Parallel interface timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Support mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Universal Serial Bus (USB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
USB interface signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Mode and class of device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Data signalling rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Interface circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Signal level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Option interface specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
General specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Interface signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Electrical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Interface timing charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Receiving margin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Description of communication procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Interface control code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Local test function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Operator interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Operator panel functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Print mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Hex Dump mode, Menu mode, Test mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Alarm/error indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Recoverable alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Unrecoverable alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Menu selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

Contents > 4
 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Menu items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Self test printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Rolling ASCII self test printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Hexadecimal Dump mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Automatic paper loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Auto-parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Form tear-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Print position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Quiet printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
High-copy printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Command descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
ML5720/ML5721 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Horizontal control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Vertical control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Symbol sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Font description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Text print features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Graphics mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Composite commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
General control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Barcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
ML5790/ML5791 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Horizontal control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Vertical control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Character set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Font description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Text print features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Graphics mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Composite commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
General control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Barcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Physical specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Power requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Electrical insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Agency approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Print specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Paper specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Ribbon specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Appendix A – Command summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Appendix B – Print modes/features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
ML5720/ML5721 . ...................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
IBM mode . . . ...................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
EPSON mode . ...................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
ML mode . . . . ...................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
ML5790/ML5791 . ...................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
IBM mode . . . ...................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
EPSON mode . ...................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Contents > 5
Appendix C – Code pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Appendix D – Media specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Continuous paper (continuous forms) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Cut-sheet paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Envelopes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Cardstock paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Label paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Appendix E – Barcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
Barcode external code list EAN8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Barcode external code list EAN13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Barcode external code list UPC - A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Barcode external code list UPC - E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Barcode external code list CODE39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Barcode external code list interleaved 2-of-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Barcode 128 code list code type: A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Barcode 128 code list code type: B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Barcode 128 code list code type: C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Barcode External code list postnet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Appendix F – Printing specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Measurement conditions and specification value definitions . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Oki Printing Solutions contact details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375

Contents > 6
NOTES, CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS
NOTE
A note provides additional information to supplement the main text.

CAUTION!
A caution provides additional information which, if ignored, may
result in equipment malfunction or damage.

WARNING!
A warning provides additional information which, if ignored, may
result in a risk of personal injury.

For the protection of your product, and in order to ensure that you benefit from its full
functionality, this model has been designed to operate only with genuine original ribbon
cartridges. Any other ribbon cartridge may not operate at all, even if it is described as
“compatible”, and if it does work, your product's performance and print quality may be
degraded.
Use of non-genuine products may invalidate your warranty.
Specifications subject to change without notice. All trademarks acknowledged.

Notes, cautions and warnings > 7

ABOUT THIS GUIDE
NOTE
Images used in this manual may include optional features that your printer
does not have installed.
If required, you may wish to refer for basic information to the User’s Guide
which is stored on the manuals CD.

This manual is your Technical Reference guide (check the web site,
www.okiprintingsolutions.com, for the most up-to-date version) for your printer and forms
part of the overall user support listed below:
> Installation Safety booklet: provides information as to safe use of the printer.
This is a paper document that is packaged with the printer and should be read before
setting up your printer.
> Set-up guide: to describe how to unpack and set up your printer.
This is a paper document that is packaged with the printer.
> This Technical Reference Guide: to provide detailed technical information for
programmers and more technical users.
This is an electronic document available on the support web site.
> User’s Guide: to help you to become familiar with your printer and make the best
use of its many features. Also included are guidelines for troubleshooting and
maintenance to ensure that it performs at its best. Additionally, information is
provided for adding optional accessories as your printing needs evolve.
This is an electronic document stored on the manuals CD.
> Network Guide: to provide detailed technical information for network
administrators to configure the optional accessory network interface.
This is an electronic document stored on the CD that accompanies the network
interface card optional accessory.
> Installation Guides: accompany consumable items and optional accessories to
describe how to install them.
These are paper documents that are packaged with the consumables and optional
accessories.
> Online Help: online information accessible from the printer driver and utility
software.

ONLINE USAGE
This guide is intended to be read on screen using an Adobe Acrobat Reader. Use the
navigation and viewing tools provided in Acrobat.
You can access specific information in two ways:
> In the list of bookmarks down the left hand side of your screen, click on the topic of
interest to jump to the required topic. (If the bookmarks are not available, use the
“Contents” on page 4.)
> In the list of bookmarks, click on Index to jump to the Index. (If the bookmarks are
not available, use the “Contents” on page 4.) Find the term of interest in the
alphabetically arranged index and click on the associated page number to jump to
the page containing the term.

About this guide > 8

PRINTING PAGES
The whole manual, individual pages, or sections may be printed. The procedure is:
1. From the toolbar, select File, then Print (or press the Ctrl + P keys).
2. Choose which pages you wish to print:
(a) All pages, (1), for the entire manual.
(b) Current page, (2), for the page at which you are looking.

1
2
3

(c) Pages from and to, (3), for the range of pages you specify by entering their
page numbers.

3. Click OK.

About this guide > 9

INTRODUCTION
This printer series is designed to provide highly reliable letter quality printing and high
resolution graphics for the desktop/office printing environment. It combines state-of-the-
art, 9-pin (ML5720/ML5721) and 24-pin (ML5790/ML5791), serial impact dot matrix
printing technology with advanced materials and superior construction to provide high
performance and versatility in a desktop sized unit. Careful attention to ergonomics and
application needs provides user friendly operation for operators of varying technical
capabilities.

FEATURES
The features include:

> OKI smart Paper HandlingTM (ML5790/ML5791)

> 9-pin(ML5720/ML5721) and 24-pin(ML5790/ML5791) double arrangement operator
replaceable printhead
> Direct access control panel
> Structured direct access menu for easy set up
> Printhead life: 400M characters (average) in 10 CPI Utility mode at normal 25%
duty, 35% page density
> Bi-directional short-line-seeking printing
> Print speed:

ML5720/ML5721 ML5790/ML5791

600 CPS HSD (all CPIs) 480 CPS HSD (10 CPI)

700 CPS SSD (12 CPI only) 576 CPS HSD (12 CPI)

450 CPS Draft (10/12/15/20 CPI) 360 CPS Draft (10 CPI)

431 CPS Draft (17.1 CPI) 540 CPS Draft (15 CPI)

113 CPS NLQ (10/12/15 CPI) 120 CPS LQ (10 CPI)

108 CPS NLQ (17.1/20 CPI)

> Paper feed

> Top/Rear/Bottom/Front path
> Rear/Front Push tractor
> Pull tractor
> Friction feed with pinch roller release
> Paper handling
> Automatic sheet loading
> Short paper tear-off available by menu selection or TEAR button operation
> Auto-loading for single sheet and continuous paper
> Auto park feature

Introduction > 10
> Paper copies

ML5720/ML5721 ML5790/ML5791

9 - 11 lb, 6 part (with Rear/Front 9 - 11 lb, 6 part (See Note)

Push feed)

9 – 11 lb, 7 part (with Pull tractor

Front/Bottom Pull feed)
(See note)

NOTE
Depending on the paper route and media type, printout may appear light on
the last paper part. It is recommended to use High Copy mode when the print
appears light.

> Paper path capability

9 - 11 lb, 6 part (with Rear/Front Push feed)
9 - 11 lb, 7 part (with Pull tractor Front/Bottom feed)
> Stationery cartridge ribbon
> Interfaces
> Standard IEEE1284 parallel interface
> USB interface
> Optional RS-232C serial interface
> Optional Network interface card
> ML5720/ML5721:Quiet operation at 55 dB(A) in quiet mode and 57 dB(A) in normal
mode
> ML5790/ML5791:Quiet Operation at 52 dB(A) in quiet mode and 57 dB(A) in normal
mode.
> 128 kbytes max. receive buffer
>
ML5720/ML5721: Line feed resolution at 1/6 inch, 1/8 inch, n/72 inch,
n/144 inch, n/216 simulated by n/288 inch
ML5790/ML5791: Line feed resolution at 1/6 inch, 1/8 inch, n/60 inch,
n/72 inch, n/180 inch, n/216 inch, n/360 inch.

> Agency approved: GS,CE

> Barcode data printing
> Postnet bar code data printing

Introduction > 11
STANDARD CONFIGURATION
This printer series consists of the following components:
> Printer mechanism
> Power supply unit
> Control board (including an IEEE1284 parallel interface and USB port)
> Operator panel board
> Acoustic covers
> Tractor feed unit

OPTIONS
> RS-232C Serial Interface Board

NOTE
Ensure that the RS-232C Serial Interface board’s communication rate is up to
19.2 K BPS. RS-232C with a lower K BPS cannot be used for this printer.

> LAN7120E3 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T Network Board

> Tractor unit (Push and Pull)
> Cut-sheet feeder (Single-bin only)
> Roll paper stand (ML5720/ML5790)

Introduction > 12
IDENTIFYING COMPONENT PARTS
The main parts of your printer are identified and briefly explained below.

FRONT VIEW
9
10
8

1
9
6
2 5

4
1. Power Switch: to turn the printer power ON/OFF.
2. Operator Panel: contains buttons and indicators (LEDs) (described in detail later)
that allow you to operate the printer.
3. Front Feed Paper Tray: to feed the cut sheet from the front.
4. Front Cover: open to fit the front feed paper tray or to fit the tractor.
5. Platen Knob.
6. Paper Type Lever: set according to the type of paper feed - front feed (cut sheet),
continuous rear feed, continuous front feed or continuous bottom pull.
7. Pull-up Guide Assembly support.
8. Top Feed Paper Tray: raise to feed cut sheet paper from the top.
9. Paper Guide: can be adjusted as required to locate the left edge of cut sheet paper.
10. Top Cover: open and close for access, for example when changing a ribbon
cartridge. Keep closed for noise reduction.

Introduction > 13
INTERNAL VIEW

11

12

13
14

11. Paper Thickness Lever: set according to the thickness of the paper.
12. Ribbon Cartridge: holds the printer ribbon.
13. Print Head: prints the character on the paper.
14. Pull-up Guide assembly: remove when using Pull tractor and optional Cut-sheet
feeder.

REAR VIEW

18

17 16 15
19

20
15. USB connector: connect to USB interface cable.
16. Parallel connector: connect to parallel interface cable.
17. Optional Serial/Network connector: connect to serial or network.
18. Optional CSF/RPS connector: connect to cut-sheet feeder or roll paper stand.
19. Ventilator
20. A/C Input: connect to printer power cable.

Introduction > 14
INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS
IEEE1284 PARALLEL INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS

CONNECTORS AND CABLE

Connectors
Printer side:36-pin receptacle 57RE-40360-830B-D29BF (DDk Ltd.) or equivalent
Cable side:36-pin plug 57FE-30360 (DDK Ltd.) or equivalent, or 57F-36H-3R straight
type with a metal hood (DDK Ltd.) or equivalent.

Cable
Use a cable less than 1.8 m in total length.
(A shielded cable is required and use of twisted-pair wires is recommended for noise
prevention.)

PARALLEL INTERFACE SIGNALS

Description
Pin No. Signal Direction
Compatible Nibble
1 STROBE To printer Samples input data when changing from low HostClk
level to high level.
2 DATA BIT 1 To printer Input data: High level indicates “1” and low ?
level “0”.
3 DATA BIT 2
4 DATA BIT 3
5 DATA BIT 4
6 DATA BIT 5
7 DATA BIT 6
8 DATA BIT 7
9 DATA BIT 8
10 ACKNOWLEDGE From printer Indicates character input completion, or func- PrtClk
tion operation end, at low level.
11 BUSY From printer Indicates data cannot be received at high level. PrtBusy
Data can be input at low level.
12 PAPER END From printer High level indicates paper end. AckDataReq
13 SELECT From printer High level indicates select (on line) condition. Xflag
14 AUTO FEED To printer When "Auto Feed" in the menu is set as HostBusy
valid under EPSON mode, this signal goes
to the low level and the printer generates a
line feed after receiving CR code.
16, 33 0 V – Signal ground. <
17 CHASSIS GROUND – Frame ground. <
18 +5 V From printer +5V / 50mA ** <
19 to 30 0 V – Twisted pair return (for pin No. 1 to 11) <
31 INPUT-PRIME To printer When this signal goes to the low level, <
printer controller is initialized. The low level
should be held for more than 0.5 ms.
32 FAULT From printer This signal goes from high to low level when nDataAvail
paper runs out.
(Possible to indicate error and Off-Line state.)
15, 34 – – Unused <
35 – – Fixed to High (Connected to +5 V thru 3.3 KΩ) <
36 SELECT-IN To printer In the EPSON mode, when menu item "Print IEEE1284
Suppress Effective" is Yes, and the SELECT- active
IN signal is high, the DC1/DC3 code is valid,
and invalid when the signal is low.

** When load is 50m A (more/less), volatage can drop or power can be cut off.

NOTE
Connector pin arrangement for above.

18 1

36 19

Interface specifications > 15

PARALLEL INTERFACE LEVELS
Low level: 0.0 V to + 0.8 V
High level: +2.4 V to +5.0 V

PARALLEL INTERFACE CIRCUITS

(a) Receiver
DATA BIT 1 to DATA BIT 8:
SN74LVC161284DGGR or equivalent

INPUT-PRIME, STROBE:
SN74LVC161284DGGR or equivalent
Signal Name R (Ω) C (pF)
INPUT-PRIME 47 1000
R
C
STROBE 47 47
0V
(b) Driver
ACKNOWLEDGE, PAPER END, SELECT, FAULT, BUSY
SN74LVC161284DGGR or equivalent

PARALLEL INTERFACE TIMING CHART

DATA BIT1 to
DATA
DATA BIT8

(H)
STROBE
(L)
1 μs 1~500 μs 1 μs
min min
(H)
BUSY
(L)
T busy

500 ns
max
(H)
ACKNOWLEDGE
(L)
t1 t1
t1 = 1~ 4 μs
2~8 μs

SUPPORT MODE
> Compatible
> Nibble (PnP Device ID only)

Interface specifications > 16

UNIVERSAL SERIAL BUS (USB)
Universal Serial Bus Specification Revision 2.0 Full Speed mode compliance.

CONNECTORS
Printer Side: “B” Receptacle (Upstream Input to the USB Device)
Cable Side: Series “B” Plug

CABLE
Length: Max. 5 m (Cable must be shielded and meet the USB Spec Rev 2.0 for normal
operation.)
The cable is not supplied with the printer.

USB INTERFACE SIGNALS

CONTACT NUMBER SIGNAL NAME

1 Vbus

2 D-

3 D+

4 GND

Shell Shield

NOTE
Connector pin arrangement for above:

2 1

3 4

MODE AND CLASS OF DEVICE

> Full-speed driver
> Self-powered device

DATA SIGNALLING RATE

Full-speed function – 12 Mb/s

Interface specifications > 17

INTERFACE CIRCUIT
Full-speed
+ 3.3V
Buffer

TxD+ Rs

TxD- Rs

SIGNAL LEVEL

Input/output level

PARAMETER SYMBOL MIN. MAX. UNITS

Input levels:

High (driven) VIH 2.0 V

High (floating) VIHZ 2.7 3.6 V

Low VIL 0.8 V

Output levels:

Low OL 0.0 0.3 V

High (driven) OH 2.8 3.6 V

Output signal crossover VCRS 1.3 2.0 V

voltage

Signalling levels
Signalling Levels
Bus State
Required Acceptable
Differential “1” (D+)-(D-)> 200mV and D+ > VIH(min) (D+)-(D-)> 200mV
Differential “0” (D-)-(D+)> 200mV and D- > VIH(min) (D-)-(D+)> 200mV
Single-ended 0 (SE0) D+ and D- < VIL(max) D+ and D- < VIH(min)
Data J state:
Low-speed Differential “0”
Full-speed Differential “1”
Data K state:
Low-speed Differential “1”
Full-speed Differential “0”
Idle state:
Low-speed D- > VIHZ(min) and D+ < VIL(max) D- > VIHZ(min) and D+ < VIH(min)
Full-speed D+ > VIHZ(min) and D- < VIL(max) D+ > VIHZ(min) and D- < VIH(min)
Resume state Data K state
Start-of- Data lines switch from Idle to K state
Packet (SOP)
End-of-Packet (EOP) SE0 for ≥ 1 bit time1 followed by a J SE0 for ≥ 1 bit time1 followed by a J
state for 1 bit time state

Disconnect SE0 for ≥ 2.5μs

(at downstream port)
Connect Idle for ≥ 2ms Idle for ≥ 2.5μs
(at downstream port)
Reset D+ and D- < VIL (max) for ≥ 10ms D+ and D- < VIL (max) for ≥ 2.5μs

NOTE
The width of EOP is defined in bit times relative to the device type receiving
the EOP. The bit time is approximate.

Interface specifications > 18

TIMING CHART

Packet voltage levels

VOH(min)
VIH(min)

VIL(max)
VOL(max)
VSS
Bus Idle Bus Driven to
Last Bit
First Bit of Packet SE0 J State at end
of Packet Portion of EOP
SOP
of EOP Bus Floats
Bus Idle
VOH(min)
VIH(min)

VIL(max)
VOL(max)
VSS

Disconnect detection
D+/D-
VIHZ(min)

VIL
D-/D+
VSS
>2.5μs
Device
Connected Disconnect
Detected

Full-speed device connect detection

D+
VIH

D-
D-/D+
VSS
>2.5μs

Device Connect
Connected Detected

Differential data jitter

TPERIOD
Crossover
Points
Differential
Data Lines
(VCRS)
Consecutive
Transitions TPERIOD = 12Mbps(–0.25%)
N* TPERIOD + TxDJ1 TxDJ1 = Min-3.5ns~Max3.5ns
TxDJ2 = Min-4ns~Max4ns
Paired
Transitions
N* TPERIOD + TxDJ2

Differential-to-EOP transition skew and EOP width

Crossover Point
TPERIOD Extended
Crossover
Points
Differential
Data Lines
TxDEOP = -2ns~5ns
Diff. Data-to-
SE0 Skew Source EOP Width : TFEOPT(160ns~175ns)
*
N TPERIOD + TxDEOP

Receiver EOP Width : TFEOPT(80ns~)

Interface specifications > 19

Receive jitter tolerance

TPERIOD

Differential
Data Lines

TxJR TxJR1 TxJR2

Consecutive
Transitions
*
N TPERIOD + TxJR1
TxJR1 = Min-18.5ns~Max18.5ns
Paired TxJR2 = Min-9ns~Max9ns
Transitions
*
N TPERIOD + TxJR2

Interface specifications > 20

OPTION INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

ITEM DESCRIPTION

Interface system RS232C

Data input Serial Input (Start-Stop synchronisation)

Baud rate 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 BPS

Data word length 7 bits or 8 bits

Parity Odd, even, or no parity1

Stop bit length 1 bit, 2bit or more

Message buffer length Buffer size is selected by ‘Receive Buffer Size’ in MENU.

Communication protocol Ready/Busy

X-ON/X-OFF
Ready/Busy & X-ON/X-OFF (ML5720/ML5721)

1. Setting the data length to 7 bits with no parity is not recommended.

Interface specifications > 21

INTERFACE SIGNALS

PIN NO. SIGNAL CODE SIGNAL FUNCTION

1 Protective PG — Frame ground

Ground

2 Transmitted TD From Data from printer

Data printer

3 Received Data RD To printer Data to printer

4 (Note 2) Request to Send RTS From Signal to indicate printer cannot

printer receive data in printer Busy/Ready
protocol

6 (Note 3) Data Set Ready DSR To printer Indicates that data can be sent
(Printer receives data after
confirming this signal as a SPACE.)

7 Signal Ground SG — Signal ground

11 (Note 2) Supervisory SSD From Signal to indicate printer cannot

Send Data printer receive data in printer Busy/Ready
protocol

20 (Note 2) Data Terminal DTR From Signal to indicate printer cannot

Ready printer receive data in printer Busy/Ready
protocol

5, 8 to 10, — — — Unused
12 to 19,
21 to 25

NOTE
1. Connector pin arrangement for above:

13 1

25 14 (Viewed from interface cable side)

2. SSD signal output can be selected from pins 4, 11, 20 by the MENU.
3. DSR signal valid/invalid can be set by the MENU.

ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS

Signal levels
RS-232C interface signal levels are as specified below, and meet the EIA Standard RS-
232C:
–15 to –3 V: MARK = OFF = LOGIC “1”
+15 to +3 V: SPACE = ON = LOGIC “0”

Interface specifications > 22

Line driver
Equivalent to HIN202

+5V 400kΩ

INPUT OUTPUT

OUTPUT +10V
+5V

-5V

-10V

NOTE
The above figures are the standard values for a load of 3 Kohm, 15 pF.

Line receiver

Equivalent to HIN202

INPUT OUTPUT

5kΩ
+30V
+3V

-3V
INPUT -30V

NOTE
If the power on the input side is OFF, the output of the receiver becomes high
(+2.4 V or more) at TTL level.

Interface specifications > 23

INTERFACE TIMING CHARTS

Receiving timing chart

DSR signal

SPACE

MARK

Start bit

Stop bit

SPACE
RD
MARK

0.5 bit

More than 0 μs More than 300 μs

NOTE
DSR signal valid/invalid can be set by the Menu.

SSD signal timing chart

Data

RD Stop bit
SPACE

MARK

Start bit 0.5 bit

MAX 5 ms
DTR
BUSY

READY

RECEIVING MARGIN
Receiving margin is more than 37% at any baud rate.

DESCRIPTION OF COMMUNICATION PROCEDURES

The types of protocol can be selected by menu communication procedures:
READY/BUSY, X-ON/X-OFF and READY/BUSY & X-ON/X-OFF (ML5720/ML5721).

INTERFACE CONTROL CODE

The following function codes are used in the high-speed serial interface:

COMMAND CODE

DC1 (17)D (11)H

DC3 (19)D (13)H

NOTE
Characters to be printed according to the parity error indication code (40)H
will differ depending on the setting of the printer character set. Refer to the
printer User’s Guide.

Interface specifications > 24

Ready/Busy protocol
Block format Free

Error indication The parity error indication is printed as

character 40(H).

Busy state indication The busy signal turns on (becomes Busy)

when the space in the interface buffer has
become less than 256 bytes. The busy signal
turns off (becomes Ready) after 200 ms or 1
second has passed if 256 bytes have
recovered within 200 ms or 1 second. If the
recovery time exceeds 200 ms or 1 second,
the busy signal turns off (becomes Ready)
immediately after the recovery has occurred.

Timing chart

RD DATA 1 DATA 2

8K
Threshold of the
characters in 512
the buffer
0

DTR ON (BUSY)
OFF (READY 200 ms or 1 second minimum

X-ON/X-OFF protocol
Block format Free

Error indication The parity error indication character is

converted into code 40(H).

Busy state indication The DC3 will be sent to the transmission side
immediately after the space in the interface
buffer has become less than 256 bytes to
indicate that receiving is impossible. The
transmission of the DC3 stops when data
receiving has stopped. If the recovery time
for 256 bytes is within 200 ms or 1 second
after the DC3 is sent, DC1 will be sent 200
ms or 1 second after the recovery to indicate
that receiving is possible. If the recovery
time exceeds 200 ms or 1 second, the DC1
is sent immediately after the recovery has
occurred.

Timing chart
256 characters or less

Waiting for BUSY

RD DATA 1 state to be free DATA
DC-3
DC-3

DC-3

DC1

TD PRINTING

ON
BUSY state
OFF
200 ms or 1 second minimum

NOTE
If data is transferred when the printer is still BUSY, the printer sends a DC3
code every time it receives data.

Interface specifications > 25

LOCAL TEST FUNCTION

Circuit Test mode setting

Diagnostic: Test set by menu
Test connector: Connect the test connectors as shown below to the interface connectors.
2
TD
3
RD
4
RTS
5
Equivalent to Cannon DB-25P CTS
8
CD
11
SSD
20
DTR
6
DSR

Circuit Test mode function

After the settings outlined in Circuit Test mode setting are completed and power is turned
on, the serial interface checks the message buffer memory and interface driver and
receiver circuits, then prints all characters. To start and stop this test, press the SEL button
on the front of the printer. Details of this test are explained below.
1. Print the program revision with two numerical characters.
2. Print “LOOP TEST.”
3. Check memory for message buffer.
Print “GOOD” if memory check is OK, and print “BAD” if memory check fails.
4. Output LOW to DTR, RTS, and SSD signals. If a CTS, DSR, or CD signal is HIGH,
print “BAD”. If the CTS, DSR, and CD signals are all LOW, print “IF GOOD”.
Output HIGH to DTR, RTS, and SSD signals. If a CTS, DSR, or CD signal is LOW, print
“IF BAD.” If the CTS, DSR and CD signals are all HIGH, print “IF GOOD.”
5. Transmit characters from code 20H to 7FH by TD signals. At the same time,
characters are received from the RD signal and stored in the message buffer.
6. Print the characters that were stored in the message buffer as indicated in Step 5.
7. Repeat from Step 1.

Interface specifications > 26

OPERATOR INTERFACE
OPERATOR PANEL FUNCTIONS
The operator panel buttons and LEDs are located as follows:

Button functions depend on the printer state which can be any one of:
> Print Mode (for a summary of print modes and features see “Appendix B – Print
modes/features” on page 311.)
> Hex Dump Mode
> Menu Mode
> Test Mode
> Power On Mode
> Limited Operation

Operator interface > 27

PRINT MODE

BUTTON STATUS FUNCTION

SEL On-line Sets the printer to off-line.

Off-line Sets the printer to on-line.

LF/FF On-line/Off-line Feeds paper by one line.

When pressed for more than 500ms,
performs form feed.

LOAD/EJECT On-line/Off-line
When no paper is loaded Performs paper feed.
When paper is loaded:
Continuous forms Retracts the form to the Pin Tractor.
Cut-sheet paper Ejects the cut sheet.
Pull feed Ineffective.

TEAR On-line/Off-line
Continuous forms Delivers the continuous form to the cut
position.
Pull feed Ineffective.

PRINT QUALITY On-line/Off-line Select a font.

CHR. PITCH On-line/Off-line Select a character pitch.

PRINT SPEED On-line/Off-line Select print speed.

SEL + LF/FF On-line/Off-line Ineffective.

SEL + LOAD/EJECT On-line Ineffective.

Off-line Holding down the SEL button and

pressing the LOAD/EJECT button
initialises the new Menu settings.

SEL + CHR.PITCH On-line Ineffective.

Off-line Selects MENU configuration.

LF/FF + LOAD/EJECT On-line/Off-line Ineffective.

LOAD/EJECT + SEL On-line/Off-line

ML5720/ML5721 Performs microfeed (forward) 1/144 inch
when paper is loaded.

ML5790/ML5791 Performs microfeed (forward) 1/180 inch

when paper is loaded.

LOAD/EJECT + LF/FF On-line/Off-line

ML5720/ML5721 Performs microfeed (reverse) 1/144 inch
when paper is loaded.

ML5790/ML5791 Performs microfeed (reverse) 1/180 inch

when paper is loaded.

TEAR + SEL On-line/Off-line

ML5720/ML5721 Performs microfeed (forward) 1/144 inch
when paper is in tear off position.

ML5790/ML5791 Performs microfeed (forward) 1/180 inch

when paper is in tear off position.

Operator interface > 28

BUTTON STATUS FUNCTION

TEAR + LF/FF On-line/Off-line

ML5720/ML5721 Performs microfeed (reverse) 1/144 inch
when paper is in tear off position.

ML5790/ML5791 Performs microfeed (reverse) 1/180 inch

when paper is in tear off position.

PRINT QUALITY + SEL On-line/Off-line

ML5720/ML5721 Performs microfeed (reverse) 1/144 inch
when paper is in Top of Form position.

ML5790/ML5791 Performs microfeed (reverse) 1/180 inch

when paper is in Top of Form position.

PRINT QUALITY + LF/ On-line/Off-line

FF ML5720/ML5721 Performs microfeed (forward) 1/144 inch
when paper is in Top of Form position.

ML5790/ML5791 Performs microfeed (forward) 1/180 inch

when paper is in Top of Form position.

CHR.PITCH + PRINT On-line/Off-line Enters menu mode.

SPEED

Operator interface > 29

HEX DUMP MODE, MENU MODE, TEST MODE

BUTTON HEX DUMP MODE MENU MODE TEST MODE

SEL On-line: Sets printer Off- - Temporarily suspends

line. test printing.
Off-line: Sets printer On-
line.

LF/FF On-line: Feeds paper by Increments a group in a

one line. ‘GROUP’.
When pressed for more
than 400ms, performs form
feed.
Off-line: When paper is
loaded, performs form feed
for continuous forms and
ejects cut-sheet paper.

LOAD/EJECT > When no paper is loaded: Increments an item in

Performs paper feed. an ‘ITEM’.
> When paper is loaded:
> Continuous
forms:Retracts the
form to the Pin
Tractor.
> Cut-sheet paper:
Ejects the cut sheet.
> Pull feed: Ineffective.

TEAR > Delivers the continuous Increments a set in a

form to the cut position. ‘SET’.
> Pull Feed: Ineffective.

PRINT Selects Print Quality

QUALITY

CHR. PITCH Selects Character Pitch

PRINT SPEED Selects Print Speed.

SEL + LF/FF Decrements a group in

a ‘Group’.

SEL + LOAD/ Decrements an item in

EJECT an ‘ITEM’.

SEL + TEAR Decrements a set in a

‘SET’.

CHR. PITCH + Exits Menu mode.

PRINT SPEED

Operator interface > 30

INDICATORS
NOTE
In recovery impossible alarm state, both SEL and ALARM LEDs blink.

INDICATORS COLOUR STATUS MEANING

(LED)

SEL Green ON Printer is on-line i.e. is available to print.

OFF Printer is off-line i.e. is not available to print.

FLASHING When flashing together with the ALARM LED,

printing cannot be resumed at this stage.
Turn the power OFF, verify that the carriage
moves properly, then turn the power ON
again.
If the problem is still there after you turn the
power ON again, contact your dealer.
When flashing together with TEAR LED,
indicates Top Cover is open.

ALARM Red ON Paper end status i.e. no paper present.

OFF Printer is in normal state.

FLASHING When flashing together with the SEL LED,

printing cannot be resumed at this stage.
Turn the power OFF, verify that the carriage
moves properly, then turn the power ON
again.
If the problem is still there after you turn the
power ON again, contact your dealer.
Indicates paper jam/media switch/incorrect
paper lever setting status
When flashing together with TEAR LED,
indicates High temperature alarm status.

TEAR Green ON Menu mode.

OFF Tear down position.

FLASHING Tear up position.

SLEEP Green FLASHING Low power consumption mode.

ML5720/ML5721

PRINT QUALITY Green ON Without ALARM LED flashing:

> LED 3 > Indicates SSD is selected.
1 2 3 > LED 2 > Indicates HSD is selected.
> LED 2 and 3 > Indicates DRAFT is selected.
> LED 1 > Indicates COURIER is selected.
> LED 1 and 3 > Indicates GOTHIC is selected.
> LED 1 and 2 > Indicates OCR-B is selected.

Operator interface > 31

INDICATORS COLOUR STATUS MEANING
(LED)

CHR.PITCH Green ON 1 2 1 ON:2

With3TEAR LED 1 2
LED 1 Printer is in MENU setting mode.
1 2
ON With Alarm LED flashing:
> LED 2 > Indicates paper loading jam.
> LED 1 > Indicates paper park/eject jam.
> LED 1 and 2 > Indicates incorrect media setting.

ON Without Alarm LED flashing:

> LED 2 > Indicates 10CPI is selected.
> LED 1 > Indicates 12CPI is selected.
> LED 1 and 2 > Indicates 15CPI is selected.

FLASHING With Alarm LED flashing:

> LED 2 > Indicates incorrect paper lever setting.

FLASHING Without Alarm LED flashing:

> LED 2 > Indicates 17CPI is selected.
> LED 1 > Indicates 20CPI is selected.
> LED 1 and 2 > Indicates PROP (Proportional) is selected.

ML5790/ML5791

PRINT QUALITY Green ON Without ALARM LED flashing:

> LED 3 > Indicates HSD is selected.
1 2 3 > LED 2 > Indicates DRAFT is selected.
> LED 2 and LED 3 > Indicates COURIER is selected.
> LED 1 > Indicates ROMAN is selected.
> LED 1 and LED 3 > Indicates SWISS is selected.
> LED 1 and LED 2 > Indicates SWISS-B is selected.
> LED 1, LED 2 and > Indicates ORATOR is selected.
LED 3

FLASHING Without ALARM LED flashing:

> LED 3 > Indicates GOTHIC is selected.
> LED 2 > Indicates PRESTIGE is selected.
> LED 2 and LED 3 > Indicates OCR-A is selected.
> LED 1 > Indicates OCR-B is selected.

CHR.PITCH Gr een ON With TEAR LED ON:

LED 1 Printer is in the MENU setting mode.
1 2
ON Without ALARM LED flashing:
> LED 2 > Indicates 10CPI is selected.
> LED 1 > Indicates 12CPI is selected.
> LED 1 and LED 2 > Indicates 15CPI is selected.

FLASHING Without ALARM LED flashing:

> LED 2 > Indicates 17CPI is selected.
> LED 1 > Indicates 20CPI is selected.
> LED 1 and LED 2 > Indicates PROP (Proportional) is selected.

ON With ALARM LED flashing:

> LED 2 > Indicates paper loading jam.
> LED 1 > Indicates paper park/eject jam.
> LED 1 and LED 2 > Indicates incorrect media setting.

FLASHING With Alarm LED flashing:

> LED 2 > Indicates incorrect paper lever setting.

PRINT SPEED Green ON With TEAR LED OFF:

> LED 2 ON > Indicates NORM (Normal Speed) is selected.
1 2 > LED 1 ON > Indicates HIGH SPEED is selected.
> LED 1 and 2 ON > Indicates QUIET print is selected.

FLASHING
> LED 2 FLASHING > Indicates HIGH COPY is selected.

Operator interface > 32

ALARM/ERROR INDICATIONS

RECOVERABLE ALARMS

NOTE
O : LED continuously ON
X : LED OFF
* : LED blinking (500 ms ON, 500 ms OFF)
Blank : Current LED indication retained

LED SEL ALARM TEAR/ PRINT QUALITY CHR.PITCH PRINT SPEED SLEEP
MENU

Green Red Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green
LED1 LED2 LED3 LED1 LED2 LED1 LED2
PRINTER
STATUS

Power O O O O O O O O O O O
ON

Power X X X X X X X X X X X
OFF

Select O
(on-line)

Deselect X
(off-
line)

Paper O
end

Print *
suppress
-ion

Sleep X X X X X X X X *
mode

Paper X * O
loading
jam

Paper X * O
eject/
parking
jam

Media X * O O
set
alarm

Paper X * *
lever
alarm

Unreco- * *
verable
alarm

Thermal * *
alarm

Menu O
mode

Operator interface > 33

 LED SEL ALARM TEAR/ PRINT QUALITY CHR.PITCH PRINT SPEED SLEEP
MENU

Green Red Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green
LED1 LED2 LED3 LED1 LED2 LED1 LED2
PRINTER
STATUS

Select X X
Menu
configur
-ation 1

Select O O
Menu
configur
-ation 2

Tear up *
position

Cover * *
open

ML5720/ML5721

Font

SSD O

HSD O

DRAFT O O

NLQ O
Courier

NLQ O O
Gothic

NLQ O O
OCR-B

Character Pitch

10 CPI O

12 CPI O

15 CPI O O

17 CPI *

20 CPI *

Propor- * *
tional

ML5790/ML5791

Font

HSD O

DRAFT O

LQ O O
Courier

LQ O
Roman

LQ Swiss O O

Operator interface > 34

 LED SEL ALARM TEAR/ PRINT QUALITY CHR.PITCH PRINT SPEED SLEEP
MENU

Green Red Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green
LED1 LED2 LED3 LED1 LED2 LED1 LED2
PRINTER
STATUS

LQ Swiss O O
Bold

LQ O O O
Orator

LQ *
Gothic

LQ *
Prestige

LQ OCR- * *
A

LQ OCR- *
B

Character Pitch

10 CPI O

12 CPI O

15 CPI O O

17 CPI *

20 CPI *

Propor- * *
tional

Print Speed (ML5720/ML5721/ML5790/ML5791)

Normal O

High O
Speed

Quiet O O

High *
Copy

Operator interface > 35

UNRECOVERABLE ALARMS
Unrecoverable alarms are shown below. The numbers of blinks of the alarms indicate the
states of the alarms.
Alarm indication consists of main blinking and sub-blinking. Main blinking is the concurrent
blinking of the SEL and ALARM LEDs and sub-blinking is the blinking of only the SEL LED.

ALARM INDICATIONS
ALARM CONTENTS
MAIN BLINKING SUB-BLINKING

1 1 Print head homing alarm

2 Spacing alarm

6 FAN alarm (print head)

7 FAN alarm (power supply)

2 1 Program ROM check alarm

2 CG check alarm

7 Program ROM mismatch

alarm

3 3 EEPROM alarm

4 1 CPU internal RAM check

alarm

2 CPU alarm (Pre-fetch abort

alarm)

3 CPU alarm (Data abort

alarm)

4 CPU alarm (Undefined

abort alarm)

5 CPU alarm (Watch Dog

Timer alarm)

6 LSI alarm (Bus control

alarm)

7 LSI alarm (DMA translator

alarm)

9 Interrupt control alarm

5 1 Firmware program alarm

2 OS control alarm (Data

queue full)

6 1 Paper Edge Sensor alarm

9 1 Head thermistor alarm

(Open status)

4 Head thermistor alarm

(Short circuit status)

Operator interface > 36

MENU SELECTION

OVERVIEW
Features selected in Menu mode become the default features for the printer each time it is
powered on. The Menu function allows features to be activated without the use of a
software command but software commands override Menu settings. For details on Button
functions in Print mode refer to “Print mode” on page 28.

OPERATION
1. To enter Menu Mode:
(a) Ensure that the printer is turned on. Place the cut sheet on the paper tray, the
paper is gripped by the printer.
(b) Press and hold down the CHR.PITCH button and then the PRINT SPEED button
to enter menu mode.
2. On entering the Menu mode, “Menu Print?” is printed.
See button functions in “Print mode” on page 28 for a description of how to navigate
the menus.
3. Press the Print Quality button to print all Menu items,
or
Press the LF/FF (GROUP) or LOAD/EJECT (ITEM) or TEAR (SET) button to print the
first menu item.
4. To change a setting:
(a) Press LF/FF button to step forward and SEL + LF/FF to step backward to the
required group.
(b) When in the required Group, press LOAD/EJECT button to step forward and SEL
+ LOAD/EJECT to step backward to the required item.
(c) When in the required Item, press TEAR to step forward and SEL + TEAR/MENU
to step backward to the required value.
5. Repeat these steps to change the settings for other items.
6. To exit menu settings confirmation, save the current settings, press CHR PITCH and
PRINT SPEED buttons together. Save menu is printed.
7. Press LOAD/EJECT button to eject the cut sheet paper.
8. The TOF position is not affected by Menu mode.
(However, TOF setting is executed if page length changes.)

Operator interface > 37

MENU ITEMS
In the menu settings tables below, factory default settings are shown in bold.

GROUP ITEM FUNCTION SETS

ML5720/ML5721 ML5790/ML5791

Printer Emulation Mode Select emulation mode. IBM PPR, EPSON FX, EPSON LQ, IBM PPR,
Control ML IBM AGM

Font Print Mode Select quality of ANK DRAFT LQ Courier

characters. NLQ Courier LQ Roman
NLQ Gothic LQ Swiss
NLQ OCR-B LQ Swiss Bold
HSD LQ Orator
SSD LQ Gothic
LQ Prestige
LQ OCR- A
LQ OCR- B
DRAFT
HSD

Draft mode Select the draft mode. HSD -

SSD

Pitch Select character pitch. 10 CPI

12 CPI
15 CPI
17.1 CPI
20 CPI

Proportional Select whether to use Yes

Spacing proportional spacing or No
not.

Style Select either font style. Normal

Italics

Size Select the character Single

scale size. Double
Selects both double
width and double height
character or single width
and single height
characters.

Operator interface > 38

GROUP ITEM FUNCTION SETS

ML5720/ML5721 ML5790/ML5791

Symbol Character Set Select character code Set I Set I

Sets table. Set II Set II
Standard (ML mode
only)
Line Graphics (ML
mode only)
Block Graphics (ML
mode only)

Language Set Select a language ASCII ASCII

character set. French French
German German
British British
Danish I Danish I
Swedish I Swedish I
Italian Italian
Spanish I Spanish I
Japanese Japanese
Norwegian Norwegian
Danish II Danish II
Spanish II Spanish II
Latin American Dutch Latin American
TRS80 Dutch
Swedish II Swedish II
Swedish III Swedish III
Swedish IV Swedish IV
Turkish Turkish
Swiss I Swiss I
Swiss II Swiss II
Publisher Publisher

Zero Character Select either print font Slashed Slashed

pattern to receive a zero Unslashed Unslashed
character located at 30H
in ANK code.

Operator interface > 39

GROUP ITEM FUNCTION SETS

ML5720/ML5721 ML5790/ML5791

Symbol Code Page Select a code page. USA USA

Sets cont. Canada French Canada French
Multilingual Multilingual
Portugal Portugal
Norway Norway
Turkey Turkey
Greek_437 Greek_437
Greek_869 Greek_869
Greek_928 Greek_928
Greek_437 CYPRUS Greek_437 CYPRUS
Polska Mazovia Polska Mazovia
Serbo Croatic I Serbo Croatic I
Serbo Croatic II Serbo Croatic II
ECMA-94 ECMA-94
Hungarian CWI Hungarian CWI
Windows Greek Windows Greek
Windows East Europe Windows East Europe
Windows Cyrillic Windows Cyrillic
East Europe Latin II - East Europe Latin II -
852 852
Cyrillic I-855 Cyrillic I-855
Cyrillic II-866 Cyrillic II-866
Kamenicky(MJK) Kamenicky (MJK)
ISO Latin 2 ISO Latin 2
Hebrew NC (862) Hebrew NC (862)
Hebrew OC Hebrew OC
Turkey_857 Turkey_857
Latin 5 (Windows Latin 5 (Windows
Turkey) Turkey)
Windows Hebrew Windows Hebrew
Ukrainian Ukrainian
Bulgarian Bulgarian
ISO Latin 6 (8859/ ISO Latin 6 (8859/
10) 10)
Windows Baltic Windows Baltic
Baltic_774 Baltic_774
KBL-Lithuanian KBL-Lithuanian
Cyrillic Latvia Cyrillic Latvia
Roman-8 Roman-8
Icelandic-861 Icelandic-861
Multilingual 858 Multilingual 858
ISO 8859-15 ISO 8859-15
Greek_737 Greek_737
POL1 Asmo 449+
Macedonian Asmo 708
BRASCII Arabic 864
Abicomp Windows Arabic
POL1
Macedonian
BRASCII
Abicomp

Slashed Letter 0 Set whether to convert Yes

slashed 0 located at 9BH No
and 9DH in USA code
page or not.

Operator interface > 40

GROUP ITEM FUNCTION SETS

ML5720/ML5721 ML5790/ML5791

Rear Feed Line Spacing Select line feed pitch. 6 LPI

(Push) 8LPI

Form Tear-Off When printer is idle (0.5, Manual

1.0 or 2.0 sec), paper is 0.5 sec
advanced from the 1.0 sec
current print position to 2.0 sec
the tear position. When
data is received, paper is
moved to its original
printing position.

Skip Over Select whether to skip No

Perforation over perforation or not. 25.4 mm (1”)
(When a skip over
perforation command is
received, the received
command is given
priority.)

Page Width Change to 8” to print on 345.44 mm (13.6”)

(Displayed only for narrow paper. 203.2 mm (8”)
ML5721 and
ML5791)

Page Length Select the length of a 279.4 mm (11”)

continuous form. 296.3 mm (11 2/3”)
304.8 mm (12”)
355.6 mm (14”)
431.8 mm (17”)
76.2 mm (3”)
82.6 mm (3.25”)
84.7 mm (10/3”)
88.9 mm (3.5”)
93.1 mm (11/3”)
101.6 mm (4”)
127.0 mm (5”)
139.7 mm (5.5”)
152.4 mm (6”)
177.8 mm (7”)
203.2 mm (8”)
215.9 mm (8.5”)

Initial Position Select the vertical print Print Position

position when printer is Cut Position
turned on.

Cut Position Adjust Select an adjustment -20 ~ -1 -30 ~ -1

value for the position to 0 0
cut the end of a +1 ~ +20 +1 ~ +30
continuous form.

TOF Adjust Select an adjustment -20 ~ -1 -30 ~ -1

value for the reference 0 0
position in regard to the +1 ~ +20 +1 ~ +30
TOF position of a
continuous form.

Operator interface > 41

GROUP ITEM FUNCTION SETS

ML5720/ML5721 ML5790/ML5791

Rear Feed Continuous Paper Select an adjustment 2.12 mm (1/12”)

(Push) Top of Form value for the reference 4.23 mm (2/12”)
cont. position in regard to the 6.35 mm (3/12”)
Top of Form of a 8.47 mm (4/12”)
continuous form. 10.58 mm (5/12”)
12.70 mm (6/12”)
14.82 mm (7/12”)
16.93 mm (8/12”)
19.05 mm (9/12”)
21.17 mm (10/12”)
23.28 mm (11/12”)
25.40 mm (12/12”)
27.52 mm (13/12”)
User Top of Form

LF Revise Adjust the line feed -2

amount. -1
0
+1
+2

Centering Position Select to limit printhead Default

travel when printing Mode1
narrow columns. Mode2
Select Mode1 for
ML5720 and ML5790.
Select Mode 1 or Mode 2
for ML5721.

Front Line Spacing Select line feed pitch. 6 LPI

Feed 8LPI
(Push)
Form Tear-Off When printer is idle (0.5, Manual
1.0 or 2.0 sec), paper is 0.5 sec
advanced from the 1.0 sec
current print position to 2.0 sec
the tear position. When
data is received, paper is
moved to its original
printing position.

Skip Over Select whether to skip No

Perforation over perforation or not. 25.4 mm (1”)
(When a skip over
perforation command is
received, the received
command is given
priority.)

Page Width Change to 8” to print on 345.44 mm (13.6”)

(Displayed only for narrow paper. 203.2 mm (8”)
ML5721 and
ML5791)

Operator interface > 42

GROUP ITEM FUNCTION SETS

ML5720/ML5721 ML5790/ML5791

Front Page Length Select the length of a 279.4 mm (11”)

Feed continuous form. 296.3 mm (11 2/3”)
(Push) 304.8 mm (12”)
cont. 355.6 mm (14”)
431.8 mm (17”)
76.2 mm (3”)
82.6 mm (3.25”)
84.7 mm (10/3”)
88.9 mm (3.5”)
93.1 mm (11/3”)
101.6 mm (4”)
127.0 mm (5”)
139.7 mm (5.5”)
152.4 mm (6”)
177.8 mm (7”)
203.2 mm (8”)
215.9 mm (8.5”)

Initial Position Select the vertical print Print Position

position when printer is Cut Position
turned on.

Cut Position Adjust Select an adjustment -20 ~ -1 -30 ~ -1

value for the position to 0 0
cut the end of a +1 ~ +20 +1 ~ +30
continuous form.

TOF Adjust Select an adjustment -20 ~ -1 -30 ~ -1

value for the reference 0 0
position in regard to the +1 ~ +20 +1 ~ +30
TOF position of a
continuous form.

Continuous Paper Select an adjustment 2.12 mm (1/12”)

Top of Form value for the reference 4.23 mm (2/12”)
position in regard to the 6.35 mm (3/12”)
Top of Form of a 8.47 mm (4/12”)
continuous form. 10.58 mm (5/12”)
12.70 mm (6/12”)
14.82 mm (7/12”)
16.93 mm (8/12”)
19.05 mm (9/12”)
21.17 mm (10/12”)
23.28 mm (11/12”)
25.40 mm (12/12”)
27.52 mm (13/12”)
User Top of Form

LF Revise Adjust the line feed -2

amount. -1
0
+1
+2

Centering Position Select to limit printhead Default

travel when printing Mode 1
narrow columns. Mode 2
Select Mode1 for
ML5720 and ML5790.
Select Mode 1 or Mode 2
for ML5721 and ML5791.

Operator interface > 43

GROUP ITEM FUNCTION SETS

ML5720/ML5721 ML5790/ML5791

Pull Line Spacing Select line feed pitch. 6 LPI

8 LPI

Skip Over Select whether to skip No

Perforation over perforation or not. 25.4 mm (1”)
(When a skip over
perforation command is
received, the received
command is given
priority.)

Page width Change to 8” to print on 345.44 mm (13.6”)

(Displayed only for narrow paper. 203.2 mm (8”)
ML5721/ML5791)

Page Length Select the length of a 279.4 mm (11”)

continuous form. 296.3 mm (11 2/3”)
304.8 mm (12”)
355.6 mm (14”)
431.8 mm (17”)
76.2 mm (3”)
82.6 mm (3.25”)
84.7 mm (10/3”)
88.9 mm (3.5”)
93.1 mm (11/3”)
101.6 mm (4”)
127.0 mm (5”)
139.7 mm (5.5”)
152.4 mm (6”)
177.8 mm (7”)
203.2 mm (8”)
215.9 mm (8.5”)

LF Revise Adjust the line feed -2 -14 ~ -1

amount. -1 0
0 +1 ~ +14
+1
+2

Centering Position Select to limit printhead Default

travel when printing Mode 1
narrow columns. Mode 2
Select Mode1 for
ML5720/ML5790.
Select Mode 1 or Mode 2
for ML5721/ML5791.

Cut Sheet Line Spacing Select line feed pitch. 6 LPI

Top 8 LPI

Form Tear-Off When printer is idle (0.5, Manual

(Displayed when 1.0 or 2.0 sec), paper is 0.5 sec
connected to the advanced from the 1.0 sec
RPS) current print position to 2.0 sec
the tear position. When
data is received, paper is
moved to its original
printing position.

Page width Change to 8” to print on 345.44 mm (13.6”)

(Displayed only for narrow paper. 203.2 mm (8”)
ML5721/ML5791)

Operator interface > 44

GROUP ITEM FUNCTION SETS

ML5720/ML5721 ML5790/ML5791

Cut Sheet Page Length Select the page length of 279.4 mm (11” in)
Top cont. cut sheet. 296.3 mm (11 2/3”)
304.8 mm (12”)
420.9 mm (16.57”)
355.6 mm (14”)
76.2 mm (3”)
82.6 mm (3.25”)
84.7 mm (10/3”)
88.9 mm (3.5”)
93.1 mm (11/3”)
101.6 mm (4”)
127.0 mm (5”)
139.7 mm (5.5”)
152.4 mm (6”)
177.8 mm (7”)
203.2 mm (8”)
215.9 mm (8.5”)

Initial Position Select the vertical print Print Position

(Displayed when position when printer is Cut Position
connected to the turned on.
RPS)(ML5720/
ML5790)

Cut Position Adjust Select an adjustment -20 ~ -1 -30 ~ -1

(Displayed when value for the position to 0 0
connected to the cut the end of a +1 ~ +20 +1 ~ +30
RPS)(ML5720/ continuous form.
ML5790)

Wait Time Select the waiting time Invalid

between setting paper 0.5 sec
on the tray and feeding 1.0 sec
it while the printer is 1.5 sec
waiting for paper to be 2.0 sec
fed in cut sheet manual 3.0 sec
feed mode.

Paper Length Control the page length by MENU setting by MENU setting
Control of cut sheet. by Actual Page by Actual Page
Length Length

Cut Sheet Auto Select a printable area 6.35 mm (3/12”)

Eject Position at the bottom of cut 12.70 mm (6/12”)
sheets of paper in cut- 14.82 mm (7/12”)
paper mode (the Invalid
character center
position.)

TOF Adjust Select an adjustment -20 ~ -1 -30 ~ -1

value for the reference 0 0
position in regard to the +1 ~ +20 +1 ~ +30
TOF position of cut sheet
paper.
The position moves to
the rear of the form by
(+) and to the top of the
form by (-) in /1/144”
(ML5720/ML5721) and
1/180” (ML5790/
ML5791) increments.

Operator interface > 45

GROUP ITEM FUNCTION SETS

ML5720/ML5721 ML5790/ML5791

Cut Sheet Cut Sheet Top of Select the reference 2.12 mm (1/12”)
Top cont. Form position for the TOF 4.23 mm (2/12”)
position when feeding 6.35 mm (3/12”)
cut sheet. (Up to the 8.47 mm (4/12”)
mid-section of 10.58 mm (5/12”)
characters in the first 12.70 mm (6/12”)
line.) 14.82 mm (7/12”)
16.93 mm (8/12”)
19.05 mm (9/12”)
21.17 mm (10/12”)
23.28 mm (11/12”)
25.40 mm (12/12”)
27.52 mm (13/12”)
User Top of Form

LF Revise Adjust a line feed in the -14 ~ -1

cut sheet mode. 0
+1 ~ +14

Centering Position Select to limit printhead Default

travel when printing Mode 1
narrow columns. Mode 2
Select Mode1 for
ML5720.
Select Mode 1 or Mode 2
for ML5721.

Cut Sheet Line Spacing Select line feed pitch. 6 LPI

Front 8 LPI

Page width Change to 8” to print on 345.44 mm (13.6”)

(Displayed only for narrow paper. 203.2 mm (8”)
ML5721/ML5791)

Page Length Select the length of cut 279.4 mm (11”)

sheet. 296.3 mm (11 2/32”)
304.8 mm (12”)
355.6 mm (14”)
420.9 mm (16.57”)
76.2 mm (3”)
82.6 mm (3.25”)
84.7 mm (10/3”)
88.9 mm (3.5”)
93.1 mm (11/3”)
101.6 mm (4”)
127.0 mm (5”)
139.7 mm (5.5”)
152.4 mm (6”)
177.8 mm (7”)
203.2 mm (8”)
215.9 mm (8.5”)

Wait Time Select the waiting time Invalid

between setting paper 0.5 sec
on the tray and feeding 1.0 sec
it while the printer is 1.5 sec
waiting for paper to be 2.0 sec
fed in cut sheet manual 3.0 sec
feed mode.

Paper Length Control the page length by MENU setting by MENU setting
Control of cut sheet. by Actual Page by Actual Page
Length Length

Operator interface > 46

GROUP ITEM FUNCTION SETS

ML5720/ML5721 ML5790/ML5791

Cut Sheet Cut Sheet Auto Select a printable area 6.35 mm (3/12”)
Front Eject Position at the bottom of cut 12.70 mm (6/12”)
cont. sheet paper in cut sheet 14.82 mm (7/12”)
mode (the character Invalid
centre position).

TOF Adjust Select an adjustment -20 ~ -1 -30 ~ -1

value for the reference 0 0
position in regard to the +1 ~ +20 +1 ~ +30
TOF position of cut sheet
paper.
The position moves to
the rear of the form by
(+) and to the top of the
form by (-) in 1/144”
(ML5720/21) and 1/180”
(ML5790/91)
increments.

Cut Sheet Top of Select the reference 2.12 mm (1/12”)

Form position for the TOF 4.23 mm (2/12”)
position when feeding 6.35 mm (3/12”)
cut sheet. (Up to the 8.47 mm (4/12”)
mid-section of 10.58 mm (5/12”)
characters in the first 12.70 mm (6/12”)
line.) 14.82 mm (7/12”)
16.93 mm (8/12”)
19.05 mm (9/12”)
21.17 mm (10/12”)
23.28 mm (11/12”)
25.40 mm (12/12”)
27.52 mm (13/12”)
User Top of Form

LF Revise Adjust a line feed -14 ~ -1

amount in the cut sheet 0
mode. +1 ~ +14

Centering Position Select to limit printhead Default

travel when printing Mode 1
narrow columns. Mode 2
Select Mode1 for
ML5720/ML5790.
Select Mode 1 or Mode 2
for ML5721/ML5791.

Set-up Graphics Select the printing Uni-directional

direction when double- Bi-directional
height print data exists
in a line.

7 or 8 Bits Select to change 7 -

Graphics graphics settings. 8
(Displayed only for
ML Emulation)

Receive Buffer Select size of the 0K

Size received buffer. 1 Line
When “1 Line” is 32 K
selected, the receive 64 K
buffer size is set to 2 k 128 K
bytes.

Operator interface > 47

GROUP ITEM FUNCTION SETS

ML5720/ML5721 ML5790/ML5791

Set-up Paper End Select whether to detect On -

cont. Detection paper end or not. Off
Change to OFF to
override the sensor and
print closer to the
bottom of the page.

Print Registration Adjust the print starting -10 ~ -1

1 position on printing in 0
the reverse direction. +10 ~ +1
(The position moves to
the right or left in 1/720
in increments.)

Print Registration Adjust the print starting -10 ~ -1

2 position on printing in 0
the reverse direction. +10 ~ +1
(The position moves to
the right or left in 1/720
in increments.)

Print Registration Adjust the print starting -10 ~ -1

3 position on printing in 0
the reverse direction. +10 ~ +1
(The position moves to
the right or left in 1/720
in increments.)

Print Registration Adjust the print starting -10 ~ -1

4 position on printing in 0
the reverse direction. +10 ~ +1
(The position moves to
the right or left in 1/720
in increments.)

7 or 8 Bits Data Select data word 7 -

Word lengths. 8

Operator Panel Select full or limited Full Operation

Function operation. Limited Operation

Reset Inhibit Changing this to Yes No

prevents a reset signal Yes
from the computer from
resetting the printer to
its defaults.

Print Suppress Select whether to enable No

Effective or disable a print Yes
suppress setup
command.

Auto LF Select whether to No

perform auto LF Yes
operation or not upon
receiving a CR code. If
your print out is
consistently double
spaced, select No, if it
overprints, select Yes.

Auto CR Select Yes to add a No

(Displayed only for carriage return when a Yes
IBM emulation) Line Feed is received at
the end of a line.

Operator interface > 48

GROUP ITEM FUNCTION SETS

ML5720/ML5721 ML5790/ML5791

Set-up Print DEL Code Change the setting to No -

cont. (Displayed only for Yes to print the DEL Yes
ML Emulation) code (decimal 27) as a
solid box.

SI Select Pitch (10 Select how to handle an 17.1 CPI

CPI) (Displayed SI command received in 15 CPI
only for IBM 10 CPI mode.
emulation)

SI Select Pitch (12 Select how to handle an 12 CPI

CPI) (Displayed SI command received in 20 CPI
only for IBM 12 CPI mode.
emulation)

Time Out Print Select valid or invalid. Invalid

Valid

Auto Select Determines whether or Yes

not the printer will No
automatically be
selected after you load
in paper. Select No if
you want to set the Top
of Form position.

Host Interface Selects which interface Auto Interface

the printer uses to Parallel
receive printing USB
commands. Optional

I/F Time Out Sets the length of time 15 sec

before the interface 30 sec
switches to idle status 45 sec
when no printing 1 min
commands have been 2 min
received. 3 min
4 min
5 min

ESC SI Pitch Sets the character pitch 17.1 CPI

(Displayed only for used when the ESC SI 20 CPI
IBM emulation) command is received.

Select Language Changing the language Combined

Set set replaces certain Code Page Only
standard symbols with
special characters used
in foreign languages.

Print Style Select the printer impact Normal

mode. High Speed
Quiet
High Copy

Select Quiet Mode Select Quiet print mode. Mode 1

Mode 2

Select High Copy Select High Copy print Mode 1

Mode mode. Mode 2
Mode 3
Mode 4

Reverse Feed Set reverse feed control. TOF Stop

Control TOF Over

Operator interface > 49

GROUP ITEM FUNCTION SETS

ML5720/ML5721 ML5790/ML5791

Set-up Print Direction at Select the print direction Uni-directional

cont. DH Mode at the double height Bi-directional
printed.

Sleep Mode Set whether to enable or Enable

disable sleep mode. Disable

Sleep Time Set idle time to enter 5 min

sleep mode. 10 min
15 min
30 min
60 min

Pin Control Select whether to have - Standard

or not have print control Special
during line printing.

Pin Control Select Select the method to - Mode1

print lines when Special Mode2
is selected in Pin Control
menu.

Paper End Select when to detect On-line

Paper End. Off-line

FF Function Set feeding operation Eject

upon receiving an FF Form Feed
code after cut paper is
fed.

Cut Sheet Park Select Valid to enable Invalid

Function paper feed out of the cut Valid
sheet.

Feed Up when Select Yes to move the No

Menu Printing paper to the top cover to Yes
see the MENU printing.

Parallel I-prime Select whether to print Invalid

I/F or clear buffer contents Buffer Print
upon initialisation by Buffer Clear
receiving I-PRIME.

Auto Feed XT Select the validity of an Valid

(Displayed only for Auto Feed XT signal. Invalid
EPSON emulation)

Bi-direction Set whether to return a Enable

device ID or not in Disable
accordance with
IEEE1284.

Serial I/F Parity None: Absence of parity None

(Displ- bit Odd
ayed Odd: Odd parity Even
when Even: Even parity Ignore
connec- Ignore: Do not convert
ted to the character to ox40 in
Serial case of parity error.
Interface)
Serial Data 7/8 Select Serial bit. 8 bit
Bits 7 bit

Protocol Select an I/F Busy Ready/Busy

control method. X-On/X-OFF
Ready/Busy & X-ON/X-OFF

Operator interface > 50

GROUP ITEM FUNCTION SETS

ML5720/ML5721 ML5790/ML5791

Serial I/F Diagnostic Test Select to perform input/ No

cont. output diagnosis of Yes
(Displ- RS-232C interface
ayed signals.
when
connec- Busy Line Select to set the Busy SSD-
ted to Line. SSD+
Serial DTR
Interface) RTS

Baud Rate Select to set the Baud 9,600 bps

Rate. 4,800 bps
2,400 bps
1,200 bps
600 bps
300 bps
19,200 bps

DSR Signal Select the DSR Signal. Valid

Invalid

DTR Signal Select a method to Ready on Power Up

switch a DTR signal of a Ready on Select
serial interface.

Busy Time Select the minimum 0.2 sec

time between BUSY to 1.0 sec
READY.

Stop Bit Select the stop bit. 1 bit

2 bit

Receive error Select the receive error. Checked

Unchecked

CSF Bin 1 Line spacing Select line feed pitch 6 LPI

(Display- 8 LPI
ed when
Page Width Change to 8 inch to print 203.2 mm (8”)
Single-bin
(Displayed only for on letter size paper. 345.44 mm (13.6”)
Cut-sheet
ML5721/ML5791)
feeder is
installed) Page Length Select the length of cut 279.4 mm (11”)
sheet. 296.3 mm (11 2/3”)
304.8 mm (12”)
355.6 mm (14”)
420.9 mm (16.57”)
76.2 mm (3”)
82.6 mm (3.25”)
84.7 mm (10/3”)
88.9 mm (3.5”)
93.1 mm (11/3”)
101.6 mm (4”)
127.0 mm (5”)
139.7 mm (5.5”)
152.4 mm (6”)
177.8 mm (7”)
203.2 mm (8”)
215.9 mm (8.5”)

Cut Sheet Auto Select a printable area 6.35 mm (3/12 in)

Eject Position at the bottom of cut 12.7 mm (6/12 in)
sheet paper in cut sheet 14.82 mm (7/12 in)
mode (the character
centre position).

Operator interface > 51

GROUP ITEM FUNCTION SETS

ML5720/ML5721 ML5790/ML5791

CSF Bin 1 TOF Adjust Select an adjustment -20 ~ -1

cont. value for the reference 0
(Display- position in regard to the +1 ~ +20
ed when TOF position of cut sheet
Single-bin paper.
Cut-sheet The position moves to
feeder is the rear of the form by
installed) (+) and to the top of the
form by (-) in 1/60 in
increments.

Cut Sheet Top Of Select the reference 2.12 mm (1/12”)

Form position for the TOF 4.23 mm (2/12”)
position when feeding 6.35 mm (3/12”)
cut sheet. (Up to the 8.47 mm (4/12”)
mid-section of 10.58 mm (5/12”)
characters in the first 12.70 mm (6/12”)
line.) 14.82 mm (7/12”)
16.93 mm (8/12”)
19.05 mm (9/12”)
21.17 mm (10/12”)
23.28 mm (11/12”)
25.40 mm (12/12”)
27.52 mm (13/12”)
User Top of Form

LF Revise Adjust a line feed -14 ~ -1

amount in the cut sheet 0
mode. +1 ~ +14

Centering Position Select to limit printhead Default

travel when printing Mode 1
narrow columns. Mode 2
Select Mode1 for
ML5720.
Select Mode 1 or Mode 2
for ML5721.

Extension Detect Sprocket Select Enable when Enable

Hole loading continuous form Disable
to detect sprocket hole,
and avoid printing on
the hole.

Right Margin Select to set the blank Right Margin Over

(Fanfold) space (width) on the 1 mm
right side of the 3 mm
continuous form. 5.08 mm
10 mm
13 mm
15 mm
20 mm
25 mm

Right Margin (Cut Select to set the blank Right Margin

Sheet) space (width) on the 1 mm
right side of the cut- 2 mm
sheet paper. 3 mm
4 mm
5 mm
6 mm

Operator interface > 52

SELF TEST PRINTING
1. Start:
(a) Press and hold down the SEL + LF/FF buttons and turn on the power to enter
the Maintenance menu mode.
(b) Press and hold down the LF/FF button and press the LOAD/EJECT button.
2. Stop:
The printer will stop after printing a test pattern.
3. Print Pattern:
(a) Header:
aaaaa bbb C F/W dd.ee ffffffffYR-gg
LD hh.ii

as defined by:

POSITION & DESCRIPTION DATA COMMENTS

CHAR. PRINTED
COUNT

aaaaa Model name ML57xx Narrow chassis

ML57xx Wide chassis

bbb Compatibility MEI ML/EPSON/IBM

compatible

C User OEL User

dd.ee Revision no. 00.00 - 99.99 Firmware

revision

ffffffff Part Number 44203201YR YR number

(ML572x)
44203101YR
(ML579x)

gg Part Number 01-99 ROM-FD

number

hh.ii Revision no. 00.00-99.99 Flash Loader

revision

(b) The test pattern is a consecutive printing of ASCII characters 20H to 7EH in all
print quality and pitch combinations

NUMBER OF CHARACTERS PRINTED PER LINE

CPI NARROW WIDE

5 (ML572x only) 40 40

10 80 80

12 96 96

15 (ML579x only) 120 120

17.1 137 137

20 (ML579x) 160 160

Operator interface > 53

ROLLING ASCII SELF TEST PRINTING
1. Start:
(a) Press and hold down the SEL + LF/FF buttons and turn on the printer to enter
the maintenance mode.
(b) Press and hold down the LF/FF button and press the SEL button.
2. Stop:
Stop the test by switching off the printer power.
3. Print pattern:
(a) Header:
aaaaa bbb C F/W dd.ee ffffffffYR-gg
LD hh. ii

as defined by:

POSITION & DESCRIPTION DATA COMMENTS

CHAR. COUNT PRINTED

aaaaa Model name ML57xx Narrow chassis

Wide chassis

bbb Compatibility MEI ML/EPSON/IBM

compatible

C User OEL User

dd.ee Revision Number 00.00-99.99 Firmware

revision

ffffffff Part Number 44203201YR YR Number

(ML572x)
44203101YR
(ML579x)

gg Part Number 01–99 ROM-FD

Number

hh.ii Revision no. 00.00-99.99 Flash Loader

revision

4. Test pattern:
Printing features/modes = Current Menu value.
Pattern will continuously print all ASCII characters (20H to 7EH).
Number of characters printed per line:

CPI NARROW WIDE REMARKS

(SEE NOTE)

10 80 136 (80)

12 80 136 (80)

17.1 80 136 (80)

20 80 136 (80)

NOTE
When page width is set at 8 inches.

Operator interface > 54

HEXADECIMAL DUMP MODE

OVERVIEW
Normally a printer prints character patterns that correspond with the input character code.
The printer does not print function codes or invalid codes. If the printer does not operate
normally, the data sent from the host computer must be checked to determine if the
commands are correct.
In this mode the printer converts input data into hexadecimal data and prints all the input
data, making it is easy to check all the codes sent from the host computer to the printer.

OPERATION
1. Entering Hexadecimal Dump mode:
Press and hold down the SEL + LF/FF buttons and switch ON the printer to enter the
maintenance mode.
Press and hold down the SEL button and press the LOAD/EJECT button.
2. Exiting Hexadecimal Dump mode:
To exit switch OFF the printer power.
3. Print pattern:
Hex Data Dump
Address Hex equivalent of received data ASCII equivalent

Hex Data Dump

< LF>
XXXX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX ............ .............
XXXX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX ............ .............
XXXX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX ............ .............
.
.

etc.

NOTE
All ASCII control codes are printed as a period “.”.

4. ASCII equivalent of incoming data:

00H - 1FH = ASCII “period”
20H - 7EH = normal ASCII equivalent
7FH = ASCII “period”
80H - 9FH = ASCII “period”
80H - 9FH = normal ASCII equivalent
AOH - FEH = ASCII “period”
FFH = ASCII “period”

Operator interface > 55

FUNCTION
> Prints in 10 CPI Draft mode.
> This function operates with Parallel, USB and Optional Network and RS-232 C Serial
interfaces.
> When using Cut-sheet paper, one inch from the bottom of the paper will not be
printed. Hex-dump print action is initiated when more than 16 bytes of data is
received (one full line). If data received is less than 16 bytes, printing will start
automatically after a time out condition (approx. 2 seconds) is detected.
> Hex-dump printing is bi-directional.

AUTOMATIC PAPER LOADING

Automatic paper loading is available for both Cut-sheet and continuous paper.
To load paper automatically:
1. Remove cut sheet paper by pressing LOAD/EJECT button or remove continuous form
by using the Auto-Park feature, see “Auto-parking” on page 57.
2. Set the Paper Type lever to the desired paper feed.
3. To load paper:
(a) Insert cut sheet paper using paper guides or set the continuous paper on the
push tractor.
(b) To load
Insert the cut sheet at TOF (Top of Form) feed position, the cut sheet is
automatically loaded.or...
Press LOAD/EJECT to load continuous form
(c) Adjust TOF using the LOAD/EJECT + LF/FF buttons or LOAD/EJECT + SEL
buttons.
For continuous forms, press the TEAR button to move the form down, and then
press:
LOAD/EJECT + LF/FF = Reverse line feed
LOAD/EJECT + SEL = Forward line feed

NOTE
> For ML5720/ML5721: Line feeds are at 1/144”.
> For ML5790/ML5791: Line feeds are at 1/180”.
> Automatic paper loading function is not possible when the paper is set at
Pull (bottom feed) position.

Operator interface > 56

AUTO-PARKING
The auto-park feature allows continuous form paper to be retracted from the printing
position to allow printing on cut-sheet paper, without removing the continuous paper from
the printer.
To auto-park continuous form:
1. Tear the continuous form paper at the tear bar.
2. Press the LOAD/EJECT button and the
> Printer goes offline.
> Continuous form is automatically retracted.
> Alarm LED is On indicating no paper is loaded in the printer.
3. To load cut-sheet or continuous form paper refer to “Automatic paper loading” on
page 56.

FORM TEAR-OFF

FUNCTION
Form tear-off allows the user to tear the continuous forms paper at a desired cut position
by advancing the paper to the cutting edge of the front access cover.

SET-UP
1. Conditions:
(a) Continuous forms paper is loaded into the push tractor feed.
2. Tear Position:
(a) Load continuous forms paper.
Press the TEAR button to move the paper up to tear position.
(b) Adjust to the desired tear position using fine LFs:
TEAR + LF/FF = Reverse fine Line Feed
TEAR + SEL = Forward fine Line Feed.

NOTE
ML5720/ML5721: Line feeds are at 1/144”
ML5790/ML5791: Line feeds are at 1/180”

ACTION
(a) The paper will advance to the tear-off position approximately 500ms/1sec/2sec
after printing.
(b) When data is received by the printer or the SEL button is pressed to select the
printer, the paper will retract to the user-defined printing position.
(c) Tear Up/Down operations are alternately executed by pressing the TEAR button.

Operator interface > 57

PRINT POSITION
When the printer is Online, pressing the LOAD/EJECT button along with SEL or LF/FF button
will set the first line of print or the print position.
Set the desired first line of print by pressing:
LOAD/EJECT + LF/FF = Reverse print position adjustment
LOAD/EJECT + SEL = Forward print position adjustment

NOTE
ML5720/ML5721: Print position adjustments are at 1/144”
ML5790/ML5791: Print position adjustments are at 1/180”

QUIET PRINTING
Select Quiet mode by pressing the PRINT SPEED button. This printer series supports two
types of Quiet mode:

MENU SET PRINTER PRINT PRINT WAIT

ITEM SIZE SPEED PASS TIME

Quiet Mode 1 ML5720 30% 1 pass 50ms

Mode down

ML5721 30% 1 pass 100ms

down

ML5790/ 50% 2 pass 250ms

ML5791 down

Mode2 ML5720/ 30% 2 pass 50ms

ML5721/ down

ML5790/ 50% 2 pass 250ms

ML5791 down

HIGH-COPY PRINTING
Select High-copy mode by pressing the PRINT SPEED button. This printer series supports
four types of High-copy mode:

MENU SET PRINTER PRINT SPEED PRINT PASS

ITEM METHOD
ML5720/ML5721 ML5790/ML5791

High-copy Mode 1 Double - strike print 50% down 100% down 1 pass 2 pass
Mode
Mode 2 Triple - strike print 50% down 100% down 2 pass 3 pass

Mode 3 Four - strike print 50% down 100% down 2 pass 4 pass

Mode 4 Fifth - strike print 50% down 100% down 3 pass 5 pass

Operator interface > 58

COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
ML5720/ML5721
For a summary of the commands available see “Appendix A – Command summary” on
page 295.

HORIZONTAL CONTROL

Carriage return—Execute
> Code: CR
> Compatibility: EPS FX/IBM III/ML
> Function:
Initiate printing action; print data in the print buffer by causing a print block change
and set the next printable data’s print position to the left margin.
> Additional details:
If Auto-LF is activated, a CR will also cause a LF to execute. This action will take place
if there is, or if there is not data in the print buffer.
The text feature, “Double Wide (expanded)—one line only”, designated by SO and
ESC SO (Epson mode only) will be reset since the “CR” terminates the current print
line.

Backspace
> Code: BS
> Compatibility: EPS FX/IBM lll
> Function:
Print the data in the print buffer and move the printhead one current character width
to the left.
> Additional details:
Size (distance) of the BS are as follows:
BS + DBL-Width -> double width BS
BS + char. pitch -> BS the amount of the current char. pitch
BS + Inter-char clearance -> BS normal char width + clearance
BS + Proportional -> causes the print head to backspace a 10 CPI character width.
When BS is executed, if a multipass character (e.g. double height characters) is in
the print buffer, then the paper is reverse fed to the original printing position of the
multipass character, and the character is printed. (Accurate printing is however not
assured).
Once the current print position has reached the left margin, BS will be ignored.
(Epson)
The print head backspaces to the left margin position. (IBM)
BS + right, center, full justification -> BS is ignored.

Command descriptions > 59

Backspace
> Code: BS
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Move the printhead one current matrix cell width (character cell and Inter-character
clearance columns) to the left.
> Additional details
When BS is executed, if a multipass character (e.g. double height characters) is in
the print buffer, then the paper is reverse fed to the original printing position of the
multipass character, and the character is printed. (Accurate printing is however not
assured).
If no “printable” data (including “space) has been previously received by the printer,
the BS is ignored.
If there is character data on a line formed by 12 vertical dots, such as Line Graphics,
and a BS command is executed, the printer performs a line feed to the printing
position of the next data block and prints.
The left margin is the limit to the positioning of the printhead when multiple BS
commands are executed. Any subsequent BS commands, processed after this limit is
reached, are ignored.
Regardless of any CPI change in the middle of the print line, the distance that the
printhead moves backward is the same as the width of the matrix cell (which includes
Inter-character clearance columns) of the CPI that was active previous to the
processing of the BS command.
Backspace does not initiate printing action (block change); it is executed when
character data or a “initiate printing action” command is received.
BS + DBL-Width -> double width BS
BS + Inter-char clearance -> BS normal char width + clearance
BS + Proportional -> Current CPI character width without proportional.

Delete
> Code: DEL
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function:
Delete the last printable character data in the print buffer.
> Additional details:
If the data to be deleted is a SP code, (20) H or (32) D, one SP code is deleted by this
command.
If the data to be deleted is in bit image graphics, this command is ignored.
H-TABs are not deleted.

Command descriptions > 60

Print direction—select unibidirectional print
> Code: ESC U n
> Compatibility: EPS FX/IBM lll
> Function:
Choose between left-to-right (Uni-directional) printing which achieves improved
inter-line print registration, or Bi-directional printing which achieves faster
throughput.
> Range:

UNI-DIRECTIONAL BI-DIRECTIONAL

Epson 01H, 31H, 81H or B1H 00H, 30H, 80H or B0H

IBM Odd numbers Even numbers

> Out of Range:

This command will be ignored if n equals any other values except for the values
mentioned above.
> Additional details:
Short-line-seeking is performed in both Uni-directional and Bi-directional print
modes.
When the first thermal threshold of the printhead is sensed, the printer automatically
enters Uni-directional printing mode.

Print direction—uni-directional print—one line only

> Code: ESC <
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function:
For one print line only, choose left-to-right (Uni-directional) printing for improved
inter-line print registration.
> Additional details:
Subsequent lines will be printed bi-directionally, according to short line logic seeking
priorities.

Print Direction—uni-directional
> Code: ESC—
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Print while moving the carriage from left to right only; used to improve dot alignment
between print lines.
> Additional details:
Uni-directional short-line-seeking is performed.

Command descriptions > 61

Print direction—bi-directional
> Code: ESC =
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Cancel Uni-directional print and return to Bi-directional print for quicker throughput.
> Additional details:
Bi-directional printing is the power-up default and the normal mode of printing.

Print position—execute print position from left margin

> Code: ESC $ n1 n2
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function:
Initiate printing action by starting to print at the position specified from the left
margin.
> Range:
n1 is a decimal number value 0 – 255.
n2 is a decimal number value 0 – 255.
> Out of range:
Any position specified beyond the right margin is ignored.
> Additional details:
Dot position = (n1 + n2*256)/60 to the right of the left margin.
The position specified as n1 = n2 = 0 is the left margin.
Physical Upper Limit...
Wide chassis(ML5721) ... (n1 + n2*256)/60" <= 13.6 (inches)
Narrow chassis(ML5720) ... (n1 + n2*256)/60" <= 8.0 (inches)
Logical Upper Limit ...
Absolute Position <= Right Margin
No underlines are made in the print line area skipped by the positioning.

Print position—define print position from home position

> Code: ESC % B n1 n2 n3 n4
> Compatibility: IBM III/ML
> Function:
Set the next printing position, by dot columns, absolute to the home position.
n1 is a decimal number value 48 – 57 (ASCII 0 – 9)
n2 is a decimal number value 48 – 57 (ASCII 0 – 9)
n3 is a decimal number value 48 – 57 (ASCII 0 – 9)
n4 is a decimal number value 48 – 57 (ASCII 0 – 9)
0000 n1 n2 n3 n4 Right margin.

Command descriptions > 62

 CPI ML5720 ML5721

10 961 1633

12 1153 1959

15 1441 2449

17.1 1646 2798

20 1921 3264

> Additional details:

n1 – n4 is a 4 digit ASCII number; leading zeros must be entered even if the number
is less than 1000. Example: 250 -> 0250
This command will be ignored if print position set by this command exceeds the right
margin or left margin.
No underlines are made in the print line area skipped by the positioning.

Print position—define right relative position

> Code: ESC% E n1 n2 n3 n4
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Moves the next print position by a number of dot columns (specified by n1n2n3n4)
to the right from the current print position.
> Variable range:

ASCII DECIMAL HEXADECIMAL

n1 0-9 48 - 57 30H - 39H

n2 0-9 48 - 57 30H - 39H

n3 0-9 48 - 57 30H - 39H

n4 0-9 48 - 57 30H - 39H

> Out of range:

If the code for n1n2n3n4 is other than the above, this command is ignored.
> Logical limitation:
The printer ignores this command if the command attempts to set a print position
exceeding the right margin.
> Additional details:
The number n1n2n3n4 is a 4-digit decimal number. Since all digits must be defined,
any number that does not use all digits must be preceded with leading zeros.
e.g.: 25 -> 0025
If n1n2n3n4 = 0000 is specified, this command is ignored and the printer maintains
the current print position.
No underlines are printed in the print line areas skipped by this command.

Command descriptions > 63

Print position—define left relative position
> Code: ESC % F n1 n2 n3 n4
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Moves the next print position by a number of dot columns (specified by n1n2n3n4)
to the left from the current print position.
> Variable range:

ASCII DECIMAL HEXADECIMAL

n1 0-9 48 - 57 30H - 39H

n2 0-9 48 - 57 30H - 39H

n3 0-9 48 - 57 30H - 39H

n4 0-9 48 - 57 30H - 39H

> Out of range:

If the code for n1n2n3n4 is other than the above, this command is ignored.
> Logical limitation:
The printer ignores this command if the command attempts to set a print position
exceeding the left margin.
> Additional details:
Number n1n2n3n4 is a 4-digit decimal number. Since all digits must be defined, any
number that does not use all digits must be preceded with leading zeros.
e.g.: 25 -> 0025
If n1n2n3n4 = 0000 is specified, this command is ignored and the printer maintains
the current print position.
No underlines are printed in the print line areas skipped by this command.
When the printer receives a valid n1n2n3n4 number, it prints out the data stored in
the printer buffer.

Print position—define indexed position—by dot column

> Code: ESC \ n1 n2
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function:
Set the next printing position, by dot columns, indexed from current print position.
> Range:
n1 and n2 specify a signed 16 bit binary number of dot columns to move; the lower
byte is n1, and the upper byte is n2.
Range n1 and n2 = 0 – 255
> Logical limitation:
Value defined beyond the left or right margins are ignored.
> Additional details:
The new print position is indexed from the current printing position and may be either
to the left or the right of the current position.

Command descriptions > 64

 Positive values move the print position to the right and negative values move it to the
left.
Do position = n1 + n2*256
Values are shown as follows:
ML5720 — FCH, 40H n2, n1 03H, COH
ML5721 — F9H, A0H n2, n1 06H, 60H
Underlined printing is enabled only when the print head moves to the right.
A position defined to the left of the current position initiates printing action by causing
a block change.
The amount of print position can not be deleted by the DEL command.

Print position—define relative dot position

> Code: ESC | n1 n2
> Compatibility: IBM III
> Function:
Moves the current logical horizontal print position by n/120 in from the current print
position.
> Range:
The number n1 is the low byte and n2 is the high byte in the dot position setting code.
The number n1n2 is a decimal number between 0 and 255 (if n1 = n2 = 0 is specified,
the printer maintains the current position).
Limit
FC40H n1 + n2×256 03C0H (ML5720)
F9A0H n1 + n2×256 0660H (ML5721)
> Out of range:
The printer ignores this command if the command attempts to set a print position
exceeding the left/right margin.
> Additional details:
Scores can be added only when the print head moves to the right from the current
print position.
When the print head moves to the left from the current print position, the printer
prints out the data stored in the printer buffer.

Horizontal tabs — define stops — by characters

> Code: ESC D × 1, ×2, ×3 ... xk NUL
> Compatibility: EPS FX/IBM III
> Function:
Set, by character columns, up to a maximum of 32 tab (Epson) or 28 tab (IBM)
positions.

Command descriptions > 65

> Range:
Range k = 1 – 32 (Epson)
= 1 – 28 (IBM)
Range x = 1 – 255 (Epson)
= 1 – 255 (IBM)

CPI EPSON IBM

ML5720 ML5721 ML5720 ML5721

10 79 135 80 136

12 95 163 96 164

15 119 203 120 204

17.1 137 233 138 234

20 159 255 160 255

> Out of range:

If k>32 (Epson) or k>28 (IBM) the following value of x will be ignored.
Maximum x value in each CPI, values larger than maximum are ignored.
> Additional details:
Tabs are set at every 8 character after powering up the printer, receiving an I PRIME
(INIT) signal or executing an ESC @ (Epson), ESC R (IBM III), ESC } NUL and
ESC { n.
The entire command string is terminated with a NUL [CHR$(0)] or a number less than
the last tab setting specified. (Epson)
The tab settings n1, n2, n3 nk must be entered in ascending order.
Tabs are absolute position. However, if the left margin is changed, HT position is
changed according to the left margin. (IBM)
If n = 0, clear all tabs set.
If there is not a nul at the 33rd (Epson)
This command is disregarded while nk-1 = nk or the printer encounters a null
character. A maximum of 32 tab stops can be set. If there is no null character at the
29th value of n, this command is disregarded until the printer encounters a null
character. Tab positions set up to the 28th n value are enabled. (IBM)
Example:
If ESC D n1 n2 n4 n3 NUL,
n1 < n2 < n3 < n4 -> valid n1 – n4.
n1 < n2 = n3 < n4 -> valid n1 – n2 (Epson)
Valid n1, n2, n4 (IBM)

Command descriptions > 66

Horizontal tab—execute
> Code: HT
> Compatibility: EPS FX/IBM III
> Function:
Advance from the current print position to the next Horizontal Tab position.
> Additional details:
Tab positions are based on the character pitch in force at the time the horizontal tab
is set (IBM)
Tab position is absolute. If the character pitch is changed, including double width, the
tabs will remain in the same absolute locations. (Epson)
Upon power up the default tabs are set at columns 9, 17, 25, 33 ... and every eight
spaces after that.
HT will become invalid when it exceeds right margin setting. If an HT is executed past
the right margin, it will cause the next character to be printed immediately after the
last. All subsequent HTs will correspond to the beginning of the TAB setting sequence.
No underline are printed in the “skip” area.

Horizontal tabs—define stops—default values

> Code: ESC R
> Compatibility: IBM III
> Function:
This command sets horizontal tabs at every 8th position starting at column 9 and
clears all vertical tabs.

Horizontal tabs—define stops—by characters

> Code: ESC, HT X1 Y1 Z1, ... , Xm Ym Zm CR
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Clear all previously defined H-tabs and define up to 16 new horizontal tab stop
positions from the left-most physical print position in units of character columns.
> Range:
Variables

ASCII DECIMAL HEXADECIMAL

X1 0-9 48 - 57 30 - 39

Y1 0-9 48 - 57 30 - 39

Z1 0-9 48 - 57 30 - 39

m (number of tabs) = 0 - 16

Command descriptions > 67

 Argument “X1Y1Z1”

CPI ML5720 ML5721

10 80 136

12 96 163

17.1 137 233

20 160 272

> Out of range:

The command will be ignored.
> Logical limitations:
XmYmZm represents a 3 digit number where each consecutive XmYmZm number
must be greater than the previous one or else Xm Ym Zm is ignored.
X1 Y1 Z1 < X2 Y2 Z2 < ... < Xmax Ymax Zmax
> Additional details:
Maximum of 16 HT stops maybe defined.
Horizontal tab settings can be cleared by:
— ESC HT CR (defining no tabs)
— ESC HT 000 CR (defining no tabs)
— ESC HT 001 CR (defining no tabs)

NOTE
Tab position “0” and tab position “1” both represent the first column position
on the print line.

X1 Y1 Z1 is a 3-digit ASCII numeric. A 2-digit or 1-digit X1Y1Z1 number can be

specified, however, by separating it from the subsequent parameters with a comma.
Upon Power-up and reset conditions, such as l-Prime, the default tabs are set at
character columns 9, 17, 25, 33 ... and every eight character columns after that.
Horizontal Tab positions are relative to the character pitch. While in 10 cpi, a H-tab
of 10 characters will represent a physical distance of 1 (10/10th) inch. This same 10
character H-tab in 12 cpi will represent a physical distance of 11/12th of an inch.

Horizontal tabs – define stops – by dot column

> Code: ESC ETX X1 Y1 Z1 W1, ... , Xm Ym Zm Wm CR
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Clear all previously defined H-tabs and define up to 16 new horizontal tab stop
positions from the left-most physical print position in units of dot columns.

Command descriptions > 68

> Range:
Variables

ASCII DECIMAL HEXADECIMAL

X1 0-9 48 - 57 30 - 39

Y1 0-9 48 - 57 30 - 39

Z1 0-9 48 - 57 30 - 39

W1 0-9 48 - 57 30 - 39

m (number of tabs) = 0 - 16
Argument “X1Y1Z1W1”

CPI ML5720 ML5721

10 960 1632

12 1152 1956

17.1 1644 2796

20 1920 3264

> Out of range:

The command will be ignored.

> Logical limitations:

XmYmZmWm represents a 4 digit number where each consecutive XmYmZmWm
number must be greater than the previous one or else Xm Ym Zm Wm is ignored.
> Additional details:
Maximum of 16 HT stops may be defined.
Each tab must be defined in ascending order.
Horizontal tab setting can be cleared by:
— ESC ETX CR (defining no tabs)
— ESC ETX 0000 CR (defining no tabs)
— ESC ETX 0001 CR (defining no tabs)

NOTE
Tab position “0” and tab position “1” both represented the first column
position on the print line.

X1 Y1 Z1 W1 is a 4 digit ASCII numeric.

X1Y1Z1W1 should be a 4-digit ASCII number. An X1Y1Z1W1 number of 3-digits or
less can be specified, however, by separating it from the subsequent parameters with
a comma.
Upon Power-up and reset conditions, such as l-Prime, the default tabs are set at
columns 97, 193, 289 ... and every 96 dot columns after that.

Command descriptions > 69

 Horizontal Tab positions are relative to the character pitch. While in 10 cpi, a H-tab
of 120 columns will represent a physical distance of 1 inch. This same 120 columns
H-tab in 12 cpi will represent a physical distance of 120/144th of an inch.
H-TABS by dot column are valid when combined with Bit Image Graphics and
Proportional Width Characters.

Horizontal tab—execute
> Code: HT
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Advance from the current print position to the next Horizontal Tab position.
> Logical limitations:
An HT can not be executed beyond the right margin.
> Additional details:
HT execution will cause an advance to the next tab stop position defined by the “H-
TAB by characters” or “H-TAB by columns” definition commands; which ever HT
command was most recently defined.
When character pitch is changed, tab position will be recalculated based on the new
pitch.
HT will become invalid when it exceeds right margin setting. If an HT is attempted
past the right margin, it will cause the next character to be printed immediately after
the last. All subsequent HT’s will correspond to the beginning of the TAB setting
sequence.
If the Underline print feature is “on”, the area of the page that the HT skips over will
not be underlined.

Margins—define left margin

> Code: ESC n

> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function:
Left margin is set at (n) characters from the left-most physical print position.
> Range:
Range n = 0 - 255

NAME PITCH ML5720 ML5721

PICA/ 10 1 - 79 1 - 134
PROPORTIONAL

ELITE 12 1 - 94 1 - 162

15 1 - 118 1 - 202

COMPRESSED 17.1 1 - 135 1 - 231

COMPRESSED 20 1 - 157 1 - 255

ELITE

Command descriptions > 70

> Out of range:
If n exceeds the right margin, the left margin command will be ignored.
> Additional details:
Left margin positions are based on the character pitch which is in force at the time
the left margin is set. Left Margin’s position is absolute. If the character pitch is
changed, the margin will NOT move to accommodate the change.
While in proportional mode, the print column width of the margin will be set in pica
character size.
The left margin will remain at value set unless reset by some software code or the
printer is turned off.
Input of the ESC/ code with a valid left margin parameter causes the horizontal TAB
positions previously set to be cleared, and the subsequent horizontal TAB will default
to every 8 character positions starting with the new left margin as position 0.
There must be a difference of at least 25 characters between the left margin and right
margin values for 10 CPI.

Margins—define right margin

> Code: ESC Q n
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function:
Right margin is set at (n) characters from the left-most physical print position.
> Range:
Range n = 1 -255

NAME PITCH ML5720 ML5721

PICA/ 10 2 - 80 2 - 136
PROPORTIONAL

ELITE 12 3 - 96 3 - 164

15 3 - 120 3 - 204

COMPRESSED 17.1 4 - 138 4 - 234

COMPRESSED 20 4 - 160 4 - 255

ELITE

> Out of range:

The number “n” must be within the ranges given above, otherwise it will be ignored.
If n = 0, or is less than or equal to the left margin this command is ignored.
> Additional details:
Right margin positions are based on the character pitch which is in force at the time
the right margin is set.
Right Margin’s position is absolute. If the character pitch is changed, the margin will
NOT move to accommodate the change.
While in proportional mode, the print column width of the margin will be set in pica
character size.

Command descriptions > 71

 Setting Right margin clears the print buffer.
There must be a difference of at least 25 characters between the left margin and right
margin values for 10 CPI.
If you attempt to print a character beyond the right margin the character will be
printed on the next line after a line feed and carriage return are executed.

Margins—define left & right margin

> Code: ESC X n1 n2
> Compatibility: IBM III
> Function:
Set the Left Margin to (n1) characters and Right Margin to (n2) characters from the
left-most physical print position.
> Range:
The ranges for n1 and n2 are:
1 <= n1 <= 255
2 <= n2 <= 255
n1 < n2
> Out of range:
If n1 or n2 = 0 then the current margin setting is used.
If n2 exceeds the default range n2 shall be converted to the default value.

CPI ML5720 ML5721

10 80 136

12 96 164

15 120 204

17.1 138 234

20 160 255

> Additional details:

The default value of the left margin is the 1st character.
The margin’s positions are absolute. If the character pitch is changed, the margins
will NOT move to accommodate the change.
Character pitch changes afterwards do not affect the distance from the home
position.
n1 n2 indicates the left and right edges of printable area. For example if n1 = 10, n2
= 100, a printable area is from the 10th column to the 100th column: 91 characters
are printable.

Print- line justification—select

> Code: ESC a n
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function:
The text position/alignment will be set according to one of the four given modes
assigned by n. (n is Binary value)

Command descriptions > 72

> Range:

N JUSTIFICATION

0 Left

1 Center

2 Right

3 Full

> Additional details:

n = 0 Left justification is the default or standard format, in which the left margin is
even and the right margin is not.
n = 1 The centering command centers a line of text between the margins. This
command is used for headings, titles and captions.
n = 2 Right justification is the opposite of left justification. The right margin is even
and the left is not.
n =3 Full justification puts extra spaces where necessary so that both the left and
right margins are aligned.
Full justification (n = 3) is performed when the printer receives (when printing starts)
data exceeding 75% of the maximum number of characters to be printed in a line.
Print position will be affected by the commands which set the left/right margin.
This command causes a print block change. If there is data in the print buffer and this
command is sent, the data will be printed before the justification takes affect.

Margins—define left margin

> Code: ESC % C n1 n2 n3
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Define the logical left-most printing position limitation from the left most-physical
print position in units of 1/120 inch.
> Range:
Variable

ASCII DECIMAL HEXADECIMAL

n1 0-9 48 - 57 30 - 39

n2 0-9 48 - 57 30 - 39

n3 0-9 48 - 57 30 - 39

Argument “n1n2n3”
Narrow chassis 000-900 × 1/120 inches (approx. 7.5 inches max.)
Wide chassis 000-999 × 1/120 inches (approx. 8.3 inches max.)
> Out of range:
If any digit is out of range, the command is ignored.
> Logical limitation:
If n1n2n3 exceeds the maximum value, the command will also be ignored.

Command descriptions > 73

 Set number difference between right margin and left margin must be a minimum of
60, otherwise the command will be ignored.
> Additional details:
n1n2n3 is a 3 digit ASCll number. Since all digits must be defined, any number that
does not use all digits must be padded with leading zeros.
e.g.: 8 -> 008.
When n1n2n3 = 000, the command will be ignored.
When n1n2n3 = 001, the left margin will be cleared.
If the left margin is defined after one or more characters have been sent to the
current print line, the left margin will not become valid for the current print line, but
will be valid on the next print line.

Margins—right margin
> Code: ESC % R n1 n2 n3 n4
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Define the logical right-most printing position limitation from the left most-physical
print position in units of 1/120 inch.
> Range:
Variable

ASCII DECIMAL HEXADECIMAL

n1 0-9 48 - 57 30 - 39

n2 0-9 48 - 57 30 - 39

n3 0-9 48 - 57 30 - 39

n4 0-9 48 - 57 30 - 39

Argument

ML5720 ML5721

Without Left 60 < RM <= 960 60 < RM <= 1632

Margin

With Left LM + 60 <= RM <= 960 LM + 60 <= RM <= 1632

Margin

> Out of range:

If any variable is out of range, the command is ignored and any subsequent variables
are interpreted as normal data.
> Logical limitation:
The Right Margin can not be defined within 60/120 inch (1/2 inch) from the Left
Margin or can not be defined to the left of the Left Margin. If this is attempted the
command will be ignored.

Command descriptions > 74

> Additional details:
n1n2n3n4 is a 4 digit ASCII number. Since all digits must be defined, any number
that does not use all digits must be padded with leading zeros.
EXAMPLE: 8 -> 0008.
When n1n2n3n3 = 0000, the Right Margin will be set to the default value.
Explanation of illegal variable results (n2 = out of range):
ESC % R n1 n2 n3 n4
n3 and n4 interpreted as normal data
command is aborted.
If the right margin is defined after one or more characters have been sent to the
current print line, the right margin will not become valid for the current print line, but
will be valid on the next print line.

Relative move inline forward

> Code: ESC d Ln Hn
> Compatibility: IBM III
> Function:
Moves the print position n/120" to the right from the current printhead position.
> Range:
Specify dot position following n1 and n2.
n1 and n2 range = 0 – 255
Limit 0 = n1 + (n2*255) <= 1632
> Out of range:
Values beyond the right margin will be ignored.
> Additional details:
If score is set any horizontal positioning is scored.

Command descriptions > 75

VERTICAL CONTROL

Line spacing—select fixed amount—1/6 inch

> Code: ESC 2
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function:
Set the line spacing to 1/6 inch units.
> Additional details:
This command will remain in effect until a new line spacing command is sent to the
printer.
This command does not set the Top of Form position.
LF, VT, or CR (if Auto F is on) execute in units of 1/6 inch when this function is active.
> Related functions:
LF, VT, CR (and Auto LF)
6 LPI (Lines per inch):

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
1/6 inch (24/144 inch)
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

Line spacing—select fixed amount—1/6 inch

> Code: ESC 6
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Set the line spacing to 1/6 inch units (6 LPI).
> Additional details:
This command remains in effect until a new line spacing command is sent to the
printer.
This command does not set the top of form position.
LF, VT, or CR (if Auto LF is on) execute in units of 1/6 inch when this function is active.

Command descriptions > 76

> Related functions:
LF, VT, CR (and Auto LF)
6 LPI (Lines per Inch):

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
1/6 inch (24/144 inch)
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

Line spacing—select fixed amount—1/8 inch

> Code: ESC 0
> Compatibility: EPS FX/IBM III
> Function: Set the line spacing 1/8 inch units.
> Additional details:
This command remains in effect until a new line spacing command is sent to the
printer.
This command does not set the top of form position.
LF, VT, or CR (if Auto LF is on) execute in units of 1/8 inch when this function is active.
> Related functions:
LF, VT, CR (and Auto LF)
8 LPI (Lines per Inch):

0
1
2
3
4
1/8 inch (18/144 inch)
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

Command descriptions > 77

Line spacing—select fixed amount—1/8 inch
> Code: ESC 8
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
> Set the line spacing to 1/8 inch units (8 LPI).
> Additional details:
This command remains in effect until a new line spacing command is sent to the
printer.
This command does not set the Top of Form position.
LF, VT, or CR (if Auto LF is on) execute in units of 1/8 when this function is active.
> Related function
LF, VT, CR (and Auto LF)
8 LPI (Lines per Inch):

0
1
2
3
4
1/8 inch (18/144 inch)
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

Line spacing—select fixed amount—7/72 inch

> Code: ESC 1
> Compatibility: EPS FX/IBM III
> Function:
Set the line spacing to 7/72 inch units.
> Additional details:
This command remains in effect until a new line spacing command is sent to the
printer.
This command does not set the Top of Form position.
LF, VT or CR (if Auto LF is on) execute in units of 7/72 inch when this function is
active.
> Related functions:
LF, VT, CR (and Auto LF)

Command descriptions > 78

Line spacing—define amount—n/72 inch
> Code: ESC A n
> Compatibility: IBM III
> Function:
Stores the line feed amount in 1/72-inch units.
> Range:
Range n = 0 – 255
> Out of range:
Not applicable—cannot receive value larger than 255 (FFH).
> Additional details:
If n = 0, the line feed amount is 0 and subsequent print-line will overprint on the same
print-line.
This command does not set the top of form position.
The ESC 2 command sets the line feed amount stored by this command.

Line spacing—define amount—n/72 inch

> Code: ESC A n
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function:
Sets the line spacing to n/72 inch.
> Range: Range n= 0 to 85, n = 128 to 213 (Bit 7 of the n code is invalid.)
> Out of range:
Value of n not within the allowable range will be ignored.
> Additional details:
If n = 0, the line feed amount is 0 and subsequent print-lines will overprint on the
same print-line.
This command does not set the Top of Form position.
Power-on default or the I-Prime signal resets the LF unit to the current MENU value.

Line spacing—define amount—n/216 inch

> Code: ESC 3 n
> Compatibility: EPS FX/IBM III
> Function:
Sets line spacing to n/216 inch.
> Range:
Range n = 0 – 255 (Epson), n = 1 – 255 (IBM)
> Additional details:
If n = 0, the line feed amount is 0 and subsequent characters will overprint on the
same print-line. (Epson)
If n = 0 is specified, this command will be invalid and the previously set line feed value
remains effective. (IBM)

Command descriptions > 79

 This command does not set the Top of Form position.
Power on default or the I-Prime signal resets the LF unit to the current MENU value.
LF, VT, or CR (if Auto LF is on) execute in units of n/72 inch when this function is
active.
> Related functions:
LF, CT, CR (and Auto LF)

Line spacing—activate amount defined by n/72 inch

> Code: ESC 2
> Compatibility: IBM III
> Function:
Activate the line feed amount defined by the ESC A “n” command.
> Additional details:
If no ESC A n sequence has been defined, the line spacing amount will be according
to current MENU value.
> Related functions:
ESC A n

Line feed—execute amount—n/216 inch

> Code: ESC J n
> Compatibility: EPS FX/IBM III
> Function:
Execute a n/216 inch line feed without changing the current stored line spacing value.
> Range:
Range n = 0 – 255 (Epson); n = 1 – 255 (IBM)
> Additional details:
The printer prints the contents of the buffer without a carriage return. (Epson)
Moves the current print position to the print start position of next line (left margin
position) when the “Auto CR” feature is set to “Yes” in MENU mode. (IBM)
This command does not need a cancel code, since it is executed only once.
No feed is performed when n = 0. (Epson)
If n = 0 is specified, this command will be invalid. (IBM)
> Related functions:
This command does not clear the elongated character mode (double width printed
character) selected by ESC SO or SO code.

Command descriptions > 80

Fine LF—execute—n/144 inch amount
> Code: ESC % 5 n
> Compatibility: EPS FX/IBM III/ML
> Function:
Initiate printing action; print data in the print buffer by causing a print block change
and execute a n/144 inch line feed, then a carriage return.
> Range:

DECIMAL HEXADECIMAL

n 0 - 255 00 - FF

The eight bit (b7) is ignored so the effective range of n1 is

as follows ...

DECIMAL HEXADECIMAL N

0 - 127 00 - 7FH 0 - 127

(0/144” - 127/
128 - 255 80 - FFH 144”)

> Out of range:

Not applicable, cannot receive a value larger than 255 (FF)H or smaller than 0.
> Details:
If n = 0 the line spacing will be set to a distance of zero, upon execution of a LF.
If the line spacing is set to zero (n1 = 0), no paper feeding will occur when a LF is
executed, but any data in the print buffer will be printed (as when a CR is executed).

Line spacing—define amount—n/144 inch

> Code: ESC % 9 n
> Compatibility: EPS FX/IBM III/ML
> Function:
Set the line spacing to n/144 units.
> Range:

DECIMAL HEXADECIMAL

n 0 - 255 00 - FF

The eight bit (b7) is ignored so the effective range of n1 is

as follows ...

DECIMAL HEXADECIMAL N

0 - 127 00 - 7FH 0 - 127

(0/144” - 127/
128 - 255 80 - FFH 144”)

> Out of range:

Not applicable, cannot receive a value larger than 255 (FF)H or smaller than 0.

Command descriptions > 81

> Additional details:
If n = 0 the line spacing will be set to a distance zero, upon execution of a LF.
If the line spacing is set to zero (n = 0), no paper feeding will occur when a LF is
executed, but any data in the print buffer will be printed (as when a CR is executed).

Line feed—execute forward LF with CR

> Code: LF
> Compatibility: EPS FX/IBM III
> Function:
Initiate printing action; print data in the print buffer by causing a print block change
and execute a line feed, then a carriage return. Moves the current print position to
the print start position of next line (left margin position) when the “Auto CR” feature
is set to “Yes” in MENU mode. (IBM)
> Additional details:
Line spacing pitch will be set by ESC A n, ESC 0, ESC 2, ESC 3 n, ESC 1, ESC % 9 n.
Otherwise, the LF pitch will be set by the current MENU when pow-er is on or I-Prime
signal is received.
This code will cancel enlarged character mode set by the ESC SO (Epson mode only)
and SO code before the LF code or only spaces before this code, only line feed is
performed.

Line feed—execute reverse LF

> Code: ESC j n
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function:
Execute an immediate n/216 inch reverse line feed; which will be executed only once
each time this command is sent.
> Range:
Range n = 0 – 255
> Additional details:
It is not recommended to use the pull tractor feed unit when reverse line feeds are
required.
The current line spacing will not be changed.

Line feed—execute reverse LF—one line only

> Code: ESC ]
> Compatibility: IBM III
> Function:
Execute the current LF pitch, reverse line feed; which will be executed only once each
time this command is sent.
> Additional details:
It is recommended to use the pull tractor feed unit when reverse line feeds are
required.
The current line spacing will not be changed.

Command descriptions > 82

Line feed—execute forward LF with CR
> Code: LF
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Initiate printing action; print data in the print buffer by causing a print block change
and execute a line feed, then a carriage return.
Additional details:
This command is equivalent to the composite command (ESC.?.N:)
where n = (23) H
The line spacing is set by ESC.6, ESC.8 or ESC.%.9.n command. The line spacing will
be set to the default line pitch after a default sequence (power up, I-Prime, and CAN).

Line feed—execute reverse line feed

> Code: ESC LF
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Initiate printing action; print data in the print buffer by causing a print block change
and execute a reverse line feed and then a carriage return for one line only.
> Additional details:
Composite command (ESC.?.n.:) for CR/LF will perform:
n = (31)H Reverse Line Feed
When continuous paper or single sheets (fed by the SASF function) are used,
unlimited number of reverse LFs may be executed.
When the CSF is attached to the printer the Reverse LF command will be valid for
1/3 inch (48/144 inch) in order to prevent paper jams.

Line feed—automatic LF—ON/OFF

> Code: ESC 5 n
> Compatibility: IBM III
> Function:
Enables/disables the automatic Line Feed. The printer performs an automatic LF each
time it receives a carriage return (CR).
> Range:
n = 0 – 255
odd numbers = Automatic LF enabled
even numbers = Automatic LF disabled

Line feed—W/O carriage return

> Code: ESC DC2
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Initiate printing action; print data in the print buffer by causing a print block change,
feed the paper the pre-defined line spacing amount, and set the next printable data’s
print position to the last position of the previous line (no CR is performed).

Command descriptions > 83

Line feed—execute direct skip
> Code: ESC VT n1 n2
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Initiate printing action; print data in the print buffer by causing a block change, feed
the paper the number of lines defined by this command, and set the next printable
data’s print position to the left margin.
> Range:

N ASCII DECIMAL HEXADECIMAL

n1 0-9 48 - 57 30 - 39

n2 0-9 48 - 57 30 - 39

> Out of range:

The command will be ignored.
> Additional details:
If n1 n2 = 00, no paper feeding is performed.

Form length—define amount—by inches

> Code: ESC C nul n
> Compatibility: EPS FX/IBM III
> Function:
Sets the form length to n inches
> Range:
Range n = 1 – 22 (Epson)
1 – 255 (IBM)
> Out of range:
n = 0 or n > 22 (Epson), previous setting is valid and this command is ignored.
> Additional details:
This command does not affect vertical tab settings. (IBM)
This command will reset vertical tab settings to their default values. (Epson)
When this command is valid, it cancels the “Skip Over Perforation” feature even if the
feature has been selected in the MENU mode.
Top of Form position is set by this command.

Form length—define amount—by lines

> Code: ESC C n
> Compatibility: EPS FX/IBM III
> Function:
Sets the form length to n lines length to n lines.
> Range:
Range n = 1 – 127 (Epson)
1 – 255 (IBM)

Command descriptions > 84

> Out of range:
If n = n > 127 (Epson), bit 7 is cleared and set that value as is.
> Additional details:
This command does not affect vertical tab settings. (IBM)
This command will reset vertical tab settings to their default values. (Epson)
Top of form will be set.
When this command is valid, it cancels the “Skip Over Perforation” feature even if the
feature has been set in the MENU mode.
The amount of each line defined by this command, is equal to the current LF spacing
defined by ESC 0, ESC 2, ESC A n, ESC 3 n, ESC 1, ESC % 9n.
If n = 0 or 128 (Epson), this command is treated as ESC C NUL n.
> Related functions:
ESC 0, ESC 2, ESC A n and ESC 3 n, ESC 1, ESC % 9 n.

Form length—define amount—by 1/2 inch

> Code: ESC G n1 n2
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Define the logical form length by the amount of n1n2 × 1/2 inch and set the TOF
position.
> Range:
Variables

N ASCII DECIMAL HEXADECIMAL

n1 0-9 48 - 57 30 - 39

n2 0-9 48 - 57 30 - 39

Argument
n1n2 range = 00 – 99
> Out of range:
The command will be ignored.
> Additional details:
If n1n2 = 00, the page length will default to the value defined by MENU.
Maximum form length, 1/2 × 99 = 49.5 inches.
Factory setting: 1/2 × 22 = 11 inches.

Form length—define amount—by lines

> Code: ESC F n1 n2
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Define the logical form length by number of lines, and set the TOF position.

Command descriptions > 85

> Range:
Variables

N ASCII DECIMAL HEXADECIMAL

n1 0-9 48 - 57 30 - 39

n2 0-9 48 - 57 30 - 39

Argument
n1n2 range = 00 – 99
> Out of range: The command will be ignored.
> Details:
If n1n2 = 00, the page length will default to the value defined by MENU.
Maximum form length is based upon current LF spacing. If this spacing is set to 144/
144 inch (maximum value for line spacing), the maximum form length will be
99 × 1 inch = 99 inches.
If line spacing defined, by ESC % 9 n, is zero, this command will effectively be
ignored.
ESC % 9 0 = 0 line spacing
ESC F n1 n2 where n1 n2 = any value
Line Spacing Form Length
0× (any value) = form length.
This command will set the Top of Form and the top of VFU.
Factory setting: 11 inches

Form feed—execute
> Code: FF
> Compatibility: EPS FX/IBM III
> Function:
> Prints the data in the print buffer followed by a carriage return, then feeds the paper
to the next TOF position.
> Additional details:
Factory setting of form length is eleven (11) inches. (MENU)
Pressing FORM FEED button on the operator panel feeds the paper forward to the next
Top of Form position.
A Form feed will be performed to the next top of form position even when the FF is
received at the top of form position.
Double width by ESC SO (Epson mode only) and SO will be reset.
Power up or I-Prime will set TOF.

Command descriptions > 86

Form feed—execute
> Code: FF
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Initiate printing action; print data in the print buffer by causing a print block change,
feed the paper the defined form length amount and set the next printable data’s print
position to the left-margin.
> Additional details:
Paper length can be set by the ESC F n1 n2 or the ESC G n1 n2 commands.
Upon power-up, or reception of a reset command, the page length will default to the
value set in MENU.
Factory setting of Form Length is 11 inches.

Top of form—define
> Code: ESC 5
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Define the top of the form (logical page) and the top of the VFU by logically “marking”
the current vertical print position.
> Additional details:
This command does not affect the CSF or SASF function.

Margins—define bottom margin (auto skip)

> Code: ESC % S n
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Define the size of the area at the bottom of the logical page which will automatically
be skipped over by feeding the paper until the next TOF position.
> Range:

N ASCII DECIMAL HEXADECIMAL

n1 0-9 48 - 57 30 - 39

> Out of range:

The command will be ignored.
> Additional details:
If n = 0, the Auto-skip function is released.
The distance that is skipped is twice the value of “n” multiplied by 1/6 inch (6 LPI).“n”
× 2 × 1/6 = Auto-skip distance.
If Auto-skip (Skip Over Perforation) function is selected in Menu, the distance that will
be skipped is 1 inch.
When in the Hex-Dump secondary mode, the Auto-skip function will operate
according to the MENU selection.
Form length and TOF must be set before the Auto-skip area is defined.

Command descriptions > 87

Any printing operation which encroaches upon the bottom margin area, such as LF,
Print Data + LF, Print Data + CR will cause the paper to be fed by skip over area
length. On this next page, printing then will resume.
When the current line spacing is defined by ESC ( (8 LPI) or ESC % 9 n, (n/144 LPI)
the auto skip function is performed when the remaining amount of the logical page is
as follows...

VARIABLE INCHES EQUIVALENT NO OF STEPS COMMENT

N1 (N1 X 2 X NO. OF 6 OF THE LF
1/6) LPIS MOTOR

0 0 0 0 No skip

1 2/6 2 48 Skip

2 4/6 4 96 Skip

3 6/6 6 144 Skip

4 8/6 8 192 Skip

5 10/6 10 240 Skip

6 12/6 12 288 Skip

7 14/6 14 336 Skip

8 16/6 16 384 Skip

9 18/6 18 432 Skip

Logical top of form

Page 1 A

B
Logical bottom of form

Skip over perforation area

TOF
C

Description:
Page 2 Data "C" that crosses the
"Skip Over Perf" area is printed
at the next TOF.

Command descriptions > 88

 Logical top of form
Page 1 A

B
Logical bottom of form

Description:
Page 2 No area of the logical form
is skipped. Data A, B and
C are printed as shown.

Top of form—define
> Code: ESC 4
> Compatibility: IBM III
> Function:
Logically “mark” the current vertical print position.
> Additional details:
This command does not affect the CSF or SASF function.

Margins—define bottom margin (auto skip)

> Code: ESC N n
> Compatibility: EPS FX/IBM III
> Function:
Sets the skip-over perforation to n lines, according to the current LF value.
> Range:
Range n = 0 – 127 (Epson)
0 – 255 (IBM)
> Out of range:
Epson:
The n value has to be less than the current form length. If n is equal to or greater
than the form length, this function will be ignored.
If n = 0 or n = 128, the last skip over perforation value will remain as previous value.
If n > 127, bit 7 is cleared and length is set to resulting value of 4.

Command descriptions > 89

 IBM:
The n value can be set regardless of paper length. (IBM)
Not applicable—cannot receive value larger than 255 (FFH).
> Additional details:
The skip over perforation will be reset by ESC O or page length set command.
Skip over perforation distance will not be affected by a change in the line pitch.
Entering to the area of skip over perforation by LF, VT, CR (with LF), ESC J n and auto
line feed will cause the skip over perforation and feed to the top of form.
> Related functions:
Line length value is based on ESC 0, ESC 2, ESC A n, or ESC 3 n, ESC 1, ESC % 9 n.

Logical top of form

Page 1 A

B
Logical bottom of form

Skip over perforation area

TOF
C

Description:
Page 2 Data "C" that crosses the
"Skip Over Perf" area is printed
at the next TOF.

Margins—cancel bottom margin (auto skip)

> Code: ESC O
> Compatibility: EPS FX/IBM III
> Function:
Cancel Skip-Over Perforation.
> Additional details:
Skip over perforation is cleared when power down/power up I Prime occurs.
Skip over perforation is cancelled when the form length is changed by the following
codes:

Command descriptions > 90

 ESC C n and ESC C nul n.

Logical top of form

Page 1 A

B
Logical bottom of form

Description:
Page 2 No area of the logical form
is skipped. Data A, B and
C are printed as pictured.

Vertical tabs—select channel

> Code: ESC / n
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function:
Select a vertical tab channel, specified by n.
> Range:
Range: n = 0 – 7
n = 128 – 135
> Out of range:
If n is not a number between 0 and 7 nor between 128 and 135, the command value
will be ignored.
> Additional details:
Within each channel there can be up to 16 vertical tabs which are independently set.
In order to access the vertical tabs within each channel VT or CHR$(11) can be used.
Tabs set by the ESC B command correspond to channel #0.
> Related functions:
Vertical Tab

Command descriptions > 91

Vertical tabs — define tab stops
> Code: ESC B n1 n2 ... nk NUL
> Compatibility: EPS FX/IBM III
> Function: Set the specified number of vertical tabs.
> Range:
k specifies the number of vertical tabs.
Range k = 1 – 16 (Epson)
1 – 64 (IBM)
n is the specific line number at which each vertical tab is to be set.
Range n = 1 – 255
> Out of range:
Value of k and n which exceed the maximum will be ignored.
Paper will be loaded on printer even if the vertical tab setting exceeds the number of
lines between TOFs (one page length).
> Additional details:
To use n setting of 255 the line spacing must be set at less than 3/72 inch.
Vertical tab stops are absolute, they are not changed by changing the line spacing
(Epson).
If the line feed amount value is changed after the vertical tab setting declaration,
vertical tab stops will be executed according to the new line spacing (IBM). They
remain at the same distance from TOF.
The tab sequence must be terminated by CHR$(0) or any number less than the last
tab or nk (Epson). The ESC sequence is terminated by CHR$(0). (IBM)
The vertical tabs set by this command correspond to channel #0.
n value must be increasing. n1<n2<n3< ... <nk.
> Related functions:
ESC B nul will reset the TAB setting.

Vertical tabs—define tab stops in channels

> Code: ESC b n m1 m2 ... mk NUL
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function: Set m vertical tabs for each channel n.
> Range:
Range m = 0 – 255 (Bit 7 of m is ignored.)
Range n = 0 – 7
> Out of range:
if n>7, the command will be ignored.
> Additional details:
The VFU has 8 channels n = (0 to 7) and up to 16 tab stops (m = 1 to 16). The vertical
tab setting may exceed the number of lines between TOFs (one page length).
This sequence must be terminated by CHR$(0), or any number less than mk.
Tab settings are not affected by subsequent changes in line spacing.

Command descriptions > 92

 m value must be increasing. m1<m2<m3< ... <mk.
> Related functions:
Upon power up n is set to channel no. 0. This means the same as ESC B.

Vertical tab—execute
> Code: VT
> Compatibility: EPS FX/IBM III
> Function: Prints the data in the buffer and advance the paper to the next tab stop.
> Additional details:
If vertical tabs are default set, this command will function the same as LF.
Executing more than the legal number of vertical tabs set will cause execution of the
first vertical tab of the channel on the next page.
> Related functions:
Double width mode set by ESC SO (Epson mode only) or SO will be reset.

Vertical tabs – define tab stops in channels (VFU)

> Code:
part 1 Part 2 Part 3
DC4 sp ... sp n1 ?

> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Define up to a total of 54 vertical tab stops in a maximum of 12 channels.
> Range:
Variable:

N ASCII DECIMAL HEXADECIMAL

n1 (Channel
1-< 49 - 60 31 - 3C
Number) =

Argument:
TAB STOP (argument) = 1 to 54 occurrence
Repeating constant
s1 ... sx = 1 to 127 spaces
> Additional details:
This command is composed of 3 parts ...
part 1 part 2 Part 3
(initiator) (argument) (terminator)

DC4 SP...SP n1 ?
(repeat)

— Part 1 is the initiator and is sent once.

— Part 2 consists of a variable number of spaces, each representing 1 print line,
and a tab channel number “n1”. This part can be sent multiple times.
— Part 3 is the terminator, and is only sent once.

Command descriptions > 93

 The maximum number of spaces “SP” in all arguments is 127. This number is the total
sum of all “SP”s even if the “SP”s are associated with difference arguments.
The maximum number of tab stops (Part 2) or arguments is 54.
The same tab channel can be defined more than once.
VFU loading sets the Top Form.

Vertical tabs — execute

> Code: VT n
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Initiate printing action; print data in the print buffer by causing a print block change,
feed the paper to the next channel stop specified by “n”.
> Range:

CHANNEL DECIMALS HEXADECIMAL

NUMBER
ASCII

1 49 31

2 50 32

3 51 33

4 52 34

5 53 35

6 54 36

7 55 37

8 56 38

9 57 39

: 58 3A

; 59 3B

< 60 3C

> Out of range:

The command will be ignored.
> Logical limitation:
If a channel number which is not defined in the VFU load sequence is specified in this
command, this command will be ignored.

Paper-out sensor – enable

> Code: ESC 9
> Compatibility: EPS FX/IBM III
> Function:
Enables the paper out sensor, which activates the alarm indicator when less than 0.5
inch of paper remains.

Command descriptions > 94

> Additional details:
Upon detection, the Alram indicator is lit and the printer is deselected.
Paper out detector can also be enabled by MENU.
Manual Paper Out Override:
— When the Alarm indicator is On, and the SEL button is pressed, 1 line of data
is printed, and line feed is executed.
— Paper override function is valid until the next TOF position is reached. After
the next TOF is reached, the function becomes invalid.
— When SEL button is pressed after paper is reset (Alarm LED is Off), the
following states return and the printer is in the select mode:
— SEL indicator On.
— Alarm indicator Off.
— Printer is ready to receive data.
> While Paper Out Override is active, if multiple line feeds are received by the printer,
the printer executes the line feeds until the TOF position is reached. If there are line
feeds that couldn’t be executed because the TOF was reached, they are “saved” and
will execute after new paper is inserted.
> Unprinted data will be saved in the buffer and printed after paper is replaced and the
SEL button is pressed. If data in the print buffer is not printed because paper out
was detected, the data will not be lost and can be printed after the paper is replaced
and the SEL button is pressed.

Paper-out sensor – disable

> Code: ESC 8
> Compatibility: EPS FX/IBM III
> Function:
Disables the paper out sensor.
> Additional details:
Paper error detector can also be disabled by MENU.
Printer prints up to TOF, then stops. Alarm indicator is ON.

Paper-out detection override—enable/disable

> Code: ESC E n
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Enable/disable the paper out detection override function in which even though the
printer has detected that only 1 inch of paper remains to be printed on, printing action
can still be executed until the next TOF is reached.
> Range:
n = 1, Paper Out Detection Override = Disabled.
n < > 1, Paper Out Detection Override = Enabled.
> Out of range:
The command will be ignored.

Command descriptions > 95

> Additional details:
When the printer’s paper sensor switch detects that only 1 inch of paper remains in
the platen path and the “Paper Out Detection Override” function is disabled (i.e. the
printer is in the normal paper detection mode), the printer... – stops printing;
— immediately turns on PE/FAULT signals
— printer = Off line
— SEL LED = OFF— ALARM LED = On (Paper end is detected).
While this condition exists, the user can continue to print by pressing the SEL button.
When this happens, the SEL LED is on and only one line of text is printed followed by
a LF. After the 1 line is printed the SEL LED turns off and the printer returns to the
deselect state it was in before the SEL button was pressed. This process can be
repeated until the next TOF is reached.
During Paper-out detection override process (described above), if continuous LFs are
executed, the printer will advance the paper until the next TOF is reached. Once the
next TOF is reached, all remaining feeds will be negated.
When the Paper Out Detection Override is enabled, and 1 inch of paper is detected in
the platen path, the paper-out condition is overridden, and printing continues
normally. If there is enough data, the printer will continue to print beyond the
physical edge of the paper and will continue to print on the platen until the next TOF
is reached.
The alarm (paper-out) LED will turn on regardless of the Paper-Out Override function
being enabled or disabled.
The TOF will be maintained even if paper out switch is disabled.
This function is not available when the CSF is connected.

Cut-sheet feeder—single sheet insert

> Code: ESC EM I
> Compatibility: EPS FX/IBM III
> Function:
Feed a single cut-sheet into the printer.
> Additional details:
This command starts printing and performs carriage returns regardless of the paper
mode.
If paper is already loaded, the printer will eject that sheet and feed another sheet to
the TOF position.
If there is data in the print buffer and paper is already loaded, this command causes
the data to be printed, the current sheet ejected and then the new sheet inserted.

Cut-sheet feeder—single sheet eject

> Code: ESC EM R
> Compatibility: EPS FX/IBM III
> Function:
If CSF is installed, paper in the platen path is ejected.
> Additional details:
This command starts printing and performs carriage returns regardless of the paper
mode.

Command descriptions > 96

 An LF code at the end of the page automatically causes the next sheet to be loaded.
If data is in the print buffer, it is printed before the sheet is ejected.

Cut-sheet feeder—single sheet insert

> Code: ESC S
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
FEED a single Cut-Sheet into the printer.
> Additional details:
If CSF is not installed, this command is ignored.
If paper is already loaded, the printer will eject that sheet and feed another sheet to
the TOF position.
If there is data in the print buffer and paper is already loaded, this command causes
the data to be printed, the current sheet ejected and then the new sheet inserted.

Cut-sheet feeder—single sheet eject

> Code: ESC V
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Eject the cut-sheet paper that is currently in the platen path.
> Additional details:
This command is ignored when CSF is not installed.
Any vertical feed command (LF, VT, FF, Direct Skip, and so on) that advances the
logical page beyond the physical page will cause the next sheet to be loaded.
If data is in the print buffer, it is printed before the sheet is ejected.

Composite command for setting line feed quantity

ESC DLE H Pno A1 A2 P1 P2 P3
> Code: 1B 10 48 in hexadecimal
27 16 72 in decimal Functions:
> This command is one of OKI-unique commands.
> This command specifies the quantity of line feeding by parameter A1 (Basic LF
Quantity) and feeds paper by the specified quantity.
> Valid ranges and meanings of parameters
Pno: Specifies the length (in bytes) of parameters following the “Pro” parameter. The
most significant bit (MSB) is void. 00H Pno FFH Pno < 05H: This command is void
and the number of bytes specified by the “Pno” parameter are discarded.
A1: Specifies a basic line feeding pitch. The most significant bit (MSB) is void.
00H <= A1 <= FFH
A1=00H, 30H 1/60" pitch (Reserved)
A1=01H, 31H 1/72" pitch
A1=02H, 32H 1/144" pitch (Reserved)
A1=03H, 33H 1/180" pitch
A1=04H, 34H 1/216" pitch
A1=05H, 35H 1/360" pitch (Reserved)

Command descriptions > 97

 When the other parameter value is specified, the number of bytes specified by the
“Pno” parameter are discarded.
A2: Specifies setting of parameters or execution of this command.
The most significant bit (MSB) is void.
00H <= A2 <= FFH
A2 = even number: Sets the quantity of line feeding.
A3 = odd number: Feeds paper by the specified quantity of line feeding.
P1 to P3: Specifies the quantity of line feeding according to the specified line feed
pitch (by parameter A1). Each parameter uses the lower four bits of a byte to indicate
a value of 1 to 9. (The higher four bits of each byte are ignored.)
P1: Hundreds digit of the LF quantity
P2: Tens digit of the LF quantity
P3: Ones digit of the LF quantity
The LF quantity must always be three digits long.
> This command can be entered anywhere on a line.
> This command will not set TOF.
> When an even value is specified for the A2 parameter (to set parameters of this
command), the following items are enabled:
The specified LF quantity is referenced by the following operations: LF, VT, CR (with
LF), automatic carriage return, setting of page length, perforation skip, etc.
The LF quantity of “000” can be specified (by parameters P1 to P3).
The printer does not start printing.
The LF quantity specified on the menu is used in the following cases:
(a) When the printer receives an INITIALIZE command (ESC @) (or when “Reset
Inhibit” on the menu is “No”)
(b) When the printer receives a software I-PRIME command (ESC } NUL)
(c) When the printer receives an Emulation Change command (ESC { Pn) (except
for identical simulation)
(d) When the printer receives an I/F I-PRIME-N signal (or when “I-Prime” on the
menu is not “Invalid”)
(e) When a setting is made on the MENU
(f) When the printer is reset by a switch
(g) When the printer is powered-on
(h) When the printer receives a Menu Factory Value Load command (ESC DLE 02H)
(i) When the printer receives a Menu Set command (ESC DLE D)

Command descriptions > 98

> When an odd value is specified for the A2 parameter (to execute the command), the
printer performs the following:
Reads data in the print buffer, prints it out, then moves the print head to the top of
the next line.
Releases the 1-line Wide mode by SO/ESCSO.
Prints and return the print head to the top of the line even when an LF quantity of
“000” is specified by parameters P1 to P3.
Skips to the next TOF when a Perforation Skip command is entered.
The LF quantity is not affected by the specified LF quantity
Moves the print head to the left margin to indicate the next print position when the
Incremental Print mode is set.

CSF control
> Code: ESC [ D Ln Hn pft fc sd
> Compatibility: IBM III
> Function:
Controls the CSF function.
> Ranges and Meaning of Ln Hn
Meaning (Setting of Parameter Value)
Ln, Hn shows a parameter value after it.
Ln, Hn = Ln+Hn x256
Ranges 0 <= Ln <= 255, 0 <= Hn <= 255
Relationship between Ln and Hn Values, and Command Sequence
- Ln = Hn = 00H Up to ESC [ Ln Hn is received and discarded, and data
following it is print data.
- 01H Ln+Hn × 256 03H
Up to the parameter of a value specified by Ln+Hnx256 is valid (the setting
of that number is also valid).
Example) At Ln+Hn × 256 = 1, up to pft is valid.
- 04H Ln+Hn × 256 FFFFH
Up to sd is valid, and data beyond it is received and discarded by
(Ln+Hnx256)-3 bytes.

Range and Meaning of pft

Meaning (Paperfeed Mode Turning)
pft=01H ...The system is placed in single paperfeed mode to cause one-off page
ejection.
pft=03H ...The system is placed in auto paperfeed mode.
pft that takes on a value other than the above becomes invalid, the paperfeed mode
remains unchanged.
Range
0 <= pft <= 255

Command descriptions > 99

 Single Paperfeed Mode only for One Page
- This mode is established at pft=01H.
- Single paperfeed is valid for the next page.
When paperfeed is finished ....Single paperfeed is valid for a page to be
fed next. After the printing and ejection of the affected page, single
paperfeed is nullified from the data that follows the page.
When paperfeed is yet to be performed ....Single paperfeed is valid for a
page to be fed.
When the sheet that follows the affected page is fed with the presence of
the next data after the reception of a command, or fed by the LF or FF
command or another means, single paperfeed is nullified.
- With the reception of the first data of the next page, a paper jam condition
occurs, causing paperfeed or printing not to be performed until the paper
jam is cleared using the SEL button (clearing the paper jam, by the use of
SEL button, makes the system feed paper automatically and perform
printing).
- Single paperfeed is valid only for one page. Auto paperfeed mode is used
from the next page.
- This mode does not have effect on switch-selected paperfeed (single
paper-feed control is not performed). Paperfeed using commands
(including FF code) is under single paperfeed mode control, as for
paperfeed with usual data.
- Auto paperfeed mode
A page-over function automatically feeds the next sheet.

> Range and Meaning of fc

Meaning (Choice of Feeder)
This parameter is reserved for future use and has no meanings.
Range
0 <= fc <= 255
> Range and Meaning of sd
Meaning (Selection of CSF Bin)
sd=01H: CSF 1 Bin is set.
sd=02H: CSF 2 Bin is set. (Not Support)
sd that takes on a value other than the above becomes invalid, the setting remains
the same.
> Range
0 <= sd <= 255

Set page length in defined unit

> Code: ESC ( C Ln Hn Lp Hp
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function: Set page length for the currently selected paper mode. Paper modes are
Top, Rear, Bottom and CSF.

Command descriptions > 100

> Range:
Ln : 0 ~ 255
Hn : 0 ~ 255
Lp : 0 ~ 255
Hp : 0 ~ 255

Page Length = (Lp + Hp × 256) × defined unit

0 < Page Length <= 22 inch.
> Additional details:
Default basic unit is 1/216 inch.
When the page length set by the command equals 0 inch or exceeds 22 inch, the
command becomes invalid. Page length defined previously is effective.

Set page format

> Code: ESC ( c Ln Hn Lt Ht Lb Hb
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function:
Sets the Top and Bottom Margins in the defined unit.
> Range:
> Top margin = (Lt + Ht × 256) × defined unit
Bottom margin = (Lb + Hb × 256) × defined unit
> Additional details:
Ln : 0 ~ 255
Hn : 0 ~ 255
Lt : 0 ~ 255
Ht : 0 ~ 255
Lb : 0 ~ 255
Hb : 0 ~ 255

Top margin < bottom margin

Bottom margin <= 22 inches
Default unit is 1/216 inch.

Top margin

Page Printing Bottom

Length margin
Area

Command descriptions > 101

SYMBOL SETS

IBM char set 1—select

> Code: ESC7
> Compatibility: IBM III
> Function:
Select the IBM Character Set 1.

IBM char set II—select

> Code: ESC 6
> Compatibility: IBM III
> Function:
Select IBM character set 2

IBM char set III (all char)—continuous—select

> Code: ESC \ n1 n2
> Compatibility: IBM III
> Function:
Select IBM character Set II. (All Characters Chart).
> Range:
n1 and n2 is equal to the total number of characters that are desired to be printed.
i.e.: total count = n1 + (n2*256)
> Additional details:
> All codes including control codes, specified after this command is sent are print-able
characters.
> After the character count is reached, the printer no longer interprets the control
codes as printable characters.

IBM char set III (all char)—print one char only

> Code: ESC ^
> Compatibility: IBM III
> Function:
Select the IBM Set III (All characters chart) and print only one character.
> Additional details:
This command functions exactly the same as the “ESC\n1 n2” where n1 = 1
and n2 = 0.

Command descriptions > 102

Symbol set—OKIDATA-standard—select
> Code: ESC ! 0
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Select the OKIDATA—Standard Symbol set.
> Additional details:
Description of OKIDATA—Standard symbol set

LOCATION DESCRIPTION COUNT

00H – 1FH ASCII Control 32

Codes

20H – 7FH ASCII Printable 96

Characters

90H – 9FH ASCII Control 32

Codes

A0H – FFH IBM Printable 96

Characters

16 locations in this character set are used as International Language substitute

locations. When an international language is selected by the ESC ! n1 command, the
appropriate International language character pattern is printed.

Symbol set—OKIDATA-Block—select
> Code: ESC ! 1
> Function:
Select the OKIDATA—Block Graphics Symbol set.
> Additional details:
Description of OKIDATA—Block Graphics symbol set
— 7 Bit Mode

LOCATION DESCRIPTION COUNT

SI Side

00H – 1FH ASCII Control 32

Codes

20H – 7FH ASCII Printable 96

Characters

SO Side

00H – 1FH ASCII Control 32

Codes

20H – 5FH OKIDATA Block 96

Graphics

60H - 7FH Trapped Codes 32

Command descriptions > 103

 — 8 Bit Mode

LOCATION DESCRIPTION COUNT

00H – 1FH ASCII Control 32

Codes

20H – 7FH ASCII Printable 96

Characters

20H – FFH OKIDATA Block 128

Graphics

16 locations in this character set are used as International Language substitute

locations. When a International language is selected by the ESC ! n1 command, the
appropriate International language character pattern is printed.

Symbol set—OKIDATA-IBM — select

> Code: ESC ! 2
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Select the OKIDATA — IBM symbol set.
> Additional details:
Description of OKIDATA—IBM symbol set

LOCATION DESCRIPTION COUNT

00H – 2FH ASCII Control 3

Codes

03H – 06H IBM Printable 4

Characters

07H – 14H ASCII Control Code 14

15H IBM Printable 1

Characters

16H - 1FH ASCII Control Code 10

20H - FFH IBM Printable 224

Characters

16 locations in this character set are used as International language substitute

locations. When an International Language is selected by the ESC ! n1 command, the
appropriate International Language character pattern is printed.

International language char set—select

> Code: ESC R n
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function:
Selects an international language character set and code page specified by the
number n.

Command descriptions > 104

> Range:

Pn International character set Pn International character set

0 (00H) ASCII 11 (0BH) Spanish II

1 (01H) French 12 (0CH) Latin American

2 (02H) German 13 (0DH) French Canadian
3 (03H) British 14 (0EH) Dutch
4 (04H) Danish I 15 (0FH) Swedish II
5 (05H) Swedish I 16 (10H) Swedish III
6 (06H) Italian 17 (11H) Swedish IV
7 (07H) Spanish I 18 (12H) Turkish
8 (08H) Japanese 19 (13H) Swiss I
9 (09H) Norwegian 20 (14H) Swiss II
10 (0AH) Danish II 64 (40H) Publisher

Pn Code page set Pn Code page set

21 (15H) Cyrillic II-866 47 (2FH) Greek 869
22 (16H) Polska Mazovia 49 (31H) Windows East Europe
23 (17H) ISO Latin2 50 (32H) Windows Greek
24 (18H) Serbo Croatic I 51 (33H) Latin 5 (Windows Turkey)
25 (19H) Serbo Croatic II 52 (34H) Windows Cyrillic
26 (1AH) Multilingual 850 54 (36H) Hungarian CWI
27 (1BH) Norway 865 55 (37H) Kamenicky (MJK)
28 (1CH) Portugal 860 57 (39H) Turkey 857
29 (1DH) Turkey 58 (3AH) Roman-8
30 (1EH) Greek ABG (Reserve) 60 (3CH) Hebrew NC (862)
31 (1FH) Greek ABC (Reserve) 61 (3DH) Hebrew OC
32 (20H) Greek DEG (Reserve) 62 (3EH) Windows Hebrew
33 (21H) Greek Quattro (Reserve) 63 (3FH) KBL-Lithuanian
34 (22H) Greek SYS 25 (Reserve) 66 (42H) Ukrainian
35 (23H) Greek ME 29 (Reserve) 67 (43H) ISO Latin 6 (8859/10)
36 (24H) Greek 927 mod (Reserve) 68 (44H) Windows Baltic
37 (25H) Greek 927 69 (45H) Cyrillic Latvian
38 (26H) Greek 437 72 (48H) Bulgarian
39 (27H) Greek 928 73 (49H) Icelandic-861
40 (28H) Greek 851 (Reserve) 74 (4AH) Baltic 774
41 (29H) Greek 437 CYPRUS 80 (50H) BRASCII
42 (2AH) ECMA-94 81 (51H) Abicomp
43 (2BH) Canada French 82 (52H) ISO8859-15
44 (2CH) Cyrillic I - 855 83 (53H) Multilingual858
45 (2DH) Cyrillic II - 866 85 (55H) Greek_737
46 (2EH) East europe Latin II - 852 86 (56H) POL
87 (57H) Macedonian

Command descriptions > 105

International language character set – select
> Code: ESC ! n
> Compatibility: IBM III/ML
> Function:
Select International Language character set according to the n value specified.
> Range:

No. Pn Language No. Pn Language

1 (40)H (64)D ASCII (ø) 11 (4A)H (74)D TRS-80
2 (41)H (65)D ASCII (O) 12 (4B)H (75)D Spanish
3 (42)H (66)D British 13 (4C)H (76)D Swedish II
4 (43)H (67)D German 14 (4D)H (77)D Swedish III
5 (44)H (68)D French 15 (4E)H (78)D Swedish IV
6 (45)H (69)D Swedish I 16 (4F)H (79)D Turkish
7 (46)H (70)D Danish I 17 (50)H (80)D Swiss I
8 (47)H (71)D Norwegian 18 (51)H (81)D Swiss II
9 (48)H (72)D Dutch 19 (5A)H (90)D Publisher
10 (49)H (73)D Italian

Code page set—select

> Code: ESC [ T Ln Hn NUL NUL Hcp Lcp NUL
> Compatibility: IBM III/ML
> Function:
Selects the code page.
> Range:
Ln, Hn specifies the subsequent data amount
Data amount = (Ln + Hn*256)
Ln, Hn = 0 to 255
When Ln = 0, 0 <= Hn <= 3 are specified, the currently selected code page will
remain effective and this command is discarded.
NUL = 0 to 255
Hcp, Lcp are used to specify the code page ID number.
ID No. = (Hcp*255 + Lcp)
Hcp, Lcp = 0 to 255
> Out of range:
The command is discarded.

Command descriptions > 106

> Additional details:
No international language character conversion is performed except for the USA
character code.
The ID number causes the printer to select the corresponding code page directly.

ID (Hcp, Lcp) Code Page ID (Hcp, Lcp) Code Page

437 (1B5H) USA 1012 (3F4H) Turkey
737 (2E1H) Greek_737 1013 (3F5H) Cyrillic II - 866
(same as 866)
774 (306H) Baltic 774 1014 (3F6H) Polska Mazovia
850 (352H) Multilingual 1015 (3F7H) ISO Latin 2
852 (354H) East Europe Latin II - 852 1016 (3F8H) Serbo Croatic I
855 (357H) Cyrillic I - 855 1017 (3F9H) Serbo Croatic II
857 (359H) Turkey 857 1018 (3FAH) ECMA-94
858 (35AH) Multilingual858 1019 (3FBH) Windows East Europe
860 (35CH) Portugual 1020 (3FCH) Windows Greek
861 (35DH) Icelandic-861 1021 (3FDH) Windows Turkey
862 (35EH) Hebrew NC (862) 1022 (3FEH) Windows Cyrillic
(same as 406)
863 (35FH) Canada French 1024 (400H) Hungarian CWI
865 (361H) Norway 1027 (403H) Ukrainian
866 (362H) Cyrillic II - 866 1028 (404H) Roman-8
869 (365H) Greek 869 1029 (405H) ISO Latin6 (8859/10)
895 (37FH) Kamenickey (MJK) 1030 (406H) Hebrew NC
1000 (3E8H) Greek ABG (Reserve) 1031 (407H) Hebrew OC
1001 (3E9H) Greek ABC (Reserve) 1032 (408H) Windows Hebrew
1002 (3EAH) Greek DEC (Reserve) 1033 (409H) KBL-Lithuanian
1003 (3EBH) Greek Quattro (Reserve) 1034 (40AH) Windows Baltic
1004 (3ECH) Greek SYS 25 (Reserve) 1035 (40BH) Cyrillic Latvian
1005 (3EDH) Greek ME 29 (Reserve) 1040 (410H) BRASCII
1006 (3EEH) Greek 927 mod (Reserve) 1041 (411H) Abicomp
1007 (3EFH) Greek 927 (Reserve) 1072 (430H) Bulgarian
1008 (3F0H) Greek 437 1081 (439H) ISO8859-15
1009 (3F1H) Greek 928 1086 (43EH) POL 1
1010 (3F2H) Greek 851 (Reserve) 1087 (43FH) Macedonian
1011 (3F3H) Greek 437 CYPRUS

Slant/graphics character table—select

> Code: ESC t n
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function Select the type of character table, setting by the command ESC ( t Ln Hn
Pn1 Pn2 Pn3.

Command descriptions > 107

> Range:
n = 00H ... selects character table 0.
n = 01H ... selects character table 1.

Epson—control codes or printable characters—ON/OFF

> Code: ESC I n
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function: Enables the printer to print the characters stored in decimal locations 0-6,
16-17, 21-23, 25-26, 28-31 and 128-134, 144-145, 149-151, 153-154, 156-159 as
printable characters, not control codes.
> Range:
n = 1 Interprets code 0-6, 16-17, 21-23, 25-26, 28-31 and 128-134, 144-145, 149-
151, 153-154, 156-159 as printable characters.
n = 0 Interprets code 0-6, 16-17, 21-23, 25-26, 28-31 and 128-134, 144-145, 149-
151, 153-154, 156-159 as non-printable characters, i.e. control codes.
> Additional details:
This function allows the user to store User-defined characters in locations that
normally correlate to control codes.

Epson—control codes or printable characters—ON

> Code: ESC 6
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function:
Enables the printer to interpret the decimal locations 128 – 159, 255 as printable
characters, not as control codes.
> Additional details:
This function allows the user to store User-defined characters in locations that
normally correlate to control codes.

Epson—control codes or printable characters—OFF

> Code: ESC 7
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function:
Cancels ESC 6, decimal locations 128-159, 255 are interpreted as control codes, not
as printable characters.
> Additional details:
This function allows the user to store User-defined characters in locations that
normally correlate to control codes.

Command descriptions > 108

Epson—italic character set—select
> Code: ESC 4
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function:
Select the alternate character set which is composed of italicized character.
> Additional details:
Italic characters are printed using a slat algorithm.
See priority table for detail command combination.
Italic characters may be overlapped on the next character cell.
> Related functions:
This mode can also be selected by the ESC ! n command.

Epson—italic character set—cancel

> Code: ESC 5
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function:
Cancel the Alternate Character Set (Italics characters).
> Related functions:
This mode can also be reset by the ESC ! n command.

Character table designation

> Code: ESC ( t Ln Hn Pn1 Pn2 Pn3
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function: Stores character tables, which are set in Pn2 and Pn3, each in Pn1-
indicated areas (two types, tables 1 and 2). ESCt sets either of the two areas to
makes one table selectable.
> Ranges
> Effective Ranges and Meanings of Ln Hn
0(00H) <= Ln <= 255(FFH)
0(00H) <= Hn <= 255(FFH) MSB is invalid.
Ln Hn shows the number of bytes of parameters after it.
Number of Bytes of Parameters = Ln+Hn×256
At Ln+Hn×256 <= 2, this command is invalid and data of Ln+Hn x256 bytes is
received and discarded.
At Ln+Hn×256 >3, data of (Ln+Hn×256)-3 bytes is received and discarded after the
reception of Pn1, Pn2 and Pn3.
This parameter is specified usually with a value, Ln+Hn x 256 = 3.
Effective Ranges, effective Values and meanings of Pn1, Pn2 and Pn2
0(00H) Pn1 255(FFH) MBS is invalid.
0(00H) Pn2 255(FFH) MBS is invalid.
0(00H) Pn3 255(FFH) MBS is invalid.

Command descriptions > 109

 A table is selected according to each combination of Pn2 and Pn3 and specified based
on Pn1.
Effective values of Pn1: Pn1=00H, 01H, 30H, 31H
Effective values of Pn2 and Pn3 are shown in the table on the following page.
Varying combinations of Pn2 and Pn3, and Tables Selected

PN2 (HEX) PN3 (HEX) CHARACTER

TABLE

0 0 Italic

1 0 PC437 (USA)

3 0 PC850
(Multilingual)

7 0 PC860
(Portuguese)

8 0 PC863 (Canada-
French)

9 0 PC865
(Norway)

For Pn1, Pn2 and Pn3 that takes on values other than effective ones Immediately
following power-on .......The default setting shown in “Additional details” is taken
(menu setting). Except the above .............................The setting is left at a
previously-set table.
Pn1
Select Table 1 00H (30) Specify
ESC t Pn ESC ( t 3 0 Pn1 Pn2 Pn3
01H (31)
The value of Pn corresponds to the value of Pn1.

> Additional details:

Varying the value of Pn1 permits the specification of up to two types of tables.
The value of Pn1 that corresponds to a table desired to be used is assigned to Pn to
select, using ESC t Pn, either of specified two types of tables.
For example: Two types of tables are stored in two areas.
Pn1
Table 0 (00H) Itali ESC ( t 3 0 0 0 0 Itali
Table 1 (01H) USA ESC ( t 3 0 1 1 0 USA
Either of the two tables is selected.
ESC t 1 USA

Command descriptions > 110

Tables that are defined as defaults at the instant after power-on:

VALUE OF PN TABLE
SELECTED

Table 0 00H (30H) Italic

Table 1 01H (31H) Menu-selected

Table

Menu-selectable Tables (Code Page)

– USA
– Multilingual
– Portuguese
– Canada-French
– Norway
DLL Copy is used to copy the mode where printing is being performed.
When a table change is made by ESC t Pn, international character settings remain
unchanged.
When a code page set by ESC ( t is selected by ESC t Pn, the selected code page
becomes effective and international character conversion is performed.
For Code Page Setting by ESC R Pn (Pn = 26 to 28, 43)
When effective code page setting is performed by the ESC R command, the code page
is set to table 1 of ESC t. For a code page to be effective by ESC R, ESC t 1 must be
set.
International character conversion is not performed (the setting remains the same).
When international character setting is performed by ESC R Pn (Pn = 0 to 14, 64),
the code page is “USA”.

Command descriptions > 111

FONT DESCRIPTION

Print quality—select mode—Draft or NLQ

> Code: ESC × n
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function:
Either Draft or NLQ print quality mode.
> Range:
Range n = 01H, 31H, 81H, B1H selects NLQ character font.
Range n = 00H, 30H, 80H, B0H selects Draft character font.
> Out of range:
This command will be ignored when the value is:
02H – 2FH or 32H – 7FH or 82H – AFH or B2H – FFH
> Additional details:
NLQ and Draft Modes are printed in 10, 12, 15, 17.1, and 20 CPI.
Draft 10 CPI mode is the factory default setting.
See “Appendix B – Print modes/features” on page 311.

Print quality—select HSD

> Code: ESC # 0
> Compatibility: IBM III
> Function:
Select High Speed Draft Character Set.
> Additional details:
If inter-character clearance is defined while the High Speed Draft (HSD) mode is
selected, additional blank dot columns will be suppressed.
The HSD mode will be suppressed during the proportional print mode.
Accessible addresses:
03H — 06H
15H
20H — 7FH
80H — AFH
E0H — F3H
F6H — FFH
Other areas will not be printed in High Speed draft mode.
> See “Appendix B – Print modes/features” on page 311.

Command descriptions > 112

Print quality—select HSD
> Code: ESC ( n
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function:
Select High Speed Draft Character Set.
> Range: n = 00H, 30H, 80H, or B0H HSD is selected.
n = any other value The current mode will remain effective.
> Additional details:
If inter-character clearance is defined while the High Speed Draft (HSD) mode is
selected, additional blank dot columns will be suppressed.
The HSD mode will be suppressed during the proportional print mode.
Accessible addresses:
03 — 06H
15H
20H — 7FH
80H — AFH
EOH — F3H
F6H — FFH
Other addresses will not be printed in High Speed draft mode.
See “Appendix B – Print modes/features” on page 311.

Print quality—select font

> Code: ESC I n
> Compatibility: IBM III
> Function:
Select print mode according to the value of n.
> Range: Pn is set as 0 (00H) Pn 255 (FFH)

MSB VALUE OF N LSB PRINT MODE

XXXX0000B Print following letters in ROM Draft.

XXXX0001B Print following letters in Fast Font

(HSD 12 CPI).

XXXX0010B Print following letters in ROM NLQ

(Sans Serif).

XXXX0011B Print following letters in ROM NLQ II

(Courier).

XXXX0100B Print following letters in DLL Draft.

ESCI
XXXX0101B Print following letters in Fast Font
(DLL Draft 12 CPI).

XXXX0110B Print following letters in DLL NLQ.

XXXX0111B Print following letters in DLL NLQ II.

XXXX1011B Print following letters in Alternate

ROM NLQ II (Courier).

XXXX1111B Print following letters in Alternate

DLL NLQ II.

Command descriptions > 113

> Out of range:
This command will be ignored and the last set will remain.

Print quality—select high speed draft

> Code: ESC # 0
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Select the High Speed Draft (HSD) Print Quality Mode which prints a print speed of
600 CPS, for fast througput.
> Additional details:
The HSD mode can be combined with all other print features except proportional and
inter-character clearance print modes.
The Cell Matrix is as follows:
(7=2) x 9
(HSD Mode)

7 columns 2

Only normal Alpha-numeric printable characters can be printed in the HSD mode.
HSD mode is mutually exclusive with the other print quality modes, NLQ and Draft.
See “Appendix B – Print modes/features” on page 311 for details of legal combination
of Print Quality Modes and Print Features.
HSD prints in one pass of the print head.

Print quality—select Draft

> Code: ESC 0
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Select the Draft Print Quality Mode which prints at a print speed of 450 CPS and
provides speed with good print quality.
> Details:
The Draft Print Quality Mode is considered the “normal” mode of printing and can be
combined with most Print Features.

Command descriptions > 114

 The Cell Matrix is as follows:

Draft mode is mutually exclusive with the other print quality modes, NLQ and HSD.
See “Appendix B – Print modes/features” on page 311 for details of legal
combinations of Print Quality Modes and Print Features.
Draft prints in one pass of the print head.

Print quality—select NLQ

> Code: ESC 1
> Compatibility: ML
> Function: Select the Near Letter Quality (NLQ) Print Quality Mode which prints at a
speed of 113 CPS, but provides the best print quality.
> Additional details:
NLQ Print Quality is achieved by printing twice the number of dots, both vertically and
horizontally, compared to Draft Print Quality in the same physical space.
The Cell Matrix is as follows:
First pass (17 + 7 ) x 9
Second pass (17 + 7) x 9

17

17 7

NLQ is mutually exclusive with the other print quality modes, Draft and HSD.
See “Appendix B – Print modes/features” on page 311 for details of legal
combinations of Print Quality Modes and Print Features.
NLQ prints in two passes of the print head. The second pass is shifted downward 1/
144 inch.
NLQ is printed in 10, 12, 15, 17.1 and 20 CPI.

Command descriptions > 115

Print quality—select NLQ – Gothic
> Code: ESC 3
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Select the Near Letter Quality (NLQ) Print Quality Mode which prints a Gothic type-
style at a speed of 113 CPS.
> Additional details:
NLQ Print Quality is achieved by printing twice the number of dots, both vertically and
horizontally, compared to Draft Print Quality in the same physical space.
The Cell Matrix is as follows:
First pass (17 + 7 ) x 9
Second pass (17 + 7) x 9

17

17 7

NLQ Gothic is mutually exclusive with the other print quality modes, NLQ Courier,
Draft and HSD.
See “Appendix B – Print modes/features” on page 311 for details of legal
combinations of Print Quality Modes and Print Features.
NLQ prints in two passes of the printhead. The second pass is shifted downward 1/
144 inch.
NLQ is printed in 10, 12, 15, 17.1, and 20 CPI.

Custom font—select Draft DLL font

> Code: ESC 2
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Select previously downloaded DLL font (as Utility quality).
> Additional details:
256 characters can be loaded. However, DLL characters fonts cannot be printed since
the following character codes are handled as a function.
00H to 02H, 07H to 14H, 16H to 1FH
Since Draft custom characters (DLL) are stored in RAM, they will be lost if power to
the printer is turned off.
Draft Custom Characters definition commands are:
ascender characters = ESC % A m n1 ... n11
descender characters = ESC % D m n1 ... n11
copy ROM to RAM

Command descriptions > 116

 This command is equivalent to the composite command ( ESC.&.n:)
where n3 – n2 = 1
If an International language is specified (ESC ! n command) while the Draft Custom
Character Font is active, the International language does not become effective until
the Draft Custom Character Font is deactivated.
If an International language is specific (ESC ! n command) while the Draft custom
character font is active, the commands that deactivate Draft Custom Characters have
the following effect on the International Language command...

COMMAND TO DEACTIVATE ESC 2 RESULTS

Draft (ESC 0) Intr’l Lang is active and

Print Quality = Draft

NLQ (ESC 1) Intr’l Lang is active and

Print Quality = NLQ

NLQ-DLL (ESC 7) Intr’l Lang is not activated

and Synthetic NLQ Quality
Custom Characters are
selected.

Custom font—select synthetic-NLQ DLL font

> Code: ESC 7
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Select the NLQ print quality custom character font (DLL) which is synthesized from
the Draft custom character data.
> Additional details:
256 characters can be loaded. However, DLL characters fonts cannot be printed since
the following character codes are handled as a function.
00H to 02H, 07H to 14H, 16H to 1FH
This font is created by reading the Draft custom character data, that was previously
loaded, and algorithmically synthesising extra dots so that the effective print quality
of the characters is NLQ quality.
The synthetic NLQ custom character font is deactivated by selection of either Draft
(ESC 0), NLQ (ESC 1) or Draft Custom characters (ESC 2).
If an International language is specified (ESC ! n command) while the Synthetic NLQ
custom character font is active, the commands that deactivate Synthetic custom
characters have the following effect on the International Language command...

COMMAND TO DEACTIVATE ESC 2 RESULTS

Draft (ESC 0) Intr’l Lang is active and

Print Quality = Draft

NLQ (ESC 1) Intr’l Lang is active and

Print Quality = NLQ

NLQ-DLL (ESC 7) Intr’l Lang is not activated

and Synthetic NLQ Quality
Custom Characters are
selected.

Command descriptions > 117

Typestyles—select
> Code: ESC k n
> Compatibility: EPS FX / IBM III / ML
> Function:
Select a NLQ typestyle.
> Range:
n = 00H, 30H, 80H, B0H Courier
n = 01H, 31H, 81H, B1H Gothic
n = 05H, 35H, 85H, B5H OCR-B
> Out of range:
This command will be ignored if n does not equal one of the above values.

Custom font—create—copy ROM data to RAM

> Code: ESC : NUL n NUL
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function:
Access the pre-defined ROM character patterns as if they were copied to DLL RAM.
> Range:
The number n indicates the NLQ font typeface number when they are copied to RAM.
n = 00H, 80H NLQ Courier
n = 01H, 81H NLQ Gothic
n = 05H, 85H NLQ OCR-B
> Additional details:
This command actually does not cause the pre-defined ROM character data to be
transferred to the RAM DLL area, rather, for all characters (addresses) not defined by
the user, the data is actually read from ROM. The only time that the data is read from
RAM is when the character pattern is created by the user. With the user creating the
character data and defining its address, it causes the Firmware to re-route the “data
read” from the normal ROM data, to the DLL RAM data.
Any previously defined DLL data will be erased if this command is executed.
The character patterns are stored in the volatile RAM.

Custom font—create—copy ROM data to RAM

> Code: ESC $
> Compatibility: IBM III/ML
> Function:
Access the pre-defined ROM character patterns as if they were copied to DLL RAM.
> Additional details:
This command actually does not cause the pre-defined ROM character data to be
transferred to the RAM DLL area, rather for all characters (addresses) not defined by
the user, the data is actually read from ROM. The only time that the data is read from
RAM is when the character pattern is created by the user. With the user creating the
character data and defining its address, it causes the Firmware to re-route the “data
read” from the normal ROM data, to the DLL RAM data.

Command descriptions > 118

 Any previously defined DLL data will be erased if this command is executed.
The character patterns are stored in the volatile RAM.
Both Draft and NLQ Courier ROM characters are “copied” to DLL RAM.

Custom font—create char pattern—Draft DLL

> Code:
part 1 part 2 part 2’
ESC & m n1 n2 a d1 ... d11 a d1 ... d11

> Compatibility: EPS FX

> Function:
Define up to 256 character patterns using a 11H × 8V matrix and store the pattern
in RAM.
> Range:
m = decimal 0
n1 = decimal 0 – 255
n2 = decimal 0 – 255
a = decimal 0 – 255 decimal representation of a 8 bit binary number
d1 = decimal 0 – 255
d2 = decimal 0 – 255
> Variable purpose:
m = area of RAM in which to store DLL, currently only 1 area is available (i.e. “m” is
a constant value equal to zero).
n1 = Starting character (address) to be redefined by the user.
n2 = Ending character (address) to be redefined by the user.
a = attribute byte “a” bit definition (bits 7-0) ...
b7 = 1 = ascender, dot rows 1-8
0 = descender, dot rows 2-9
b6-b4 = Interpreted as a binary number. Specifies the left offset (starting
column to print) of the first dot column to be printed. Used to
reduced leading white space. Maximum of 7 bytes can be
ignored.
The count begins with byte #1.
b3-b0 = Interpreted as a binary number. Specifies the ending column to
print of the last column of data to be printed. The difference
between this number and the left-offset is equal to the
character’s width. Maximum ending column is 12.

d1-d11 = column data, each column of data = 1 byte. Column #1 = byte #1.
> Additional details:
This command is composed of 2 parts ...

part 1 part 2
ESC & m n1 n2 a d1 ... d11

(repeat)

Command descriptions > 119

Part 1, which is “ESC & m n1 n2” is sent once, while part 2, “a1d1 ... d11” is repeated
for each character pattern that is desired to be defined.
Character locations that can be defined:
1. normal operation DLL
(20)H — (7F)H 96 characters
(A0)H — (FF)H 64 characters
Total 160 characters

2. with ESC 6 (print code expansion area) ...

(20)H — (7F)H 96 characters
(80)H — (9F)H 32 characters
(A0)H — (FF)H 64 characters
Total 192 characters

3. with ESC I (print code expansion area) ...

(00)H — (1F)H 32 characters
(20)H — (7F)H 96 characters
(80)H — (9F)H 32 characters
(A0)H — (FF)H 64 characters
Total 256 characters

Example of pattern data definition ... column #7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 . . . . . . . x . . . .
2 . . . . . . x . x . . .
3 . . . . . . x . x . . .
4 . . . . . . x . x . . .
5 . . . . . . x . x . . .
6 . . . . . . . x . . . .
7 . . . . . . . x . . . .
8 . . . . . . . . . . . .
9 . . . . . . . . . . . .

row data weight value

1 . 128 0
2 x 64 64
3 x 32 32
4 x 16 16
5 x 8 8
6 . 4 0
7 . 2 0
8 . 1 0
120 = pattern data for
column #7

Command descriptions > 120

 If less than 256 characters are to be defined, all character locations (address) must
be consecutive from the starting character.
Downloading data to one code position does not affect any other code position that
has already been loaded.
Since the DLL character reside in volatile RAM, they are not saved when power is
turned off.
This command initiates printing action (print block).
DLL characters can be combined with most print features, emphasized, enhanced,
double width. For exact combinations, refer to attachments Print Mode/Features
Combination Chart.
The NLQ print feature used in conjunction with this command will cause Draft
character interpolation printing.
Changing the “Emulation Mode” setting in MENU mode will cause all stored DLL data
to be copied.
Ascender characters can be defined in rows 1 through 8, and column 1 through 11.
Ascender characters can be defined in rows 2 through 9, and column 1 through 11.
When underlining a descender DLL character, the underline occupies the same row
as the bottom row of the character.

Custom font—create char pattern—Draft/NLQ DLL

> Code: ESC = c1 c2 m n a1 a2 d1 ... d11 a1 a2 d1 ... d11 ...
part 1 part 2 part 2’
ESC = c1 c2 m n a1 a2 d1 ... d11 a1 a2 d1 ... d11 ...

> Compatibility: IBM III

> Function:
Define up to 256 character patterns for a 11 H × 8V (Draft), 23 × 8V (NLQ) matrix
and store the pattern in RAM.
> Range:
c1 = decimal 0 – 255
c2 = decimal 0 – 13
m = decimal 20 or 21
n = decimal 0 – 255
a1 = decimal 0 – 255
a2 = decimal 0 – 255
d1 = decimal 0 – 255
d11 = decimal 0 – 255
> Variable purpose:
c1 = Low byte of total data count.
c2 = High byte of total data count.
m = print ID, selects print quality i.e. 20 = Draft or 21 = NLQ II/Alternate NLQ II
n = starting character (address) to be redefined by the user.
al = Attribute #1’s bit definition (bits 7 – 0)...
b7 = 0 = ascender, dot rows 1 – 8
1 = descender, dot rows 2 – 9
b6 – b2 = ignored

Command descriptions > 121

 — Draft DLL (b1 – b0):
b1 – b0 = 00 = No 12-high expansion. Bit 7 is valid.
01 = Line graphics char. Bottom dot will be expand-ed down to rows
9, 10, & 12. Bit 7 is ignored. NLQ used in conjunction with this
command will cause vertical, horizontal, and diagonal line
enhanced.
10 = Shading character. The bottom dots in col 1, 2, 3 & 4 will be
expanded downward to rows 9, 10, 11 & 12. NLQ is ignored.
11 = NUL is expanded 4 dots downward. Bit 7 of a 1 is ignored.
— NLQ DLL (b1-b0):
b1 – b0 = 00 = No 12-high expansion. Bit 7 is valid
01 = Line graphics char. Bottom dot (15) will be expanded down to
rows 17, 19, 21, 23 and dot 16 will be expanded to rows 18, 20,
22, 24. Bit 7 is ignored. NLQ used in conjunction with this
command will cause vertical, horizontal, and diagonal line
enhanced.
10 = Shading character. The top dots in col 1, 4, 5 & 7 will be
expanded downward to rows 17, 19, 21, & 23. Bit 7 is ignored
(ascender/descender).
11 = Same as 01.
— Draft DLL (b1-b0):
a2 = Attribute #2’s bit definition (bits 7–0)
b6 – b4 = Interpreted as a binary number. Specifies the left offset of first
dot column to be printed. Used to reduce leading white space.
Maximum of 7 bytes can be ignored. The count begins with byte
#1.
b3 – b0 = Interpreted as a binary number. Specifies the number of dot
columns to be printed (width of the printable dot columns). Each
character is followed by a mandatory blank column which can
not be eliminated. This bank column is not included in the
character width. Specified widths greater than 11 will be
interpreted as 11 (max. value).
— NLQ DLL (b1 – b0): reserved
d1–d11 = column data, each column of data = 1 byte
Column #1 = byte #1.
Draft’s 12th column data always = blank
NLQ’s 24th column data always = blank
NLQ’s MSB = top pin, adjacent dots are not allowed.

> Additional details:

This command is composed of 2 parts ...

part 1 part 2
ESC = c1 c2 m n a1 a2 d1 ... d11

(repeat)

Part 1, which is “ESC = c1 c2 m n” is only sent once, while part 2, “a1 a2 d1 ... d11”
is repeated for each character pattern that is desired to be defined.
Draft NLQ’s Part 2 = 13 (2 + 11) bytes of data
NLQ NLQ’s Part 2 = 48 (2 + 46) bytes of data
c1 and c2 define the number of bytes (a1, a2, d1-d11), of the characters pattern, to
download:

Command descriptions > 122

 Total count = (# of characters*13) + 2
c2 = total count/256 with no remainder
c1 = remainder
For example:
total count = (94*13) + 2 = 1224
1224/256 = 4 200/256
c1 = 200
c2 = 4
If less than 256 characters are to be defined, all character locations (address) must
be consecutive from the starting character.
Downloading data to one code position does not affect any other code position that
has already been loaded.
Since the DLL characters reside in volatile RAM, they are not saved when power is
turned off.
This command initiates printing action (print block).
To clear the DLL RAM area, send only Part 1 of the command with:
ASCII..... ESC = NUL
NULHex........ 1B 3D 00 00
Decimal .. 27 61 0 0
Changing the emulation mode in MENU will cause stored DLL data to be erased.
256 DLL characters location (00) H—(FF)H, can be defined by the user.

Custom font—select DLL font

> Code: ESC % n
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function:
Select the user-defined font.
> Range:
When n = 01H, 31H, 81H, B1H, the DLL character set will be selected.
n = 00H, 30H, 80H, B0H the DLL character set mode will be reset and the
Pre-defined character set will be selected.
> Out of range:
If n does not equal the above values this command is ignored.

Character pitch—select 10 CPI

> Code: ESC P
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function:
10 CPI, 12 CPI, or 15 CPI mode: 10 characters per inch 15 CPI, (condense suppress),
17.1 CPI, or 20 CPI mode: 17.1 characters per inch

Command descriptions > 123

> Additional details:
Since all character pitches are mutually exclusive, this pitch will be “turned-off” if
another pitch command is received.
10 CPI is the factory default for character pitch.
This commands will not cancel double width mode.
10 CPI and compress = 17.1 CPI.

Character pitch—select 12 CPI

> Code: ESC M
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function:
> 10 CPI, 12 CPI, or 15 CPI mode: 12 characters per inch
15 CPI (condense suppress), 17.1 CPI, or 20 CPI mode: 20 characters per inch
> Additional details:
Since all character pitches are mutually exclusive, this pitch will be “turned-off” if
another pitch command is received.
This command does not cancel double width.
In the compress mode, 20 CPI is selected.

Character pitch—select 12 CPI

> Code: ESC :
> Compatibility: IBM III
> Function:
10 CPI, 12 CPI, or 15 CPI mode: 12 characters per inch
17.1 CPI or 20 CPI mode: 12 or 20 characters per inch (in accordance with the “SI
Select Pitch (12 CPI)” setting in MENU mode)
> Additional details:
Since all character pitches are mutually exclusive, this pitch will be “turned-off” if
another pitch command is received.
Printing does not start if ESC : is received during 12 CPI.
Character pitch commands become effective immediately upon receipt, thereby,
allowing a pitch change within a line.
This command will not cancel the double width mode.

Character pitch—select 15 CPI

> Code: ESC g
> Compatibility: EPS FX / IBM III / ML

Command descriptions > 124

> Function:
Selects 15 characters per inch (15CPI).

<Epson>

10 CPI mode: 15 CPI

12 CPI mode: 15 CPI

15 CPI mode: 15 CPI

15 CPI (condense suppress) mode: 15 CPI (condense suppress)

17.1 CPI mode: 15 CPI (condense suppress)

20 CPI mode: 15 CPI (condense suppress)

<IBM>/ <ML>

10 CPI mode: 15 CPI

<IBM>/ <ML> cont.

12 CPI mode: 15 CPI

15 CPI mode: 15 CPI

17.1 CPI mode: 15 CPI

20 CPI mode: 15 CPI

> Additional details:

This command does not clear the elongated character mode (double width printed
character). (Epson, IBM)
This command clears elongated character mode. (ML)
This command does not start printing.

Character pitch—select condensed (17, 20 CPI)

> Code: SI
> Compatibility: EPS FX/IBM III
> Function:
> Compress the current character pitch.

<Epson>

When the printer receives this command in the following CPI modes,
the command sets the character pitch as given below.

10 CPI mode: 17.1 CPI

12 CPI mode: 20 CPI

15 CPI mode: 15 CPI (condense suppress)

15 CPI (condense suppress) mode: 15 CPI (condense suppress)

17.1 CPI mode: 17.1 CPI

20 CPI mode: 20 CPI

<IBM>

When the printer receives this command in the following CPI modes,
the command sets the character pitch as given below (in accordance
with the “SI Select Pitch (10 CPI)” and “SI Select Pitch (12 CPI)”
settings in MENU mode).

Command descriptions > 125

 10 CPI mode: 15 or 17.1 CPI

12 CPI mode: 12 or 20 CPI

15 CPI mode: 15 or 17.1 CPI

17.1 CPI mode: 15 or 17.1 CPI

20 CPI mode: 15, 17, or 20 CPI

> Additional details:

This command does not cancel double width.
> Related functions:
ESC SI and SI are identical function.

Character pitch—select condensed (17, 20 CPI)

> Code: ESC SI
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function:
Compress the current character pitch.

10 CPI mode: 17.1 CPI

12 CPI mode: 20 CPI

15 CPI mode: 15 CPI (condense suppress)

15 CPI (condense suppress) mode: 15 CPI (condense suppress)

17.1 CPI mode: 17.1 CPI

20 CPI mode: 20 CPI

> Additional details:

This command is identical to ESC SI.
This command does not cancel double width.
> Related functions:
ESC SI and SI are identical in function.

Character pitch—cancel condensed (17, 20 CPI)

> Code: DC2
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function:
Cancels condensed pitch, returns pitch to the pitch that was selected before the
condensed pitch was activated.

10 CPI mode: 10 CPI

12 CPI mode: 12 CPI

15 CPI mode: 15 CPI

15 CPI (condense suppress) mode: 15 CPI

17.1 CPI mode: 10 CPI

20 CPI mode: 12 CPI

Command descriptions > 126

Character pitch—select 10 CPI
> Code: RS
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Select 10 CPI (120 DPI) character pitch.
> Additional details
Since all character pitches are mutually exclusive, this pitch will be “turned-off” if
another pitch command is received.
10 CPI is the factory default for character pitch.
This command cancels double width mode.
When character pitch (CPI) is changed, the printer will change the character pitch of
the printing block data when it receives the next print data, and will print the data in
the printer buffer.
Pitch changes are allowed anywhere on the print line.

Character pitch—select 12 CPI

> Code: FS
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Select 12 CPI (144 DPI) character pitch.
> Additional details:
Since all character pitches are mutually exclusive, this pitch will be “turned-off” if
another pitch command is received.
This command cancels double width.
When character pitch (CPI) is changed, the printer will change the character pitch of
the printing block data when it receives the next print data, and will print the data in
the printer buffer.
Pitch changes are allowed anywhere on the print line.

Character pitch—select 17.1 CPI

> Code: GS
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Select 17.1 CPI (206 DPI) character pitch.
> Additional details:
Since all character pitches are mutually exclusive, this pitch will be “turned-off” if
another pitch command is received.
This command cancels double width.
If the printer is in 17.1 CPI (206 DPI) previous to entering Bit Image Graphics will be
60 DPI (10 CPI).
When character pitch (CPI) is changed, the printer will change the character pitch of
the printing block data when it receives the next print data, and will print the data in
the print buffer.

Command descriptions > 127

 Pitch changes are allowed anywhere on the print line.

Character pitch—select 20 CPI

> Code: ESC # 3
> Compatibility: ML
> Function: Select 20 CPI (144 DPI) character pitch.
> Additional details:
Since all character pitches are mutually exclusive, this pitch will be “turned-off” if
another pitch command is received.
This command cancels double width.
If the printer is in 20 CPI (240 DPI) previous to entering Bit Image Graphics, the
resultant density in Bits Image Graphics will be 60 DPI (10 CPI).
When character pitch (CPI) is changed, the printer will change the character pitch of
the printing block data when it receives the next print data, and will print the data in
the printer buffer.
Pitch changes are allowed anywhere on the print line.

Character density—define inter-char clearance—by dot column

> Code: ESC N n
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Define the number of blank dot columns (n) to be added on to the end of the normal
character cell matrix.
> Range:

DECIMAL HEXADECIMAL

n = 0 – 11 00 – 0B

> Out of range:

The command will be ignored.
> Additional details:
If the double width print feature is specified while this command is active, the number
of additional blank dot columns will be doubled.
For example: Normal Width (9 + 3) + 5 = 17 columns.
Double Width (9 + 3 + 5) × 2 = 34 columns.
This command is not effective in the following print modes:
— Bit Image Graphics
— HSD

Command descriptions > 128

The normal character cell matrix has 3 blank dot columns that are pre-defined and
cannot be changed by the user. The additional blank dot columns defined by this
command are added to this normal cell.
total cell

Additional blank dot colums.

Pre-defined 3 blank dot colums

For example:
Normal Cell Additional Blank Total Cell
Columns
1. n = 0 (9 + 3) + 0 = 12
2. n = 5 (9 + 3) + 5 = 17

This command remains in effect until one of the following commands are received.
— Next ESC.N.n command
— CAN
— ESC CAN
— I-Prime
This command is effective in both the Draft Mode and NLQ mode. Any value of “n”
will produce the same physical amount of trailing white space after the characters for
both NLQ and Draft.
Pre-defined (default) inter-char clearance is as follows:
3/120 inch for 10 CPI
3/144 inch for 12 CPI
3/180 inch for 15 CPI
3/206 inch for 17.1 CPI
3/240 for 20 CPI
Maximum inter character clearance:
n = 11 (max. value)
14/120 inch for 10 CPI
14/144 inch for 12 CPI
14/180 inch for 15 CPI
14/206 inch for 17.1 CPI
14/240 inch for 20 CPI

Command descriptions > 129

Character pitch select—20 CPI
> Code: ESC SI
> Compatibility: IBM III
> Function: Selects 20 characters per inch (20 CPI).
> Additional details:
This command does not clear the elongated character mode (double width printed
character).
This command does not start printing.

Inter-character clearance—define amount—by dot column

> Code: ESC SP n
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function:
Defines the number of blank dot columns to add to the right side of each character.
> Range:
Range n = 0 to 255 (Bit 7 of n is ignored.)
> Additional details:
n is the number of dots to be added to the right of each character.
In double width, the value of clearance will be automatically double. An example is 1
dot column is added to the right side of a normal size character, while double width
is activated, the 1 dot column will be doubled.
Dots width of clearance is:
10 CPI -> 1/120”
12 CPI -> 1/144”
15 CPI -> 1/180”
17 CPI -> 1/206”
20 CPI -> 1/240”
Once set, the clearance does not change until reset.
The command to set clearance between characters is executed immediately upon
recognition by the printer.
This command is not effective for Graphics modes.

Inter-character clearance—define amount—by dot column

> Code: ESC V n
> Compatibility: IBM III
> Function:
Defines the number of blank dot columns to add to the right side of each character.
> Range:
0 <= n <= 11
> Out of range:
If n > 11 is specified, n will be truncated to 11. Any value of n > 11 will be truncated.

Command descriptions > 130

> Additional details:
Once set, the clearance does not change until reset.
The command to set clearance between characters is executed immediately upon
recognition by the printer.
The pre-defined character cell matrix has 3 blank dot columns as part of the character
option. Using this command only additional blank dot columns can be added to the
character.
This command is not effective for Graphics modes.

Character cell size—proportional width—ON / OFF

> Code: ESC p n
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function:
Turns on/off the proportional character pitch in which each character has a different
cell width in order to unify the “white space” between characters.
> Range:
Range n = 01H, 31H, 81H, or B1H Proportional Spacing = On
Range n = 00H, 30H, 80H, or B0H Proportional Spacing = Off
> Out of range:
If n does not equal the above values this command is ignored.
> Additional details:
Previous print mode (print quality and pitch) will be maintained.
Proportional spacing can also be designated by ESC ! n, the Master select command.
Proportional spacing set by ESC ! n can be reset by ESC p 0.

Character cell size — proportional width — ON/OFF

> Code: ESC P n
> Compatibility: IBM III
> Function:
Turn on/off the proportional character pitch in which each character has a different
cell width in order to unify the “white space” between characters.
> Range:
If n = odd valued numbers, proportional Mode = On. If n = even valued numbers,
proportional Mode = Of..
> Out of range:
If n does not equal the above values this command is ignored.
> Additional details:
NLQ Proportional mode has priority over other print qualities and character pitches.
Upon cancellation of Proportional mode, the printer returns to previous setting.

Command descriptions > 131

Character cell size — proportional width — ON
> Code: ESC Y
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Turn of the proportional character Cell print feature which unifies the amount of white
space surrounding each character for better overall print quality.
> Additional details:
Proportional Character Cells are available for all Print Quality modes except HSD.
Command can be activated anywhere within a print line.

Character cell size — proportional width — OFF

> Code: ESC Z
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Turn off the Proportional Character Cell print feature.
This command is ignored if the Proportional Character Cell print feature is not
activated.

Custom font — create pattern — Draft DLL — ascender

> Code: ESC % A m n1 ... n11
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Define up to 256 ascender character patterns using a 11H × 7V character matrix.
Data loaded with the following character codes cannot be printed, however. 00H to
02H, 07H to 14H, 16H to 1FH

DECIMAL HEXADECIMAL CHARACTER

COUNT

m= 0 – 255 00 – FF 256 characters

n1 – n11 = 0 – 27 00 – 7F

> Variable purpose:

m = address of defined pattern
1 – n11 = Column data, each column of data = 1 byte.
> Out of range.
Since the 8 bit of n1 – n11 is ignored, data defined as (80)H – (FF)H will be
interpreted as (00)H – (7F)H.
> Additional details:
Since Draft custom characters (DLL) are stored in RAM.

Command descriptions > 132

 Pattern data definition:
— Adjacent “dots” in the same ROW are not allowed.
— The 8th bit of n1 – n11 is ignored.
— All column data (n1 – n11) must be defined.
— The character matrix actually is 12h × 9V, but the 12th column is a fixed
blank column and can’t be defined by the user.
— The definable 11H × 7V character matrix sits inside of the 12H × 9V cell
matrix.
Example of pattern data definition... column #7
cell matrix
character matrix
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 . . . . . . . x . . . .
2 . . . . . . x . x . . .
3 . . . . . . x . x . . .
4 . . . . . . x . x . . . char.
matrix cell
5 . . . . . . x . x . . .
matrix
6 . . . . . . . x . . . .
7 . . . . . . . x . . . .
8 . . . . . . . . . . . .
9 . . . . . . . . . . . .

row data weight value

1 . 1 0
2 x 2 2
3 x 4 4
4 x 8 8
5 x 16 16
6 . 32 0
7 . 64 0
30 = pattern data for column #7

Custom font — create pattern — draft DLL — descender

> Code: ESC % D m n1...n11
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Define up to 256 descender character patterns using a 11H x 7V character matrix.
Data loaded with the following character codes cannot be printed, however. 00H to
02H, 07H to 14H, 16H to 1FH
> Range:

DECIMAL HEXADECIMAL CHARACTER

COUNT

m= 0 – 255 00 – FF 256 characters

n1 – n11 = 0 – 27 00 – 7F

> Variable Purpose:

m = address of defined pattern
n1 – n11 = column data, each column of data = 1 byte.

Command descriptions > 133

> Out of range:
Since the 8 bit of n1 – n11 is ignored, data defined as (80)H – (FF)H will be
interpreted as (00)H – (7F)H.
> Additional details:
Since Draft custom characters (DLL) are stored in RAM, they will be lost if power to
the printer is turned off.
Pattern data definition:
— Adjacent “dots” in the same ROW are not allowed.
— The 8th bit of n1 – n11 is ignored.
— All column data (n1 – n11) must be defined.
— The character matrix is actually 12h × 9V, but the 12th column is a fixed
blank column and can’t be defined by the user.
Example of pattern data definition ... column #7
cell matrix
character matrix
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 . . . . . . x . x . . .
4 . . . . . . x . x . . .
5 . . . . . . x . x . . . cell
matrix
6 . . . . . . x . x . . . char.
matrix
7 . . . . . . . x . . . .
8 . . . . . . . . . . . .
9 . . . . . . . x . . . .

row data weight value

3 x 1 1
4 x 2 2
5 x 4 4
6 x 8 8
7 . 16 0
8 . 32 0
9 . 64 0
15 = pattern data for column #7

Select font by pitch and point

> Code: ESC X Pn Lp Hp
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function: Selects a font according to the specified character pitch and point.
> Range:
Pn = 00H ~ FFH
Lp = 00H ~ FFH
Hp = 00H ~ FFH

Command descriptions > 134

> Additional details:
Pn: Specifies the proportional spacing
Pn = 0 Fixed spacing
Pn = 1 Proportional spacing
Lp Hp: Specifies a point.
Np value = (Lp + Hp x 256)
Point = Np x 0.5

NP VALUE POINT

0 ~ 43 Setting ignored

44 ~ 431 22 ~ 215

432 216

Select font by pitch and point

> Code: ESC DLE F Pn0 Pn Lp Hp
> Compatibility: IBM III/ML
> Function:
Selects a font according to the specified character pitch and point.
> Range:
Pn0 = 00H ~ FFH
Pn = 00H ~ FFH
Lp = 00H ~ FFH
Hp = 00H ~ FFH
> Additional details:
Pn0: Specifies the number of bytes of the succeeding parameter.
(Usually Pn0 = 3)
Pn: Specifies the proportional spacing
Pn = 0 Fixed spacing
Pn = 1 Proportional spacing
Lp Hp: Specifies a point.
Np value = (Lp + Hp x 256)
Point = Np x 0.5

NP VALUE POINT

0 ~ 43 Setting ignored

44 ~ 431 22 ~ 215

432 216

Command descriptions > 135

Set print quality
> Code: ESC [ d 01H 00H n
> Compatibility: IBM III
> Function:
Sets print quality.
> Range:
00H <= Ln·Hn <= FFFFH
00H <= Pn <= FFH
> Additional details:
Sets the parameter bytes after Ln·Hn by Ln·Hn.
Parameter bytes = Ln + Hn × 256(byte)
When Ln + Hn x 256 > 2, data of (Ln + Hn × 256) – 1 byte is received and discarded
after receiving Pn.
Meaning of Pn is as below:

PN MEANING

00H Invalid

01H ~ 3FH HSD

40H ~ 7FH DRAFT

80H ~ FFH NLQ

FFH Follows the

menu setting

Select font
> Code: ESC [ I Ln Hn Hfid Lfid Hfwd Lfwd fa Nul Hcp Lcp
> Compatibility: IBM III
> Function:
Sets font typeface, character pitch, spacing attributes and code page.
> Range:
Ln and Hn set the parameter bytes after Ln and Hn.
Ln, Hn = Ln + Hn × 256 (Byte)
Valid range
0H <= Ln, Hn <= FFFFH
Ln, Hn <= 01H .............................Makes this command invalid.
Ln, Hn = 02H, 03H ........................Makes fid setting valid and keeps the other
modes unchanged.
Ln, Hn <= 04H .............................Makes fid and fwd settings valid and keeps
fa mode unchanged.
Ln, Hn = 05H, 06H, 07H ................Makes fid, fwd and fa settings valid and keeps
cp unchanged.
Ln, Hn = 08H ...............................Makes all of fid, fwd, fa and cp settings valid.
Ln, Hn >= 09H .............................Makes all of fid, fwd, fa and cp settings valid,
and receives and discards parameter data
after 9 byte.
The font ID designated by Hfid and Lfid sets a font typeface.

Command descriptions > 136

Hfid, Lfid = Hfid × 256 + Lfid
Valid range
01H <= Hfid, Lfid <= FFFFH
Typeface setting is invalid if Hfid, Lfid = OOH. Setting is also invalid if font ID not
listed in the table on next page is set.

Font ID Font ID
Font Name (Target Pr) Font Name (Target Pr)
(Hfid-Lfid) (Hfid-Lfid)
011 Courier 10 036 Gothic 10
018 Courier 10 Italic 039 Gothic 10 Emphasize
046 Courier 10 Emphasize 087 Gothic 12
057 Courier 10 Emphasize Italic 109 Gothic 12 Italic
085 Courier 12 110 Gothic 12 Emphasize
092 Courier 12 Italic 157 Gothic PS
108 Courier 12 Emphasize 162 Gothic PS Italic
116 Courier 12 Emphasize Italic 174 Gothic PS
171 Courier PS 220 Gothic 15 Emphasize
172 Courier PS Italic 222 Gothic 15
184 Courier PS Emphasize 241 Gothic 10 DW DH
185 Courier PS Emphasize Italic 242 Gothic 10 DW DH Emphasize
214 Courier 15 Emphasize 243 Gothic 10 DW DH Emphasize
215 Courier 15 Italic 255 Gothic 17
216 Courier 15 Emphasize Italic 281 Gothic 20
223 Courier 15 396 Gothic 20
244 Courier 10 DW DH 397 Gothic 17
245 Courier 10 DW DH Emphasize 398 Gothic 15
246 Courier 10 DW DH 399 Gothic 12
253 Courier 17 Emphasize
254 Courier 17
454 Courier 20
491 Courier 12
492 Courier 15
493 Courier 17
491 Courier 20

Note: DW: Double Wide, DH: Double Height, PS: Proportional Spacing

Hfwd and Lfwd set character pitch (CPI).

Hfwd, Lfwd = Hfwd × 256 + Lfwd
Character pitch = Hfwd, Lfwd inch (unit: 1/1440”)
1440

Command descriptions > 137

Valid range
01HHfwd, LfwdFFFFH
The character pitch does not change if Hfwd, Lfwd = 0H.

HFWD-LFWD SET VALUE

0109H~FFFFH 10CPI DW DH

00D9H~0108H 12CPI DW

00B5H~00D8H 15CPI DW

009DH~00B4H 17CPI DW

0085H~009CH 10CPI

006DH~0084H 12CPI

005BH~006CH 15CPI

004FH~005AH 17CPI

0000H~004EH 20CPI SubScript

The fa sets the following spacing attributes.

When fid is valid, the settings of fwd and fa shall be invalid.
fa = 01H : follows the settings of fwd
fa = 02H, 03H : Makes fwd setting invalid and prints by proportional.
fa = parameters other than above : Makes fwd setting invalid.
The font ID designated by Hfid and Lfid sets a font typeface.

Command descriptions > 138

00 <= Hfid, Lfid <= 0FFFFH

Code Page ID (Hfid-Lfid) (Hex) Code Page Name OEL

1B5 USA
2E1 Greek_737
306 Baltic_774
352 Multilingual
354 East Europe Latin II-852
357 Cyrillic I-855
359 Turkey_857
35A Multilingual 858
35C Portugal
35D Icelandic-861
35E Hebrew NC (862)
35F Canada French
361 Norway
362 Cyrillic II-866
365 Greek_869
37F Kamenicky (MJK)
3F0 Greek_437
3F1 Greek_928
3F3 Greek_437 CYPRUS
3F4 Turkey
3F5 Cyrillic II-866
3F6 Polska Mozovia
3F7 ISO Latin 2
3F8 Serbo Croatic I
3F9 Serbo Croatic II
3FA ECMA-94
3FB Windows East Europe
3FC Windows Greek
3FD Latin 5 (Windows Turkey)
3FE Windows Gyrillic
400 Hungarian CWI
403 Ukrainian
404 Roman-8
405 ISO Latin 6 (8859/10)
406 Hebrew NC (862)
407 Hebrew OC
408 Windows Hebrew
409 KBL-Lithuanian
40A Windows Baltic
40B Cyrillic Latvian
410 BRASCII
411 Abicomp
430 Bulgarian
439 ISO 8859-15
43E POL1
43F Macedonian

Command descriptions > 139

Select font
> Code: ESC y n
> Compatibility: EPX Fx
> Function:
Selects HSD/SSD font or Draft font.
> Range:
When Pn = 00H, 30H, 80H, B0H, selects Draft (normal) font.
When Pn = 01H, 31H, 81H, B1H, selects HSD (high speed) font.
When Pn = 02H, 32H, 82H, B2H, selects SSD (super speed) font.
This command is only valid in Draft and HSD/SSD mode and suppressed in NLQ
mode.

Command descriptions > 140

TEXT PRINT FEATURES

Underlined — ON/OFF
> Code: ESC - n
> Compatibility: EPS FX/IBM III
> Function:
Turn on/off the underline printing feature which prints a continuous line under the
characters, spaces and punctuations of entire text.
> Range:
<Epson>
If n = 01H, 31H, 81H, B1H Underline = On.
If n = 00H, 30H, 80H, B0H Underline = Off.
<IBM>
If n = odd valued numbers, Underline = On.
If n = even valued numbers, Underline = Off.
> Out of range:
If n does not equal the above values this command is ignored.
> Additional details:
The underline is printed at the same time that the character is printed, by logically
“ORing” the 9 pin (bottom pin) with rest of the characters column data.
Underline prints under the bottom row of descenders.
The underline command does not underline graphics or any horizontal printhead
positioning commands such as HTs, Print Start Position, Indexed Print Position or
Left/Right Margins. The white space created by Indexed Print Position (ESC\) is
underlined.
Underline for Super/Subscript will be placed in the same position as for normal
characters.
This command does not initiate printing action (block change).
Space (20H) will be underlined.
Multiple underline characters (5FH) produce a continuous unbroken underline.

Overscore — ON / OFF
> Code: ESC _ n
> Compatibility: IBM III
> Function:
Turn on/off the overscore printing feature which prints a continuous line above the
characters, spaces and punctuation of entire text.
> Range:
If n = odd valued numbers, Overscore = On.
If n = even valued numbers, Overscore = Off.
> Out of range:
If n does not equal the above values this command is ignored.

Command descriptions > 141

> Additional details:
The overscore is printed at the same time that the character is printed by logically
“ORing” the # 1 pin (top pin) with the rest of the characters column data.
The overscore command does not overscore graphics or any horizontal printhead
positioning commands such as HTs, Start Position, Indexed Print Position or Left/
Right Margins.
Overscore for Super/Subscript will be placed in the same position as for normal
characters.
This command does not initiate printing action (block change).

Underline — ON
> Code: ESC C
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Turn on the underline printing feature which prints a continuous line under the
characters, spaces and punctuations of entire text.
> Additional details
The underline is printed at the same time that the character is printed, by logically
“ORing” the 9th pin (bottom pin) with rest of the characters column data.
Underline prints under the bottom row of descenders.
Underlining is not available when combined with the following modes, feature, and
characters.
— Line Graphics and the Integral sign.
— Horizontal spacing specified by following commands...
— Horizontal Tab
— Horizontal Positioning (Print Positioning etc.)
— Bit Image Graphics
Underline for Super/Subscript will be placed in the same position as for normal
characters.
This command does not initiate printing action (block change).
Space (&H20) will be underlined.
This command is equivalent to the composite command (ESC.&.n.:) where:
n4 – b2 = 1 Underlining On
n4 – b2 = 0 Underlining Off
The 5FH code can also be used to underline.
This command remains in effect until one of the following reset commands/conditions
are executed...
— Default command I-PRIME
— CAN— ESC CAN
— Power up
The underlining of double height characters will occur 2/72 inch lower than the
underlining of single height characters. Both characters, however, sit on the same
baseline.

Command descriptions > 142

Underline — OFF
> Code: ESC D
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Turn on the underline printing feature which prints a continuous line under the
characters, spaces and punctuations of entire text.

Emphasized — ON
> Code: ESC E
> Compatibility: EPS FX/IBM III
> Function:
Turn on Emphasized printing feature which logically duplicates each column of the
character data, printing the data slightly shifted to the right from the original column
data position.
> Additional details:
Emphasized mode is printed at half the normal print speed.
Emphasized printing can be selected at the same time as Enhanced printing.
This command does not initiate printing action (block change).
Emphasized printing is printed in 1 pass by logically duplicating each column of the
character’s column data and printing that data 1/2 the distance to the right of the
original positions of column #1 and #2.
original
column data
1 2 1 1’ 2 2’
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0

Emphasized print remains on until it is turned off by the ESC F command.

Graphics data can not be emphasized; this is only a text printing feature.
> Related functions:
Emphasized printing can also be selected by the ESC! n command. (Epson)

Emphasized — OFF
> Code: ESC F
> Compatibility: EPS FX/IBM III
> Function:
Turn off the Emphasized printing feature.
> Related functions:
This command also resets the Emphasized mode set by ESC ! n. (Epson)

Command descriptions > 143

Enhanced (double strike) — ON
> Code: ESC G
> Compatibility: EPS FX/IBM III
> Function:
Turns on the Enhanced printing feature which logically duplicates each column of the
character data, printing the second data slightly shifted vertically downward from the
original column data position.
> Additional details:
Enhanced printing can be selected at the same time as Emphasized printing.
This command does not initiate printing action (block change).
Enhanced printing is printed in 2 passes by printing the original line of data, then
executing a 1/144–inch LF and printing the same data again.
Enhanced print remains on until it is turned off by the ESC H command.
Graphics data cannot be enhanced; this is only a text printing feature.
> Related functions:
Enhanced printing can also be set by ESC! n command. (Epson)

Emphasized — ON
> Code: ESC T
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Turns on Emphasized printing feature which logically duplicates each column of the
character data, printing the data slightly shifted to the right from the original column
data position.
> Additional details:
Emphasized mode is printed at half the normal print speed: This command does not
initiate printing action (block change).
Emphasized printing is printed in 1 pass by logically duplicating each column of the
character’s column data and printing that data 1/2 the distance to the right of the
original position of column #1 and #2.
original
column data
1 2 1 1’ 2 2’
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0

Emphasized print remains on until it is turned off by the ESC I command.

Graphics data cannot be emphasized; this is only a text printing feature.
Emphasized printing can be combined with Custom Characters (DLL), NLQ and
Enhanced print.
See “Appendix B – Print modes/features” on page 311.

Command descriptions > 144

> Related functions:
This command is equivalent to the composite command (ESC.&.n.:)
where n2 – b3 = 1.

Enhanced — ON
> Code: ESC H
> Compatibility: ML
> Function: Turns on the Enhanced printing feature which logical duplicates each
column of the character data, printing the second data slightly shifted vertically
downward from the original row data position.
> Additional details:
This command does not initiate printing action (block change).
Enhanced printing is printed in 2 passes by printing the original line of data, then
executing a 1/144 inch LF and printing the same data again.
Enhanced print remains on until it is turned off by the ESC I command.
Enhanced data can not be enhanced; this is only a text printing feature.
Graphics printing can be combined with Custom Characters (DLL) and Emphasized
print. See “Appendix B – Print modes/features” on page 311.
> Related functions:
This command is equivalent to the composite command (ESC.&.n.:) where
n2 – b4 = 1 Set
n2 – b4 = 0 Reset

Emphasized and enhanced — OFF

> Code: ESC I
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Turns off both the Enhanced and Emphasized printing features (return to normal
printing).
> Additional details:
Enhanced and Emphasized printing will also be cancelled by the following...
— CAN
— ESC CAN
— I-PRIME Interface signal

Double wide — select

> Code: US
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Turns on the Double Wide printing feature which makes each character twice as wide
as it’s normal width.

Command descriptions > 145

> Additional details:
Double width characters are algorithmically created by doubling each column data of
the character and printing the double data to the right of the original column data.
Double width can be combined with any character pitch.
Even though the dot column spacing is the same as normal width characters, half the
number of characters per inch are produced.
> Relative functions:
This command is equivalent to the composite command (ESC.&.n.:) where
n1 – b4 = 1

Double high — select

> Code: ESC US n
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Turns on/off Double High printing feature which makes each character twice as high
as its normal height.
> Range:
ASCII DEC hex n = 1 49 31 = function “on” n = any other value = function “off”
> Out of range: Command will be ignored.
> Additional details:
Double High characters are algorithmically created by vertically doubling each dot of
the character data, and expanding the character upward.
Double High Characters are printed in 2 passes and sit on the same baseline as
normal size characters.
See “Appendix B – Print modes/features” on page 311 for details on which features
can be combined with the Double High Characters, and for the Double High Character
illustration.
This command can be used with the double width command to print double size
characters.
Double height characters can be mixed with normal height characters within the same
line.
Double High characters will have an underline position that is 2/72 inch lower than
the normal size character’s underline position.
> Related functions:
This command is equivalent to the composite command ESC.&.n where

Command descriptions > 146

 n4 – b3 = 1.
1/72 inch Single (normal) Double
High Character High Character

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1 8
2 9
3 1
4 2
5 3
baseline
6 4
7 5
8 6
single high
9 7
char.
8
underline
9
position
double high
char.
underline
position

Enhanced (double strike) — OFF

> Code: ESC H
> Compatibility: EPS FX/IBM III
> Function: Turns off the Enhanced printing feature.
> Related functions:
Enhanced mode set by ESC ! n will be reset by ESC H. (EPSON)

Double wide (expanded) — ON/OFF

> Code: ESC W n
> Compatibility: EPS FX/IBM III
> Function:
Turns on/off the Double Wide printing feature which makes each character twice as
wide as it’s normal width.
> Range:
<Epson>
If n = 01H, 31H, 81H, BAH Double Width = On.
If n = 00H, 30H, 80H, B0H Double Width = Off.
<IBM>
If n = odd valued numbers, Double Width = On.
If n = even valued numbers, Double Width = Off.
> Out of range:
If n does not equal the above values this command is ignored.

Command descriptions > 147

> Additional Details:
Double width characters are algorithmically created by doubling each column data of
the character and printing the double data to the right of the original column data.
Can be used with any character pitch.
Even though the dot column spacing is the same as normal width characters, half the
number of characters per inch are produced.
> Related functions:
This mode can also be set by the ESC ! n command. (Epson)

Double wide (expanded) — one line only — ON

> Code: SO
> Compatibility: EPS FX/IBM III
> Function:
Toggles the Double Wide printing feature on and off. After activation the command
remains in effect for the length of the print line.
> Additional details:
Double width characters are printed for the length of one line (assuming no command
was sent to turn Double Width off). The next text line will be printed with normal
width characters since Double Width automatically turns off.
If SO and ESC W1 are active, ESC W1 will take precedence.
SO can be cancelled by DC4, ESC w n, ESC ! n, LF or CR.

Double wide (expanded) — one line only — ON

> Code: ESC SO
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function:
Toggles the Double Wide printing feature on and off. After activation the command
remains in effect for the length of the print line.
> Additional details:
Double width characters are printed for the length of one line (assuming no command
was sent to turn Double Width off). The next text line will be printed with normal
width characters since Double Width automatically turns off.
If ESC SO and ESC W1 are active, ESC W1 will take precedence.
ESC SO can be cancelled by DC4, ESC w n, ESC ! n, LF or CR.

Double wide (expanded) — one line only — OFF

> Code: DC4
> Compatibility: EPS FX/IBM III
> Function:
Turns off the Double Wide printing feature which was turned on by SO or ESC SO.
> Additional details:
Does not cancel double width set by ESC W n or ESC ! n. (EPSON)

Command descriptions > 148

Double height — ON/OFF
> Code: ESC w n
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function:
Turns on/off Double Height printing feature which makes each character twice as high
as it’s normal height.
> Range:
If n = 01H, 31H, 81H, BAH Double High = On.
If n = 00H, 30H, 80H, B0H Double High = Off.
> Out of range:
If n does not equal the above values this command is ignored.
> Additional details:
Double Height characters are algorithmically created by doubling each row of the
character data and printing the new data above the original.
Double Height Characters are printed in 2 passes and sit on the same baseline as
normal size characters.
See “Appendix B – Print modes/features” on page 311 for information on which
features can be combined within Double Height feature.
1/72 inch Single (normal) Double
High Character High Character

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1 8
2 9
3 1
4 2
5 3
baseline
6 4
7 5
8 6
single high
9 7
char.
8
underline
9
position
double high
char.
underline
position

Double height and width — ON/OFF

> Code: ESC [ @ n1 n2 m1 m2 m3 m4
> Compatibility: IBM III
> Function:
Turns on/off Double High and Double Wide writing features or any combination of the
two, and selects single or double line spacing.

Command descriptions > 149

> Range:
n1 = 0 – 255 (normally n1 = 4)
n2 = 0 – 255 (normally n2 = 0)
m1 = 0 – 255
m2 = 0 – 255
m3 = decimal 0 – 255
m4 = decimal 0 – 255
> Purpose of variables:
n1 = lowbyte of total data count
n2 = highbyte of total data count
m1 = unknown (future functionality)
m2 = unknown (future functionality)
m3 = upper nibble = line spacing, low nibble = character height.
m4 = upper nibble = ignored, low nibble = character width.
> Out of range:
Invalid for command of n1 n2 = 0 – 2.
Ignored for numbers entered after m4 for specified bytes for n1 n2>4.
> Additional details:
m3 explanation table

UPPER LOWER DECIMAL FUNCTION

NIBBLE NIBBLE EQUI-
VALENT

0 0 0 No change.

0 1 1 Line feeds unchanged,

single — high character.

0 2 2 Line feeds unchanged,

double — high character.

1 0 16 Single line feeds, character

height unchanged.

1 1 17 Single line feeds, single —

high character.

1 2 18 Single line feeds, double —

high character.

2 0 32 Double line feeds,

character height
unchanged.

2 1 33 Double line feeds, single —

high character.

2 2 34 Double line feeds, double

— high character.

Command descriptions > 150

 For cases other than described above, the line feed and character height shall remain
in previous mode.
m4 explanation table

UPPER LOWER DECIMAL FUNCTION

NIBBLE NIBBLE EQUI-
VALENT

0 1 1 Single wide character.

0 2 2 Double wide character.

For cases other than described above, the character width shall remain in previous
mode.
This command is a composite command that functionally operates the same as the
singular line spacing, character height and character width commands. Both this
command and the singular commands can override each other’s selections.
> Related functions:
Line spacing — ESC A
Character Width — SO, ESC SO, DC4, ESC W.

Scripts — super/sub — select

> Code: ESC S n
> Compatibility: EPS FX/IBM III
> Function:
Select Super/Subscript size characters.
> Range:
<Epson>
If n = 01H, 31H, 81H, B1H Subscript = ON (Superscript off)
If n = 00H, 30H, 80H, B0H Superscript = ON (Subscript off)<IBM>
If n = odd valued numbers, Subscript = ON (Superscript off)
If n = even valued numbers, Superscript = ON (Subscript off)
> Out of range:
If n does not equal the above values this command is ignored.
> Related functions:
ESC T, cancel Scripts.

Command descriptions > 151

 Super/Subscripts can be printed in Draft and NLQ print quality modes as follows:

MODE SCRIPT

HSD HSD Super/Subscripts 1/2 high, full

width for all CPIs.

Draft Draft Super/Subscripts 1/2 high, full

width for all CPIs.

NLQ NLQ Courier Super/Sub scripts 1/2

Courier high, full width for all CPIs.

NLQ Same as NLQ Courier.

Sans
Serif

Super/Subscripts are algorithmically created by reading the ROM font data and
compressing the character by reading every other dot (both column and row) and
reassembling the data starting in the upper left corner of the basic (9 + 3) H × 9v cell
matrix.
1/2 high, full width = (9 + 3) H × 4V

Super/Sub Trailing
script blank
Character dot colums
cell

Normal Size Char. Cell

Normal Size Matrix Cell
Note: Figure is not to scale

See “Appendix B – Print modes/features” on page 311 for information concerning

Super/Sub script combinations with other print modes/features.

Scripts — super/sub — cancel

> Code: ESC T
> Compatibility: EPS FX/IBM III
> Function:
Cancels the Super/Subscript printing command.

Subscripts — ON
> Code: ESC L
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Select Subscript characters, or if currently printing superscript characters, return to
normal size characters.

Command descriptions > 152

> Additional details:
This command is equivalent to the composite command (ESC.&.n.:) where
n2 – b1 = 1 Set
n2 – b0 = 1 Reset
The script commands are not legal, and will be ignored when combined with the
following...
— Bit Image Graphics
— Line Graphics (B0)H – (DF)H and (F4)H, (F5)H characters.
Scripts will be printed in the Print Quality modes as follows...
HSD = HSD Super/Subscripts 1/2 high, full width for all CPIs.
Draft = Draft Super/Subscripts 1/2 high, full width for all CPIs.
NLQ Courier = NLQ Courier Super/Subscripts 1/2 high, full width for all CPIs.
NLQ Sans Serif = NLQ Sans Serif Super/Subscript 1/2 high, full width for all CPIs.
Subscripts are algorithmically created by reading the ROM font data and compressing
the character by reading every other dot (both column and row) and reassembling
the data starting in the lower left corner of the basic (9+3) H x 9V cell matrix.
— 1/2 high, full width = (9 + 3) H × 4V

Subscript Trailing
Character blank
cell dot colums

Normal Size Char. Cell

Normal Size Matrix Cell

Note: Figure is not to scale.

See “Appendix B – Print modes/features” on page 311 for information on Super/

Subscript combinations with other print modes/features.

Subscripts — OFF
> Code: ESC M
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Turns subscript “off” (returns to normal size characters).

Command descriptions > 153

Superscript — ON
> Code: ESC J
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Select Superscript characters, or if currently printing subscript characters, return to
normal size characters.
> Additional details:
This command is equivalent to the composite command (ESC.&.n.:) where
n2 – b2 = 1 Set
n2 – b0 = 1 Reset
The script commands are not legal, and will be ignored when combined with the
following...
— Bit Image Graphics
— Line Graphics B0H – DFH and F4H, F5H characters.
Scripts will be printed in the Print Quality modes as follows:
HSD = HSD Super/Subscripts 1/2 high, full width for all CPIs.
Draft = Draft Super/Subscripts 1/2 high, full width for all CPIs.
NLQ Courier = NLQ Courier Super/Subscripts 1/2 high, full width for all CPIs.
NLQ Sans Serif = NLQ Sans Serif Super/Subscripts 1/2 high, full width for all CPIs.
Super/Subscripts are algorithmically created by reading the ROM font data and
compressing the character by reading every dot (both column and row) and
reassembling the data starting in the upper left corner of the basic (9 + 3)H × 9V cell
matrix.
— 1/2 high, full width = (9 + 3)H × 4V

Superscript Trailing
Character blank
cell dot colums

Normal Size Char. Cell

Normal Size Matrix Cell

Note: Figure is not to scale.

See “Appendix B – Print modes/features” on page 311 for information on Super/

Subscript combinations with other print models/features.

Superscript — OFF
> Code: ESC K
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Turn superscripts “off” (returns to normal size characters).

Command descriptions > 154

Slant — ON
> Code: ESC % G
> Compatibility: IBM III
> Function:
Turns on the slant character feature, which reads normal text character from Font
ROM and algorithmically slants then.
> Additional details:
Slanted text characters can be printed in HSD, Draft, and NLQ print quality modes.
HSD : Slant
Draft : Slant
NLQ Courier : Slant
NLQ San Serif : Slant
Only text type characters can be slanted. Line graphics, math integral sign
(structured by 12 vertical dots) can not be slanted.
Slanted characters are created by the following algorithm:

FOR 8 DOT HIGH CHARACTERS

1st dot row shifted (1/4 dot × 7) to the right

2nd dot row shifted (1/4 dot × 6) to the right

7th dot row shifted (1/4 dot × 1) to the right

8th dot row shifted (1/4 dot × 0) to the right

upright slanted
pin
data data

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1/4 dot distance
1 0 0
2 0 0
3 0 0
4 0 0
5 0 0
6 0 0
7 0 0
8 0 0

If a slanted character is printed next to a normal upright character, the last dot
columns of the slanted character are logically “ORed” into one column.
dot columns "ORed" in one column

×
×
×
×
×
×
×

slanted normal

Command descriptions > 155

Slant — OFF
> Code: ESC % H
> Compatibility: IBM III
> Function:
Turns off the slant character feature.

Slant — ON
> Code: ESC ! /
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Turns on the Slant character feature, which reads normal text character from Font
ROM and algorithmically slants then.
> Additional details:
Slanted text characters can be printed in HSD, Draft, and NLQ print quality modes.
HSD Slant
Draft Slant
NLQ Courier Slant
NLQ San Serif Slant
Only text type characters can be slanted. Line graphics, the math integral sign can
not be slanted.
See “Appendix B – Print modes/features” on page 311 for details of the print mode in
which the Italics chars. can be printed by receiving this command.
Slanted characters are created from Draft font ROM data by the following algorithm:
dot columns "ORed" in one column

×
×
×
×
×
×
×

slanted normal

Slant — OFF
> Code: ESC ! *
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Turns off the Slant character feature, return to upright character printing.

Command descriptions > 156

GRAPHICS MODE

Bit image graphics — select density and enter graphics

> Code: ESC * m n1 n2 (graphics data)
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function: Selects the graphics density specified by m, and prints graphics data.
> Range:
n1 in conjunction with n2 specifies the total number of dot columns to be printed in
graphics.n1 = 0 – 255 (decimal number).n2 = 0 – 255 (decimal number).
m selects the graphic mode.

MODE PINS M HOR.

DESNITY
(DOTS/IN)

Single 8 0 60
density

Double 8 1 120
density

High — 8 2 120
speed
double
density*

Quadruple 8 3 240
— density*

CRT I 8 4 80

Plotter (1:1) 8 5 72

CRT II 8 6 90

Double 8 7 144
Density
Plotter

NOTE
Mode is printed in Quasi density.

> Out of range:

If m does not equal to the range of n1, n2 = 0 – 255 command is ignored.
> Additional details:
Pin numbering system.

Command descriptions > 157

8 pin graphics (1 byte/column)

PIN NO. DECIMAL

VALUE

Top Pin 1 128

2 64

3 32

4 16

5 8

6 4

7 2

Bottom Pin 8 1

The decimal value which is used for the data elements can be calculated by adding
the equivalent decimal values of the dots that need to be printed.
For example:
128 0 128
64 x
32 0 32
16 x
8 0 8
4 x
2 0 2
1 x
170

0: Can print dot; x: cannot print dot

n2 is used when you want to reserve more than 255 columns for graphics n2
represents a number of groups, each group contains 256 dots.
For example:
When n2 = 0 it selects the first group of 256 dots from 0 to 255.
When n2 = 1 it reserves the next group of 256 dots from 256 to 512 plus the number
of dots in n1.

NOTE
n2 can be calculated as follows:
n = total number of dots to be printed.
n2 = INT (n/256) and the value of n1 can be calculated as follows:
n1 = n – (n2 × 256) OR = n MOD 256

Command descriptions > 158

Bit image graphics — select 9 pin mode
> Code ESC ^ m n1 n2 (Graphics data)
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function:
Select nine pin graphics for the number of columns specified by n1 and n2.
> Range:
m is a decimal number where: m = 0 Single density graphics.
m = 1 Double density graphics.
m = 2 High-speed double density graphics
m = 3 Quadruple density graphics
n1 in conjunction with n2 specifies the total number of dot columns to be printed in
graphics.
n1 is a decimal number between 0 and 255. n2 is a decimal number between 0 and
255 (Bit7 is ignored).
> Out of range:
m > 3 ... Command is ignored.
n1, n2 ... not applicable, cannot receive value greater than 255 (FFH).
> Additional details:
Pin numbering system:
1) 9 pin graphics (2 bytes/column)
Pin Weight decimal value
Top in 1 128
2 64
3 32
4 16 byte 1
5 8
6 4
7 2
8 1
Bottom pin 9 128
64
32
16 Note: Bits 0-6 of data byte 2 are ignored.
byte 2
8
4
2
1

n2 is used when you want to reserve more than 255 columns for graphics n2
represents a number of groups, each group contains 256 dots.
For example: When 2n = 0 it selects the first group of 256 dots from 0 to 255.

Command descriptions > 159

 When n2 = 1 it reserves the next group of 256 dots from 256 to 512 plus the number
of dots in n1. And so on until n = 7 which reserves up to 1792 dots plus whatever is
on n1.

NOTE
n2 can be calculated as follows:
n = total number of dots to be printed.
n2 = INT (n/256) and the value of n1 can be calculated as follows:
n1 = n – (n2 × 256) OR = n MOD 256

Used for graphics intensive applications such as screen dumps.

Each print pattern requires two bytes of data instead of one, as in 8 pin graphics.
For example: To print 70 columns of data 140 bytes must be sent.

Bit image graphics — reassign graphic’s density commands

> Code: ESC ? m n
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function:
Reassign one of the graphic density command to another graphic density command.
> Range:
“m” represents one of the following four graphic modes:
K Single Density
L Low Speed Double Density
Y High Speed Double Density
Z Quadruple Density.
n is decimal value 0–7.
0 60 dpi
1 120 dpi
2 120 dpi (Quasi density)
3 240 dpi (Quasi density)
4 80 dpi
5 72 dpi
6 90 dpi
7 144 dpi
> Out of range:
If n does not = a value which is specified in the above table, “ESC ? m n” is ignored
and data is not printed as Graphics data.

Bit image graphics — single horizontal density

> Code: ESC K n1 n2 (graphical data)
> Compatibility: EPS FX/IBM III
> Function:
Selects normal speed single density graphics (60 DPI horizontal) for the number of
columns specified by n1 and n2.
> Range:
n1 in conjunction with n2 specifies the total number of dot columns to be printed in
graphics.
Range n1, n2 = 0 – 255.

Command descriptions > 160

 Number of dot/line:

MODEL DOTS/ N1 N2
LINE

ML5720 480 224 1

ML5721 816 48 3

> Out of range:

Not applicable; cannot receive value greater than 255 (FFH).
> Additional details:
n2 is used when you want to reserve more than 255 columns for graphics n2
represents a number of groups, each group contains 256 dots.
For example:
When n2 = 0 it selects the first group of 256 dots from 0 to 255.
When n2 = 1 it reserves the next group of 256 dots from 256 to 512 plus the
number of dots in n1.

NOTE
n2 can be calculated as follows:
n = total number of dots to be printed.
n2 = INT (n/256) and the value of n1 can be calculated as follows:
n1 = n – (n2 × 256) OR = n MOD 256

Low speed single density graphics prints at a density of 60 dots/inch.

Example of Dots spacing:
MSB
bit 7 1
bit 6 2

bit 1 7
bit 0
8
LSB 1/72 inch
1/60 inch

> Related functions:

This command is equivalent to the 8 pin graphic mode command specified by
ESC * “0” n1 n2. (EPSON)

Bit image graphics — double horizontal density — normal speed

> Code: ESC L n1 n2 (graphics data)
> Compatibility: EPS FX/IBM III
> Function:
Selects normal speed double density graphics (120 DPI horizontal) for the number of
columns specified by n1 and n2.
> Range:
n1 in conjunction with n2 specifies the total number of dot columns to be printed in
graphics.

Command descriptions > 161

 Range n1, n2 = 0 – 255.
Number of dot/line.

MODEL DOTS/ N1 N2
LINE

ML5720 960 192 3

ML5721 1632 96 6

> Out of range:

Not applicable; cannot receive value greater than 255 (FFH).
> Additional details:
n2 is used when you want to reserve more than 255 columns for graphics n2
represents a number of groups, each group contains 256 dots.
For example:
When n2 = 0 it selects the first group of 256 dots from 0 to 255.
When n2 = 1 it reserves the next group of 256 dots from 256 to 512 plus the number
of dots in n1.

NOTE
n2 can be calculated as follows:
n = total number of dots to be printed.
n2 = INT (n/256) and the value of n1 can be calculated as follows:
n1 = n – (n2 × 256) OR = n MOD 256

Low speed double density graphics prints at a density of 120 dots/inch.• Dot spacing
example.
Dot spacing example.
Example of Dots spacing:
MSB
bit 7 1
bit 6 2

bit 1 7
bit 0
8
LSB 1/72 inch
1/60 inch

> Related functions:

This command is equivalent to the 8 pin graphic mode command specified by
ESC * “1” n1 n2. (EPSON)

Command descriptions > 162

Bit image graphics — double horz. density — high speed
> Code: ESC Y n1 n2 (graphic data)
> Compatibility: EPS FX/IBM III
> Function:
Selects high speed double density graphics (120 DPI Horizontal) for the number of
columns specified by n1 and n2.
> Range:
n1 in conjunction with n2 specifies the total number of dot columns to be printed in
graphics.
Range n1, n2 = 0 – 255.
Number of dots/line:

MODEL DOTS/ N1 N2
LINE

ML5720 960 192 6

ML5721 1632 96 6

> Out of range:

Not applicable; cannot receive value greater than 255 (FFH).
> Additional details:
n2 is used when you want to reserve more than 255 columns for graphics n2
represents a number of groups, each group contains 256 dots.
For example:
When n2 = 0 it selects the first group of 256 dots from 0 to 255.
When n2 = 1 it reserves the next group of 256 dots from 256 to 512 plus the number
of dots in n1.

NOTE
n2 can be calculated as follows:
n = total number of dots to be printed.
n2 = INT (n/256) and the value of n1 can be calculated as follows:
n1 = n – (n2 × 256) OR = n MOD 256

High speed double density prints at a density of 120 dots per inch.
This is the same density as low speed double density graphics, but the printer cannot
place two adjacent dots in the same row (quasi-density).
Example of Dot spacing:
HEAD PIN
MSB
bit 7 1
bit 6 2

bit 1 7
bit 0
8
LSB 1/72 inch
1/120 inch

Command descriptions > 163

> Related functions:
This command is equivalent to the 8 pin graphic mode command specified by
ESC * “2” n1 n2. (EPSON)

Bit image graphics — quadruple horizontal density

> Code: ESC Z n1 n2 (graphics data)
> Compatibility: EPS FX/IBM III
> Function:
Selects normal Speed Quadruple density graphics (240 DPI Horizontal) for the
number of columns specified by n1 and n2.
> Range:
n1 in conjunction with n2 specifies the total number of dot columns to be printed in
graphics.
Range n1, n2 = 0 – 255.

MODEL DOTS/ N1 N2
LINE

ML5720 1920 128 7

ML5721 3264 192 12

> Out of range:

Not applicable; cannot receive value greater than 255 (FFH).
> Additional details:
n2 is used when you want to reserve more than 255 columns for graphics n2
represents a number of groups, each group contains 256 dots.
For example:
When n2 = 0 it selects the first group of 256 dots from 0 to 255.
When n2 = 1 it reserves the next group of 256 dots from 256 to 512 plus the number
of dots in n1.

NOTE
n2 can be calculated as follows:
n = total number of dots to be printed.
n2 = INT (n/256) and the value of n1 can be calculated as follows:
n1 = n – (n2 × 256) OR = n MOD 256

Quadruple density graphics prints at a density of 240 dots per inch (Quasi-density).

Command descriptions > 164

 Example of Dot Spacing:
HEAD PIN
MSB
bit 7 1
bit 6
2

bit 1 7
bit 0
8
LSB 1/72 inch

1/240 inch

> Related functions:

This command is equivalent to the 8 pin graphic mode command specified by
ESC * “3” n1 n2. (EPSON)

Bit image graphics — enter

> Code: ETX
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Enter bit image graphics.
> Additional details:
Pin / Data numbering system.

P-HEAD EQUIV- 8 BIT 7 BIT

PIN ALENT MODE MODE
NO. DEC.
VALUE

Top Pin 1 1 1 1
(LSB)
2 2 2 2

3 4 4 4

4 8 8 8

5 16 16 16

6 32 32 32

7 64 64 64

8 128 128 x

Bottom 9 x x x
Pin
(MSB)

x: Cannot use.
Since 03H is used as an initiator for commands executed while in the bit image
graphics mode, in order to print graphics data represented by 03H, two 03H must be
sent to the printer.
For example... In the “d” above, in order to print the 03H as one column of graphic
data, send 03H, 03H.

Command descriptions > 165

 The decimal value which is used for the data elements can be calculated by adding
the equivalent decimal values of the dots that need to be printed.
For example (8 bit mode)
1 0 1
2 0 2
4 x
8 x
16 x
32 x
64 x
128 x x

0: Can print dot; x: cannot print dot

The explanation of the dot density transitions from text, to graphics, back to text is
as follows ...

TEXT DOT DENSITY RESULTANT UPON RETURNING BACK

BEFORE ENTERING PRIMARY TO TEXT
GRAPHICS DOT
DENSITY

CPI DPI DPI CPI DPI

10 120 60 10 120

12 144 72 12 144

15 180 60 15 180

17.1 206 60 17.1 206

20 240 60 20 240

> Related functions:

Composite command “ESC * n:”

Bit image graphics — exit

> Code: ETX STX
> Compatibility: ML
> Function: Exit bit image graphics (return to text mode).
> Additional details:
Any Print Quality modes and Print Features that were active before entering Bit Image
Graphics will be reactivated upon exiting Bit Image Graphics.

Bit image graphics — true single horizontal density — ESC P

> Code: ESC P
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Selects true single density graphics based on the text dot density which was
previously set.

Command descriptions > 166

> Additional details:
Dot Density explanation ...

TEXT DOT DENSITY RESULTANT

BEFORE ENTERING GRAPHICS
GRAPHICS DOT
DENSITY

CPI DPI DPI

10 120 60 (adjacent
dots allowed)

12 144 72

15 180 60

17.1 206 60

20 240 60

Example of Dot spacing

LSB
bit 0 1
bit 1 2

bit 6 7
bit 7
8
MSB 1/72 inch
1/60 inch
or
1/72 inch

This command must be sent prior to entering graphics mode.

Single Density prints at what is labeled as “full” speed and is used as a reference to
explain all the other graphics print speeds.
> Related functions:
Composite command “ESC * n1 :”sa

Bit image graphics — true single horz density — ESC Q

> Code: ESC Q
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Selects true single density graphics based on the text dot density which was
previously set.

Command descriptions > 167

> Additional details:
Dot Density explanation ...

TEXT DOT DENSITY RESULTANT

BEFORE ENTERING GRAPHICS
GRAPHICS DOT
DENSITY

CPI DPI DPI

10 120 60 (adjacent
dots allowed)

12 144 72

15 180 60

17.1 206 60

20 240 60

Example of Dot Spacing:

LSB
bit 0 1
bit 1 2

bit 6 7
bit 7
8
MSB 1/72 inch
1/60 inch
or
1/72 inch

This command must be sent prior to entering graphics mode.

Single Density prints at what is labeled as “full” speed and is used as a reference to
explain all the other graphics print speeds.
> Related functions:
Composite command “ESC * n1 :”

Bit image graphics — true double horz. density

> Code: ESC R
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Selects true single density graphics based on the text dot density which was
previously set.

Command descriptions > 168

> Additional details:
Dot Density explanation ...

TEXT DOT DENSITY RESULTANT

BEFORE ENTERING GRAPHICS
GRAPHICS DOT
DENSITY

CPI DPI DPI

10 120 120

12 144 144

15 180 120

17.1 206 120

20 240 120

Example of Dot Spacing:

HEAD PIN
LSB
bit 0 1
bit 1 2

bit 6 7
bit 7
8
MSB 1/72 inch
1/120 inch
or
1/144 inch

Adjacent dots will not be printed when double speed is specified (ESC* n1 :).
This command must be sent prior to entering graphics mode.
Double Density prints at half the speed of Single density.
Refer to the illustration on page 172.
> Related functions:
Composite command “ESC* n1 :”

Bit image graphics — double speed quasi quadruple horz. density

> Code: ESC # Q
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Selects double speed, quadruple density graphics based on the text dot density which
was previously set.

Command descriptions > 169

> Additional details:
Dot Density explanation ... Text Dot Density

TEXT DOT DENSITY RESULTANT

GRAPHICS DOT
DENSITY

CPI DPI DPI

10 120 240
(adjacent dots on
the same row
allowed)

12 144 288
(adjacent dots on
the same row
allowed)

15 180 240

17.1 206 240

20 240 240

Dot Spacing example

HEAD PIN
LSB
bit 0 1
bit 1
2

bit 6 7
bit 7
8
MSB 1/72 inch

1/240 inch
or
1/288 inch

This command must be sent prior to entering graphics mode.

Quadruple density will print at half the speed of Single density.
Refer to the illustration on page 172.
> Related functions:
Composite command “ESC* n1 :”

Bit image graphics — execute LF WI CR — text amount

> Code: ETX LF
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Initiate printing action; print data in the print buffer by causing a print block change
and execute a pre-defined text amount line feed then execute a carriage return.

Command descriptions > 170

> Additional details:
The distance of the pre-defined text line feed is as follows...
if in 6 LPI, the text LF = 24/144 inch
if in 8 LPI, the text LF = 18/144 inch

Bit image graphics — execute LW W/O CR — text amount

> Code: ETX DC2
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Initiate printing action; print data in the print buffer by causing a print block change
and execute a pre-defined text amount line feed, but do not execute a carriage
return.
> Additional details:
The distance of the pre-defined text line feed is as follows...
if in 6 LPI, the text LF = 24/144 inch
if in 8 LPI, the text LF = 18/144 inch

Bit Image graphics — execute LF with CR — graphics amount

> Code: ETX SO
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
> Initiate printing action; print data in the print buffer by causing a print block change
and execute a graphics line feed (so that consecutive graphic print lines touch each
other) then execute a carriage return.
> Additional details:
The distance of the graphic line feed is as follows...
if in 7 bit graphics mode, the graphic LF = 14/144 inch
if in 8 bit graphics mode, the graphic LF = 16/144 inch

Bit image graphics — execute LF W/O CR — graphics amount

> Code: ETX DC4
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Initiate printing action; print data in the print buffer by causing a print block change
and execute a graphics line feed (so that consecutive graphic print lines touch each
other) but do not execute a carriage return.
> Additional details:
The distance of the graphic line feed is as follows...
if in 7 bit graphics mode, the graphic LF = 14/144 inch
if in 8 bit graphics mode, the graphic LF = 16/144 inch
Because there is no CR executed, the second print line’s horizontal starting position
will be where the first print line ended.

Command descriptions > 171

Bit image illustration

BIT IMAGE — DOT DENSITY

Double speed Double speed
Single Double double density quad density

1/144 inch

D D/2 D/2 D/4

1/60 inch DOT 1/120 inch DOT 1/120 inch DOT 1/240 inch DOT

(No adjacent dots allowed)

D = 1/60 inch

Command descriptions > 172

COMPOSITE COMMANDS

Composite command — select print features and pitch

> Code: ESC ! n
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function:
Select print feature and CPI according to binary value of “n”
> Range:
Range n = 0 – 255.
The value of “n” is composed by selecting a feature or CPI, each of which represents
1 bit of “n”.
> Out of range:
Not applicable; cannot define a value less than 0 or greater than 255 (FFH).
> Additional details:
The features/CPI selectable by this command are the same as the features/CPI that
are selected by individual commands.
Any feature/CPI select or reset by this function will override the same feature/CPI
selected by individual command. The opposite is also true. If a feature/CPI was
originally selected by this composite command, but then reset by an individual
command, the feature will not turn off.
Any invalid combination of features will be set according to the printer’s priority
tables. (See “Appendix B – Print modes/features” on page 311).
The selectable modes are shown as follows:
n = an 8 bit binary number, each bit having the following definition.

BIT 1 0

b7 Set underline Reset underline

b6 Set Italics Reset Italics

b5 Set Double Reset Double

Width width

b4 Set Enhanced Reset Enhanced

b3 Set Emphasized Reset

Emphasized

b2 Set Reset
Compressed Compressed

b1 Set Proportional Reset

Proportional

b0 Set 12 CPI Set 10 CPI

Select print modes and features

> Code: ESC & n1 n2 n3 n4 :
> Compatibility: ML
> Select Print Quality modes, Print Pitch with one command.

Command descriptions > 173

> Function:
n1 – n4 are defined by calculating the decimal, or hexadecimal equivalent of the
binary number which is defined as follows:

N/ B7 B6 B5 B4 B2 B2 B1 B0
BIT

n1 x 0 1 Double 20 CPI 17.1 CPI 12 CPI 10 CPI

width (See (See
note) note)

n2 x 1 0 Enhance Empha- Super- Sub- No

-ment size Script Script Scripts

n3 x 1 1 0 Slant DLL NLQ P- Normal

mode Qual. P- Qual.

n3 x 1 1 1 Double Underlin x H.S.D.P

Height e - Qual

NOTE
1. Any bits defined as literal 0 or 1 should be set as indicated in the above
table. These bits identify which “n” is being defined.
2. “x” means” it can be either 0 or 1.
3. When both b1 (12 CPI) and b2 (17.1 CPI) are specified for n1, the 15 CPI
print mode is selected.

> Out of range:

If either n2, n3 or n4 is invalid, the command is terminated, but the mode/features
related to all previous “n” s will be set. In the case where n1 is invalid, the command
is terminated and no modes/features will be set. See examples of invalid usage, given
below.
> Additional details:
Order does not matter when n1 – n4 are defined. Any order is valid because b5 and
b6 identify each variable “nx”.
The quantity of “n” s being defined also does not matter (up to a maximum of 4). All
four “n”s or any number of “n”s less than four may be defined.
Example of valid uses of this command:
ESC & n4 :
ESC & n3 n2 :
ESC & n2 n4 n3 :
ESC & n1 n3 n2 n4 :
The functions selected by this command are the same as the function that are
selected by individual commands.
Any function selected or reset by this function will override the same function selected
by the individual command. The opposite is also true. If a function was originally
selected by this composite command, but then reset by an individual command, the
function will be “off”.
Any invalid combination of functions will be set according to the printer’s priority
tables. (See “Appendix B – Print modes/features” on page 311.)

Command descriptions > 174

 Command equivalent table:

N/ B7 B6 B5 B4 B2 B2 B1 B0
BIT

n1 - 0 1 US ESC#3 GS (See FS (See RS

note) note)

n2 - 1 0 ESC H ESC T ESC J ESC L ESC K

ESC M
(See
note)

n3 - 1 1 0 ESC!/ ESC 2 ESC 1 ESC 0

n3 - 1 1 1 ESC US ESC C - ESC #0

NOTE
When both b1 (FS) and b2 (GS) are specified for n1, this code achieves a
function equivalent to the ESC g code. b0 of n2 cancels both super/subscript.

If less than 4 “n”s are defined, the priorities of the table above are still followed. In
the event that the same “n” is repeated twice, the last value will have precedence.
Each bit on n1 – n4 shall be processed in order from b0 to b7 as if individual
commands were input.
For example:
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
n1 (37H) / 0 1 1 0 0 1 1

For the above setting, 12 CPI magnifying mode shall be defined as if the same result
of RS, FS and US were input.
Usage Examples ... KEY: “×” = invalid value

DATA STREAM RESULT

× The command is invalid and “:” is

ESC & n1 interpreted as a normal data

× n1’s modes/features are set, and

ESC & n1 n2 n3 : the data after n3 (in this case just
“:”) is interpreted as normal data.

ESC & n1 n1 n1 : the last n1’s modes/ features are

set

ESC & n4 n3 n2 n1 : all modes/features are set

× If the terminator is not “:”, n1, n2,

ESC & n1 n2 n3 n4 z1 z2 n3, n4 are valid, the composite
command is terminated, z1 is
discarded and z2 is processed as
normal data.

× n2, n3 and the last n1, are valid,

ESC & n1 n1’ n2 n3 n4 the command is terminated and n4
is discarded.

Command descriptions > 175

Bit image graphics modes and features
> Code: ESC * n :
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Select Bit Image Graphics density and word size with one command.
> Range:
n1 – n2 are defined by calculating the decimal or hexadecimal equivalent of the binary
number which is defined as follows...

N/ B7 B6 B5 B4 B2 B2 B1 B0
BIT

n1 x 1 1 Quad. Double Single 72 DPI 60 DPI

density density density

n2 x 1 0 8 bit Double x x x
speed

NOTE
1. Any bits defined as a literal 0 or 1 should be set as indicated in the above
table. These bits identify which “n” is being defined.
2. “×” means it can be either 0 or 1.

> Out of range:

If n2, is invalid, the command is terminated, but the functions defined in n1 remain
valid. In the case where n1 is invalid, the command is terminated and no functions
are valid. Refer to “Additional Details:” for examples of invalid usage.
> Additional details:
Order does not matter when n1 – n2 are defined. Any order is valid because b5 and
b6 identify each variable “n×.”
The quantity of “n”s being defined also does not matter. Either 1 or 2 “n”s may be
defined.
Example of valid uses of this command:
ESC * n2 :
ESC * n1 :
ESC * n2 n1 :
ESC * n1 n2 *
The functions selected by this command are the same as the function that are
selected by individual commands.
Any function selected or reset by this function will override the same function selected
by the individual command. The opposite is also true. If a function was originally
selected by this composite command, but then reset by an individual command, the
function will be “off”.
Any invalid combination of functions will be set according to the printer’s priority
tables. (See “Appendix B – Print modes/features” on page 311.)

Command descriptions > 176

 Each bit of n1 and n2 are processed in order from b0 to b7.
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
n1 (7FH) - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

In the case of the setting above, quadruple density of 72 DPI mode shall be defined.
If less than 2 “n” are defined, the priorities in the table above is still followed. In the
event that the same “n” is repeated, the last value will have precedence.
Usage Examples... KEY:“×” = invalid value

DATA STREAM RESULT

× The command is invalid, n2 is

ESC * n1 n2: ignored and “:” is processed as a
normal data.

× n is valid, n2 terminates the

ESC * n1 n2: command sequence and “:”is
processed as a normal data.

ESC * n1 n2 z1 z2: If the terminator is not “:”, n1, n2,

are valid, the composite command
is terminated, z1 is discarded and
z2 is processed as a normal data.

× The last n1 becomes valid, n2

ESC * n1 n1 n2: terminates the command and is
discarded, and “:” is processed as
a normal data.

This command must be defined before entering Bit Image Graphics.•

If Double (n1 – b3) or Quadruple (n1 – b4) density is defined, Double Speed
(n2 – b3) is selectable.
— Normal speed
Single Density
Double Density
— Double Speed
Double density (no consecutive dots allowed)
Quadruple density (no consecutive dots allowed)

Carriage return and line feed control

> Code: ESC ? n :
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Execute carriage return and line feed operation with one command.
> Range:
n1 is defined by calculating the decimal, or hexadecimal equivalent of the binary
number which is defined as follows...

N/ B7 B6 B5 B4 B2 B2 B1 B0
BIT

n1 x 0 1 Reverse 0 x Forward CR
LF LF

Command descriptions > 177

 NOTE
1. Any bits defined as a literal 0 or 1 should be set as indicated in the above
table. These bits identify which “n” is being defined.
2. “×” can be either 0 or 1.

> Out of range:

Command is ignored.
> Additional details:
The functions selected by this command are the same as the function that are
selected by individual commands.
Any function selected or reset by this function will override the same function selected
by the individual command. The opposite is also true. If a function was originally
selected by this composite command, but then reset by an individual command, the
function will be “off.”
Any invalid combination of functions will be set according to the printer’s priority
tables. (See “Appendix B – Print modes/features” on page 311.)
Command equivalent table:

N/ B7 B6 B5 B4 B2 B2 B1 B0
BIT

n1 - 0 1 ESC LF - - LF CR

b0(CR) and b1 (FOW LF) can be selected simultaneously, however b4 (rev LF) and b1
(FWD LF) cannot be selected simultaneously.
The command scanning sequence is b0 to b7. The last valid bit (command) will have
precedence in the event of conflict.
Usage Examples...

DATA STREAM RESULT

× If a column (:) following n is

ESC ? n : omitted, the mode specified by n
will be valid and the next data will
be discarded.

× If the terminator is not “:”, n is

ESC ? n z1 z2 valid the composite command is
terminated, and z1 is discarded
and z2 is processed as normal
data.

Command descriptions > 178

GENERAL CONTROL

Reset — clear print buffer

> Code: CAN
> Compatibility: EPS FX/IBM III
> Function:
Clear all printable data in the print buffer.
> Additional details:
This code does not clear or affect the control codes which are resident in the receive
buffer. (Epson).
This command clears the expanded character mode (double width printer character
selected by SO code. (IBM)
Functions such as BS, HT, VT etc. (Head positioning commands) are not clear since
this command only works on printable data.
Menu-set “Reset Inhibit” has effect on this command as follows.

MENU SETTING COMMAND

Reset Yes Invalid

Inhibit
No Valid

Reset — clear buffer and initialize printer

> Code: ESC @
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function:
Initialize the printer features/modes and clear the print buffer.

Command descriptions > 179

> Additional details:
List of Items Reset:
(i) Communication interface signals are reset and printer is set on-line.
(ii) Print Buffer is cleared.
(iii) Left Margin = clear (left-most print position).
(iv) Right Margin = clear (right-most print position).
ML5721: current menu mode
(v) Horizontal tabs = every 8 characters.
(vi) Vertical Tabs = all tabs in each channel are cleared and tap channel 0 is
selected.
(vii) Line spacing = current setting in MENU mode.
(viii) Page length = current menu value.
(ix) Skip Over Perforation = current menu value.
(x) TOF = current line.
(xi) DLL = off (ROM characters selected).
(xii) Print Quality = current menu value.
(xiii) Typestyle = current menu value.
(xiv) Character Set = current menu value.
(xv) All other features = current menu setting, or if they do not appear in
menu, they are “off”.

MSB control — set MSB equal to 1

> Code: ESC >
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function:
Set the Bit 7 of data to 1, regardless of the value of receiving data.
> Additional details:
This code limits the range of received data from 80H to FFH.

MSB control — set MSB equal to 0

> Code: ESC =
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function:
Set the bit 7 of data to 0.
> Additional details:
This code limits the range of received data from 00H to 7FH.

Command descriptions > 180

MSB control — cancel MSB control
> Code: ESC #
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function:
Cancel MSB control; interpret the received data literally.
> Additional details:
The printer accepts the eight bit “as is” from the computer. (8 bit mode)
> Related function:
ESC > , set MSB = 1
ESC = , set MSB = 0

Print suppress — ON
> Code: DC3
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function:
Deselects the printer and sets the printer in a state that will not allow the printer to
receive any data except DC1.
> Additional details:
The printer cannot be re-selected by using the SEL button.
In print suppress mode, SEL indicator will flash when the printer is selected. When
the printer is deselected, SEL indicator will remain off.
> Related function:
DC1, Print Supress-off.

Print suppress — ON
> Code: ESC Q ETX
> Compatibility: IBM III
> Function:
Deselects the printer and sets the printer in a state that will not allow the printer to
receive any data except DC1.
> Additional details:
The printer can be re-selected by using the SEL button.
SEL indicator will flash while in print suppress mode.

Print suppress — ON
> Code: ESC Q SYN
> Compatibility: IBM III
> Function:
Deselects the printer and sets the printer in a state that will not allow the printer to
receive any data except DC1.
> Additional details:
The printer can be re-selected by using the select button.

Command descriptions > 181

 SEL indicator will flash while in print suppress mode.

Print suppress — OFF

> Code: DC1
> Compatibility: EPS FX/IBM III
> Function:
Re-selects the printer and set the printer to its normal mode where in all data can be
received
> Additional details:
The printer processes all the data sent to it.

Print speed — half — ON/OFF

> Code: ESC s n
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function:
Turns on/off the mode where printing is executed at 50% of normal speed depending
on value of n.
> Range:
Range n = 01H, 31H, 81H Half-speed printing = On.
Range n = 00H, 30H, 80H, or B0H Full speed printing = Off.
> Out of range
This command will be ignored if n equals any other values except for the values
mentioned above.
> Additional details:
Half speed mode is used to reduce printer noise.
If the print speed is slower than the printer’s physical lower speed, the half speed
command is ignored and data is printed at that lowest speed.
Items not cleared...
— Custom characters (DLL) are not cleared.

Cancel
> Code: CAN
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Cancels data within the same line before the entry of this code as, and after, that for
which printing is initiated.

Command descriptions > 182

Sets the following modes in response to the entry of this code:

NO. ITEM INITIALIZED INITIALIZED CONDITION

1. Character Pitch Conforms to a menu-set value.

2. Linefeed Pitch Conforms to a menu-set value.

3. Horizontal Tab Unaffected.

4. VFU Unaffected.

5. Character Modification
Horizontal Expansion Conforms to a menu-set value.
Vertical Expansion Conforms to a menu-set value
Underline Cancelled.
Horizontal Enhancement Cancelled.
Vertical Enhancement (Double Cancelled.
Strike)
Super/Sub Script Cancelled.
Italics Conforms to a menu-set value.

6. Uni-directional Printing Setting

Character Printed bi-directionally.
Bit Image Graphics Conforms to a menu-set value.

7. Half-speed Printing Cancelled.

8. Clearance between Characters Cancelled.

9. Graphics Mode Switched to a single density setting.

10. CG
Font Conforms to a menu-set value.
ROM/RAM Set to ROM.
Character Table Conforms to a menu-set value.
Code Page Setting Conforms to a menu-set value.
International Character Set Conforms to a menu-set value.
Zero Font Conforms to a menu-set value.

11. NLQ Font Unaffected.

12. Left Margin Unaffected.

13. Right Margin Unaffected.

14. Paper Position Unaffected.

15. Print Position Unaffected.

16. Page Length (Front/Rear) Unaffected.

17. Perforation Skip (Front/Rear) Unaffected.

18. Paper End Detection Enabling/ Unaffected.

Disabling

19. Print Suppression Enabling/ Unaffected.

Disabling

20. Impact Mode Conforms to a menu-set value.

21. Emulation Mode Unaffected.

22. Barcode Takes on the default specification.

23. SI/SO Set to SI.

Command descriptions > 183

Printer initialization
> Code: ESC CAN
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Prints any data stored in the print buffer and brings the system to a state of power-on.
Retains data in the receive buffer, resumes operation automatically after the
execution of initialization setting by this command, and processes the data without
losing it. Menu-set “Reset Inhibit” has effect on this command as follows:

MENU SETTING COMMAND

Reset Yes Invalid (received

Inhibit and discarded)

No Valid

On receiving this command, the current menu setting takes effect.

> Additional details:
The entry of this code sets the following modes:

NO. ITEM INITIALIZED INITIALIZED CONDITION

1. Character Pitch Conforms to a menu-set value.

2. Linefeed Pitch Conforms to a menu-set value.

3. Horizontal Tab Takes on its default (8 characters)

4. VFU Cancelled

5. Character Modification
Horizontal Expansion Conforms to a menu-set value.
Vertical Expansion Conforms to a menu-set value
Underline Cancelled.
Horizontal Enhancement Cancelled.
Vertical Enhancement (Double Cancelled.
Strike)
Super/Sub Script Cancelled.
Italics Conforms to a menu-set value.

6. Uni-directional Printing Setting

Character Printed bi-directionally.
Bit Image Graphics Conforms to a menu-set value.

7. Half-speed Printing Cancelled.

8. Clearance between Characters Cancelled.

9. Graphics Mode Switched to a single density setting.

10. CG
Font Conforms to a menu-set value.
ROM/RAM Set to ROM.
Character Table Conforms to a menu-set value.
Code Page Setting Conforms to a menu-set value.
International Character Set Conforms to a menu-set value.
Zero Font Conforms to a menu-set value.

11. NLQ Font Conforms to a menu-set value.

12. Left Margin Takes on its default (home

position).

13. Right Margin Conforms to a menu-set value.

Command descriptions > 184

 NO. ITEM INITIALIZED INITIALIZED CONDITION

14. Paper Position Set to the TOF position.

15. Print Position Set to the left margin.

16. Page Length (Front/Rear) Conforms to a menu-set value.

17. Perforation Skip (Front/Rear) Conforms to a menu-set value.

18. Paper End Detection Enabling/ Conforms to a menu-set value.

Disabling

19. Print Suppression Enabling/ Conforms to a menu-set value.

Disabling

20. Impact Mode Conforms to a menu-set value.

21. Emulation Mode Unaffected.

22. Barcode Takes on the default specification.

23. SI/SO Set to SI.

Print suppress — ON
> Code: DC3
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
> Activate the print suppress mode in which all data is ignored. (except DC1)
> Additional details:
The SEL indicator will blink to indicate that this function was activated.
All interface signal lines will operate normally.
If this function is indicated in MENU as not effective, then this command will be
ignored.

Print suppress — OFF

> Code: DC1
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Deactivate the print suppress mode and accept all data.
> Additional details:
This function CANNOT be deactivated by pressing the SEL button.
If the printer is not set to “print suppress mode effective”, this function code is
ignored.

Print speed — half

> Code: ESC <
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Turn on the mode where printing is executed at 50% of normal speed.

Command descriptions > 185

> Additional details:
Half speed mode is used to reduce printer noise.
If the print speed is slower than the printer’s physical lower speed, the half speed
command is ignored and data is printed at that lowest speed.

Print speed — full

> Code: ESC >
> Compatibility: ML
> Function:
Turn off the mode where printing is executed at 50% of normal speed; return to
normal (full) speed printing.
> Additional details:
Full speed mode when throughput is more important than noise.

Stop Print
> Code: ESC j
> Compatibility: IBM III
> Function:
Execution of this code puts the printer in DESEL mode. (SEL indicator turns off.)
> Additional details:
The DESEL mode is selected by pressing the SEL button or loading paper (when the
“Auto Select” feature is set to “Yes” in MENU mode).
Prints out data in the printer receiving buffer received prior to the ESC j code.

Emulation mode switching

> Code: ESC { n
> Compatibility: EPS FX/IBM III/ML
> Function: Emulation mode is switched.
> Range:
n = 00H, 02H ... Proprinter mode is selected.
n = 40H, 41H ... EPSON mode is selected.
n = 20H, 21H ... ML mode is selected.
> Out of range:
This command is invalid if any value out of the above mentioned range is specified,
and the previously set emulation is effective.
> Additional details:
Printing is started by this command.
The printer is set to the default state.
This command has no effect on the MENU items.
The DLL data is set into the default state except when the same emulation as the
current one is set.

Command descriptions > 186

Printer initialization
> Code: ESC } NUL
> Compatibility: EPS FX/IBM III/ML
> Function:
Printer is initialized, with the print buffer cleared.
> Additional details:
Initializing items
1. Print buffer clear
2. Left margin = Default
3. Right margin = Default
4. Horizontal tab = Default (for each 8 character)
5. Vertical tab = Default
6. VFU = Default
VFU channel = Channel 0
7. Line feed pitch = Determined by menu
8. Page length = Determined by menu
9. Perforation skip = Determined by menu
10. Form position = TOF
11. FOM/RAM = ROM
12. Print Quality = Determined by menu
13. Character set = Determined by menu
14. Emulation mode = Determined by menu

With CSF mounted, the form ejecting operation takes place regardless of form
suction.

Set initial condition

> Code: ESC [ K Ln Hn Init Id Parm 1 Parm 2
> Compatibility: IBM III
> Function:
Sets the initial state of printer.
> Range:
Ln, Hn specify the number of subsequent parameter bytes.
00H <= Ln <= FFH
00H <= Hn <= FFH
The number of subsequent parameter bytes shall be Ln + (Hn × 256) bytes.
When Ln = Hn = 00H is specified, the code between ESC and Hn is discarded and this
command mode will be cleared.
Normally, Hn = 00H and Ln = 01H to 04H are used.
Init sets the initial state of printer.
Init = 00H
Retains the settings of MENU item A features.
Sets Parm 1 and Parm 2 features for each mode.
Retains DLL font data.
The DLL mode is not cleared. (Retains ROM/RAM set by ESC I n code. However,
the print mode complies with the settings of MENU items.)

Command descriptions > 187

Init = 01H
Retains the settings of MENU item A features.
Sets Parm 1 and Parm 2 features for each mode.
Sets DLL copy font feature to entire area copy mode.
Init = 04H
Clears the modes of MENU item A features.
Sets Parm 1 and Parm 2 features for each mode.
Clears DLL mode.
Init = 05H
Clears the modes of MENU item A features.
Sets Parm 1 and Parm 2 features for each mode.
Sets DLL copy font feature to entire area copy mode.
Init = FEH
Retains the settings of MENU item A features.
Sets Parm 1 and Parm 2 features for each mode.
Sets DLL copy font feature to entire area copy mode.
Init = FFH
Clears the modes of MENU item A features.
Sets Parm 1 and Parm 2 features for each mode.
Sets DLL copy font feature to entire area copy mode.
Init specifications other than 00H, 01H, 04H, 05H, FEH, and FFH have the same
operations as Init = 00H.
Id specifies the printer ID number.
Id = 03H or Id = 16H is valid.
Parm 1 specifies MENU item B features.

BIT SETTING ITEMS OFF (0) ON (1)

7 Parameter enabled/ Enabled Disabled

disabled

6 Not used - -

5 Paper end alarm None (Always None (Always

buzzer ON/OFF set to OFF) set to OFF)

4 Auto CR mode Disabled (LF Enabled (LF +

only) CR)

3 Auto LF mode Disabled (CR Enabled (CR +

only) LF)

2 Page length 11 in 12 in

1 Zero character Non-slashed Slashed

0 Character set Set I Set II

Command descriptions > 188

 Parm 2 specifies MENU item C features

BIT SETTING ITEMS OFF (0) ON (1)

7 Parameter enabled/ Enabled Disabled

disabled

6 DLL copy font Copies ROM Copies

code page Multilingual
font font

5 NLQ print direction None None

(10 CPI) (Always uses (Always uses
bi-directional bi-directional
printing) printing)

4 4CPI mode when 12 20 CPI 12 CPI

CPI + compressed
data is received

3 Font when NLQ font NLQ II NLQ (Gothic)

is selected by switch (Courier)

2 Operation of FF code FF operation is FF operation is

at TOF position per-formed. not
performed.

1 Page print width 13.6 in 8 in

0 CSF mode ON/OFF None (current None (current

mode) mode)

> Additional details:

This command will be valid when the “Reset Inhibit” feature is set to “No” in MENU
mode. If the feature is set to “Yes,” this command is discarded.
If print data exists when the printer received this command, the printer starts
printing. Carriage return will occur, but there will be no line feeds.
DLL copy of the code page is executed in accordance with the bit 6 setting of
Parm2.
The table below summarizes MENU items to be set and their corresponding
parameters.
MENU item A

NO IBM PPR ML5720/ML5721

1. Fast font Complies with the Print Mode

ON/OFF setting in MENU mode.
Draft

2. Italic font Complies with the Style

setting in MENU mode.
Normal

3. Emphasized Print None (Always set to OFF.)

ON/OFF

4. Double-High Print Complies with the Size setting

ON/OFF in MENU mode.
Normal

5. Double-Wide Print Complies with the Size setting

ON/OFF in MENU mode.
Normal

Command descriptions > 189

 NO IBM PPR ML5720/ML5721

6. Pitch Complies with the Pitch

10/12/17.1/20/Prop. setting in MENU mode.
10 CPI

7. NLQ Complies with the Print Mode

ON/OFF setting in MENU mode.
Draft

NOTE
Items in Bold indicate settings of the mode clear state.

MENU item B

NO IBM PPR ML5720/ML5721

1. Paper end alarm buzzer None (Always set to OFF.)

ON/OFF

2. Auto CR mode Complies with the Auto CR

setting in MENU mode.

3. Auto LF mode Complies with the Auto LF

setting in MENU mode.

4. Page length Complies with the Page

Length setting in MENU mode.

5. Zero character Complies with the Zero

Character setting in MENU
mode.

6. Character set Complies with the Character

Set setting in MENU mode.

MENU item C

NO IBM PPR ML5720/ML5721

1. DLL copy font Copies in accordance with the

Code Page setting in MENU
mode.

2. NLQ print direction (10 None (Always uses bi-

CPI) directional printing)

3. CPI mode when 12 CPI Complies with the SI Select

+ compressed data is (12 CPI) setting in MENU
received mode.

4. Font when NLQ font is Complies with the Print Mode

selected by switch setting in MENU mode.

5. Operation of FF code at None (FF operation is always

TOF position enabled.)

6. Page print width Complies with the Page Width

setting in MENU mode.

7. CSF mode ON/OFF None (Maintains current

printer mode.)

Command descriptions > 190

Set Unit
> Code: ESC ( U Ln Hn Pn
> Compatibility: EPS Fx
> Function:
Sets the Unit to Pn/4320 inch.
> Range:
Range of Ln and Hn
Ln : 0 ~ 255
Hn : 0 ~ 255
Data quantity = Ln + (Hn*256)
With Pn, basic unit is selected.
Pn : 0 ~ 255

PN UNIT

0 <= Pn <= 9 No change

10<= Pn <= 19 1/432 in

20 <= Pn <= 29 1/216 in

30 <= Pn <= 39 No change

40 <= Pn <= 49 No change

50 <= Pn <= 59 No change

60 <= Pn <= 69 No change

70 <= Pn 127 No change

Commands affected with this command and default basic unit

ESC ( c (SET PAGE FORMAT) 1/216 inch
ESC (C (PAGE LENGTH IN DEFINED UNIT) 1/216 inch

Set Config Group

> Code : ESC DLE J P1 DATA
> Compatibility : EPS FX/IBM III/ML
> Function :
This command selects the CONFIG group (configuration menu) and initialize the
setting, which is equivalent with the “CONFIG” switch function.
> Range :
P1 represents the data size (number of bytes) since the designated number. (invalid
with MSB)
If P1 2, this command makes the DATA valid and flushes the remaining bytes P1
indicates.
If P1 = 1, it makes the DATA valid.
If P1 = 0, all the commands become invalid.

Command descriptions > 191

> Additional details :
Group 1 (CFG1) is designated at DATA = 01H.
Group 2 (CFG2) is designated at DATA = 02H.
When the same group as the currently selected CONFIG group is designated, the
command performs only initialization.
The printing starts at the point when ESC DLE J is received.
Because this command also sets the receiving Buffer size, if a continuous data
sending is performed after this command is processed, the proposed data needs to
be sent after sending Null data of 128 K bytes.
It is the currently selected CONFIG group, to make the settings valid by the menu
setting command (ESC DLE D).
The menu factory value loading command (ESC DLE 02H P1 DATA) sets the CONFIG
group 1 and 2 to be the same value.
Although CONFIG groups selected by this command are stored to the Flash Memory.
The DLL data becomes DLL copy status regardless of the emulation mode in the menu
setting. But if the receiving buffer is 128 bytes, which disables the DLL function, the
DLL copy will not executed.
Items being initialized are shown below.

NO. ITEM FOR CONDITION AFTER

INITIALIZATION INITIALIZATION

1. Character Pitch Complies with the menu setting.

2. Linefeed Pitch Complies with the menu setting.

3. Horizontal Tab Default (each 8 characters)

4. Vertical Tab Default

5. Character Modification
Horizontal scale Complies with the menu setting.
Vertical Scale Complies with the menu setting.
Score Released
Horizontal emphasis Released
Vertical Emphasis (Double Released
Strike)
Super/Sub Script Released
Italic Complies with the menu setting.

6. Setting of Uni-directional
Printing Setting Bi-directional printing
Character Complies with the menu setting.
Bit Image Graphics

7. Clearance between Characters Released

8. CG
Font Complies with the menu setting.
ROM/RAM ROM
Character Table Complies with the menu setting.
Code Page Setting Complies with the menu setting.
International Character Set Complies with the menu setting.
Zero Font Complies with the menu setting.

9. NLQ Font Complies with the menu setting.

10. Left Margin Default (home position)

11. Right Margin Complies with the menu setting.

12. Paper Position TOF

Command descriptions > 192

NO. ITEM FOR CONDITION AFTER
INITIALIZATION INITIALIZATION

13. Print Position Left margin

14. Page Length (Front/Rear) Complies with the menu setting.

15. Skip Over Perforation (Front/ Complies with the menu setting.
Rear)

16. Enable/Disable of Paper End Complies with the menu setting.

Detection

17. Enable/Disable of Print Suppress Complies with the menu setting.

18. AUTO LF Complies with the menu setting.

19. Impact Mode Complies with the menu setting.

20. Emulation Mode Complies with the menu setting.

21. Barcode Default

22. Receiving Buffer size Complies with the menu setting.

23. Auto I/F setting Complies with the menu setting.

24. Various settings of serial board Complies with the menu setting.

Command descriptions > 193

BARCODE

Select bar code

> Code: ESC DLE A P1 N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8
> Compatibility: Epson FX/IBM III/ML
> Function:
Selects the bar code type and size.
> Range:
P1 specifies the subsequent data amount. (the MSB is ignored.)
P1 = 0, 1, or 3: This command is ignored.
P1 = 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8: This command is valid.
P1 >= 9: Data between N1 and N8 are valid and data from N9 to P1 will be discarded.
N1 and N2 select the bar code type (the upper 4 bits are ignored).

N1 N2 BARCODE
TYPE

0 1 EAN8

0 2 EAN13

1 0 UPC-A

1 4 UPC-E

2 0 CODE39

3 0 Interleaved
2 of 5

4 0 Code 128

When values other than the above are specified for N1 and N2, this command is
ignored and the data amount specified by P1 is discarded.
N3 and N4 specify the vertical bar code length. Specify the length by 6/72-inch units.
(The upper 4 bits are ignored.)
Vertical bar code length: (N3 × 10 + N4) × (6/72) inch.
N3 = N4 = 0: Maintains the current setting.
N3 × 10 + N4 >= 25: Sets to 24.
N5 specifies the black bar width.
The minimum black bar width is 1/72 inch.
N5 = 0: Maintains the current setting.
N5 >= 8: Sets to 7.
N6 specifies the space width.
The minimum space width is 1/72 inch.
N6 = 0: Maintains the current setting.
N6 >= 8: Sets to 7.
N7 specifies the ratio between wide element and narrow element.

Command descriptions > 194

 N1 RATIO BETWEEN
WIDE AND NARROW
ELEMENTS

1 2:1

2 2.5:1

3 3:1

4 3.5:1

5 4:1

6 4.5:1

7 5:1

NOTE
N7 = 0: Maintains the current setting.
N7 >= 8: Sets to 7.

N8d specifies the character type.

N8 = 0: Appends no character.
N8 = 1: Appends Draft character.
N8 = 2: Appends NLQ character.
The character size is fixed at 12 CPI.
> Additional details:
Default settings of this parameter are listed below:
N1N2 = 10(UPC-A)
N3N4 = 09 (3/4 inch)
N5 = 1(1/72 inch)
N6 = 1(1/72 inch)
N7 = 2(2.5:1)
N8 = 2 (NLQ character)

Print bar code data

> Code: ESC DLE B P1 Pm [DATA]
> Compatibility: EPS FX/IBM III/ML
> Function:
Prints the bar code data.
> Range:
P1 specifies the subsequent data amount. (the MSB is ignored.)
Pm selects mode A, B, or C of CODE128. This parameter is effective only when the
CODE128 bar code is selected. When another bar code type is selected, the Pm
parameter is ignored.
Pm = 65: Selects CODE128 mode A.
Pm = 66: Selects CODE128 mode B.
Pm = 67: Selects CODE128 mode C.

Command descriptions > 195

 When data other than the above is specified, this command is ignored and the entire
code is discarded.
[DATA] indicates the bar code data.
> Additional details:
The valid number of characters (number of data) for this command is listed below.

BAR CODE TYPE NUMBER OF

CHARACTERS

EAN8 8

EAN13 13

UPC-A 12

UPC-E 6

CODE39 1 to 50

Interleaved 2 to 5 1 to 50

Code 128 (A, B, C) 1 to 50

Print postnet bar code data

> Code: ESC DLE C P1 [DATA]
> Compatibility: EPS FX/IBM III/ML
> Function:
Prints the postnet bar code data.
> Range:
P1 specifies the subsequent data amount. (The MSB is ignored.)
P1: 1 to 20
When data other than the above is specified, this command is ignored and discarded.
[DATA] indicates the postnet bar code data.
The external code table of bar code data is given in “Appendix E – Barcode” on
page 361. Any data not included in the external code table will be ignored.

Print barcode
> Code: ESC ( B Ln Hn Pk Pm Ps Lv Hv Pc [DATA]
> Compatibility: EPS FX
> Function:
Prints barcode data.
> Valid range and meaning of Ln and Hn
0(00H) <= Ln <= 255(FFH)
0(00H) <= Hn <= 255(FFH) MSB shall be invalid
Indicates number of further parameter bytes.
Number of parameter bytes = Ln + Hn x 256
This parameter shall be valid only when set by the further parameter bytes (6 bytes)
+ number of data (differs depending on barcode type). For the settings other than
this, this command shall be invalid and the data after the number of bytes designated
by this parameter will be received and discarded.

Command descriptions > 196

Sets barcode type by parameter Pk (MSB vakid)

PK (HEX) BARCODE TYPE

00 EAN-13

01 EAN-8

02 Interleaved 2 of 5

03 UPC-A

04 UPC-E

05 CODE 39

06 CODE 128

07 POSTNET

When the barcode type other than above is designated, this command shall be invalid
and number of bytes indicated by Ln and Hn will be received and discarded.
Sets module (black bar and SP bar) width by parameter Pm.

PM MODULE WIDTH
(1/120” UNIT)

01 1 dot

02 2 dots

03 3 dots

04 4 dots

05 5 dots

For settings other than the above, module width shall be 2 dots.
Sets SP bar width on the basis of parameter Pm setting by parameter Ps (MSB valid).

PS ADJUSTMENT
VALUE OF STD.
WIDTH OF SP BAR
(1/240” UNIT)

FDH -3

FEH -2

FFH -1

00H 0(default)

01H +1

02H +2

03H +3

For settings other than the above, value shall be 0 setting.

Sets height (1/72" unit) of black bar by parameter Lv and Hv.
(Black bar height = Lv + Hv × 256)
0(00H) <= Lv <= 255(FFH)
0(00H) <= Hv <= 255(FFH)

Command descriptions > 197

Maximum setting value for height is 2 inches. (Possible to be set in 6/72" unit)

SETTING RANGE SET SETTING RANGE SET

VALUE VALUE

1 <= Lv.Hv <= 6 6/72" 79 <= Lv·Hv <= 84 84/72"

7 <= Lv·Hv <= 12 12/72" 85 <= Lv·Hv <= 90 90/72"

13 <= Lv·Hv <= 18 18/72" 91 <= Lv·Hv <= 96 96/72"

19 <= Lv·Hv <= 24 24/72" 97 <= Lv·Hv <= 102 102/72"

25 <= Lv·Hv <= 30 30/72" 103 <= Lv·Hv <= 108 108/72"

31 <= Lv·Hv <= 36 36/72" 109 <= Lv·Hv <= 114 114/72"

37 <= Lv·Hv <= 42 42/72" 115 <= Lv·Hv <= 120 120/72"

43 <= Lv·Hv <= 48 48/72" 121 <= Lv·Hv <= 126 126/72"

49 <= Lv·Hv <= 54 54/72" 127 <= Lv·Hv <= 132 132/72"

55 <= Lv·Hv <= 60 60/72" 133 <= Lv·Hv <= 138 138/72"

61 <= Lv·Hv <= 66 66/72" 139 <= Lv·Hv <= 144 144/72"

67 <= Lv·Hv <= 72 72/72" 145 <= Lv·Hv 144/72"

73 <= Lv·Hv <= 78 78/72"

Pc: Sets control information.

PC MODULE WIDTH

bit 0 Sets check digit

0: Does not add check digit
1: Adds check digit

bit 1 Sets human readable character

0: Prints
1: Does not print

bit 2 Sets flag character print position

(Setting invalid)
0: Prints in center
1: Prints in lower line

bit 3 (reserved)

bit 4 (reserved)

bit 5 (reserved)

bit 6 (reserved)

bit 7 (reserved)

DATA: Transmits barcode data.

Command descriptions > 198

 The following table shows number of barcode data.

BARCODE WHEN WHEN

TYPE CHECK CHECK
DIGIT IS DIGIT IS
NOT ADDED ADDED

EAN-13 0DH 0CH

EAN-8 08H 07H

Interleaved 01H to 32H 01H to 32H

2 of 5

UPC-A 0CH 0BH

UPC-E 06H 06H

Code 39 01H to 32H 01H to 32H

Code 128 02H to 32H 02H to 32H

POSTNET 06H or 0AH or 05H or 09H or

0CH 0BH

Set-up barcode parameter

> Code: ESC [ f Ln Hn Pk Pm Ps Lv Hv Pc [DATA]
> Compatibility: IBM III
> Function:
Sets barcode type.
> Valid range and meaning of Ln and Hn
0(00H) <= Ln <= 255(FFH)
0(00H) <= Hn <= 255(FFH) MSB shall be invalid
Indicates number of further parameter bytes.
Number of parameter bytes = Ln + Hn x 256
This parameter shall be valid only when set by the further parameter bytes (6 bytes)
+ number of data (differs depending on barcode type). For settings other than this,
this command shall be invalid and the data after the number of bytes designated by
this parameter will be received and discarded.
Sets barcode type by parameter Pk (MSB valid)

PK (HEX) BARCODE TYPE

B2H EAN-13

B3H EAN-18

B4H Code-39

B6H Interleaved 2 of 5

B7H UPC-E

B9H POSTNET

BAH Code 128

When the barcode type other than above is designated, this command shall be invalid
and number of bytes indicated by Ln and Hn will be received and discarded.

Command descriptions > 199

Sets module (black bar and SP bar) width by parameter Pm. (MSB valid)

PM MODULE WIDTH
(1/120” UNIT)

00H 2 dots

01H 1 dot

02H 2 dots

03H 3 dots

04H 4 dots

For settings other than above, width shall be 2 dots.

Sets SP bar width on the basis of parameter Pm setting by parameter Ps. (MSB valid)

PS ADJUSTMENT
VALUE OF STD.
WIDTH OF SP BAR
(1/240” UNIT)

FDH -3

FEH -2

FFH -1

00H 0(default)

01H +1

02H +2

03H +3

For settings other than above, value shall be 0 setting.

Sets height (1/2160" unit) of black bar by parameter Lv and Hv.
(Black bar height = Lv + Hv × 256)
0(00H) <= Lv <= 255(FFH)
0(00H) <= Hv <= 255(FFH)
Maximum setting value for height is 2 inches. (Possible to be set in 6/72" unit)

SETTING RANGE SET SETTING RANGE SET

VALUE VALUE

1 <= Lv.Hv <= 180 6/72" 2341 <= Lv·Hv <= 2520 84/72"

181 <= Lv·Hv <= 360 12/72" 2521 <= Lv·Hv <= 2700 90/72"

361 <= Lv·Hv <= 540 18/72" 2701 <= Lv·Hv <= 2880 96/72"

541 <= Lv·Hv <= 720 24/72" 2881 <= Lv·Hv <= 3060 102/72"

721 <= Lv·Hv <= 900 30/72" 3061 <= Lv·Hv <= 3240 108/72"

901 <= Lv·Hv <= 1080 36/72" 3241 <= Lv·Hv <= 3420 114/72"

1081 <= Lv·Hv <= 1260 42/72" 3421 <= Lv·Hv <= 3600 120/72"

1261 <= Lv·Hv <= 1440 48/72" 3601 <= Lv·Hv <= 3780 126/72"

1441 <= Lv·Hv <= 1620 54/72" 3781 <= Lv·Hv <= 3960 132/72"

1621 <= Lv·Hv <= 1800 60/72" 3961 <= Lv·Hv <= 4140 138/72"

Command descriptions > 200

 SETTING RANGE SET SETTING RANGE SET
VALUE VALUE

1801 <= Lv·Hv <= 1980 66/72" 4141 <= Lv·Hv <= 4320 144/72"

1981 <= Lv·Hv <= 2160 72/72" 4321 <= Lv·Hv 144/72"

2161 <= Lv·Hv <= 2340 78/72"

Pc: Sets control information.

PC MODULE WIDTH

bit 0 Sets check digit

0: Does not add check digit
1: Adds check digit

bit 1 Sets human readable character

0: Prints
1: Does not print

bit 2 Sets flag character print position

(Setting invalid)
0: Prints in center
1: Prints in lower line

bit 3 (reserved)

bit 4 (reserved)

bit 5 (reserved)

bit 6 (reserved)

bit 7 (reserved)

Print postnet bar code data

> Code: ESC [ p Ln Hn [DATA]
> Compatibility: IBM III
> Function:
Prints barcode.
> Valid range and meaning of Ln and Hn
0(00H) <= Ln <= 255(FFH)
0(00H) <= Hn <= 255(FFH)
Indicates number of further parameter bytes.
Number of parameter bytes = Ln + Hn x 256
This parameter shall be valid only when set by the further parameter bytes (6 bytes)
+ number of data (differs depending on barcode type). For the settings other than
this, this command shall be invalid and the data after the number of bytes designated
by this parameter will be received and discarded.
DATA: Transmits barcode data.

Command descriptions > 201

The following table shows number of barcode data.

BARCODE WHEN WHEN

TYPE CHECK CHECK
DIGIT IS DIGIT IS
NOT ADDED ADDED

EAN-13 0DH 0CH

EAN-8 08H 07H

Code 39 01H to 32H 01H to 32H

Interleaved 01H to 32H 01H to 32H

2 of 5

UPC-A 0CH 0BH

POSTNET 0AH 09H

Code 128 02H to 32H 02H to 32H

Command descriptions > 202

ML5790/ML5791
For a summary of the commands available see “Appendix A – Command summary” on
page 295.

HORIZONTAL CONTROL

Carriage return
> Code: CR
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function:
Terminates the print line and returns the print position to the start of the line.
The data in the print buffer will be printed.
> Additional details:
CR will perform a line feed if auto LF is on. Auto LF can be set by Menu or control
codes.
Double width mode which is designated by SO (and ESC SO in Epson mode) will be
reset.
Auto feed XT signal low – Epson.

Horizontal tab set

> Code: ESC D n1 n2 ... nj nk NUL
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function:
The tab stops will be set according to the values of n which specify the character
positions, starting from the Left Margin – Epson and home position – IBM.
> Range:
Range k = 1 – 32 Epson, 1 – 28 IBM
Range n = 1 – 255

CPI ML5790 ML5791

10 79 135

12 95 163

15 119 203

17.1 137 233

20 159 255

nj < nk: valid.

nj >= nk: nk invalid – IBM, nk ignored and sequence terminated – Epson.
> Out of range:
If k = 0 or k > 32 – Epson, k > 28 – IBM
The last value and any following value of n will be ignored.
Maximum n value in each CPI, values larger than maximum are ignored.

Command descriptions > 203

> Additional details:
The tab settings n1, n2, n3, nk must be entered in ascending order.
Entire command string is terminated with a NUL, CHR$ (0).

MODE LEFT MARGIN PITCH CHANGES

CHANGE

Epson Position adjusted Position not affected

IBM Position not affected Position relative to

pitch

Tabs are set at every eighth character after powering up the printer, receiving an
l-PRIME (INIT) signal or executing an ESC @ (Epson mode only).
Receiving ESC [K signal (IBM only)
Receiving ESC } NULL signal.
Receiving ESC { n signal.
Executing Menu setting.
Executing printer reset function by Pressing SHIFT + CPI buttons in DE-SEL mode)
If n = 0, clear all tabs set.
Example: ESC D 30 40 1 10 60 70 NUL
IBM mode: 30 40 60 70 valid
Epson mode: 30 40 valid
> Related functions:
Horizontal Tab – HT

Horizontal tab
> Code: HT
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function:
This command causes a skip to the next Horizontal Tab (HT) position.
> Additional Details:
Epson – Tabs are absolute positions; changes in character pitch do not change tab
positions.
IBM – Tabs are relative to character pitch.
Upon power up the default tabs are set at columns 9, 17, 25, 33... and every eight
spaces after that, according to the default character pitch.
The spaces generated by a horizontal tab will not be scored.
> Related Functions:
Horizontal tab stop set – ESC D

Command descriptions > 204

Reset tab settings to power-on default values
> Code: ESC R
> Compatibility: IBM
> Function:
This command sets horizontal tabs at every eighth character starting at column 9 and
clears all vertical tabs.
> Additional details:
The horizontal tabs will be set according to the default character pitch.

Execute absolute horizontal dot position

> Code: ESC $ n1 n2
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
Moves the printhead to the specified absolute horizontal dot position in a line from
the left margin; subsequent data is printed from this position.
> Range:
In dot position setting, n1 becomes low byte and n2 becomes high byte.
n1, n2 = 0 – 255 (bit7 of n2 is ignored).
Limit:
0 <= n1 + (n2*255) <= 10922 (0/120 – 10922/120 in)
10923 <= n1 + (n2*255) <= 21845 (0/120 – 10922/120 in)
21846 <= n1 + (n2*255) <= 32767 (0/120 – 10921/120 in)
> Out of range:
Any position specified beyond the right margin is ignored.
> Additional details:
Dot position = (n1 + n2*256)/60 <= 13.6 in (Wide)
(n1 + n2*256)/60 <= 8.0 in (Narrow)
The position specified as n1 = n2 = 0 is the left margin.
Dot position is absolute. The character pitch does not affect the dot position.
This command starts print when specified dot position is left of the current print
position.
Spaces generated by moving the horizontal positioning are not scored if score is set.

Execute relative dot position

> Code: ESC \ n1 n2
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
This moves the printhead to the dot position from which all subsequent data is to be
printed, relative to the current position in a line.
> Range:
n1 and n2 specify the dot position; the lower byte is n1 and the upper byte is n2.
Range n1 and n2 is 0 – 255.

Command descriptions > 205

> Out of range:
Defined values beyond the left or right margins are ignored.
> Additional details:
This relative setting defines the next printing position by calculating on the basis of
the printing position immediately preceding the input of this code. Printing starts at
a position before or after the previous position at a dot spacing defined by the
selected print mode.
Positive values move the print position to the right and negative values move it to the
left.
Dot position = n1 + n2 * 256.
Physical position = dot position/density = (n1 + n2*256)/DPI.
With the score mode selected, score is added only for skip to right.
Actual relative dot positioning depends on the current mode.
Dots/line:

DPI ML5790 ML5791

Draft - All CPI 120 960 1632

LQ - All CPI & Prop 180 1440 2448

Example:

DOTS NUMBER N2 N1

2448 09 90

| | |

| | |

3 0 3

2 0 2

1 0 1

0 0 0

-1 FF FF

-2 FF FE

-3 FF FD

| | |

| | |

-2448 F6 70

Command descriptions > 206

Move right relative dot position
> Code: ESC d n1 n2
> Compatibility: IBM
> Function:
Moves the print position n/120 in to the right from the current printhead position.
> Range:
Specify dot position following n1 and n2.
n1 is low byte, n2 is high byte.
n1 and n2 range is 0 – 255
Limit 0 <= n1 + (n2*255) <= 1632
> Out of range:
Values beyond the right margin will be ignored.
> Additional details:
If score is set any horizontal positioning is scored.

Move left relative dot position

> Code: ESC e n1 n2
> Compatibility: IBM
> Function:
Moves current logical horizontal position to the left (toward home position) in steps
of n/120 in. Prints data in print buffer.
> Range:
In dot position setting, n1 becomes low byte and n2 becomes high byte.
n1, n2 = 0 – 255 (bit7 of n2 is ignored).
Limit:
0 <= n1 + (n2*255) <= 10922 (0/120 – 10922/120 in)
10923 <= n1 + (n2*255) <= 21845 (0/120 – 10922/120 in)
21846 <= n1 + (n2*255) <= 32767 (0/120 – 10921/120 in)
> Out of range:
Current logical horizontal position is set to the left margin if value is entered beyond
left margin.
> Additional details:
No score is added to spaces generated by this command.

Command descriptions > 207

Set print position
> Code: ESC DLE @ n A1 A2 P1 P2 P3 P4
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function:
Sets the next horizontal print position. The data received subsequently is printed from
the set position.
> Range:
n designates the number of parameter bytes.
0 <= n <= 255
A1 designates the type of print position
0 <= A1 <= 255
A1 = even number - designates absolute print position from the left margin.
A1 = odd number - designates relative print position from the current position.
A2 designates the direction of movement for relative print position
0 <= A1 <= 255
A1 = even number - designates forward direction (toward right margin).
A1 = odd number - designates reverse direction (toward left margin).
P1, P2, P3, P4 designate print position.
P1, P2, P3, P4 = 0 - 255
(Lower 4 bits 0 - 9 are valid, and higher 4 bits are ignored)
P1 = 1000th’s place, P2 = 100th’s place, P3 = 10th’s place and P1 = unit place; the
print position must be designated with 4 digits.
> Out of Range:
Upon receipt of this command, data beyond the left/right margin will be ignored.
> Additional details:
The data in print buffer is printed if the range on left margin side (reverse) from
current position is selected.
Score: if the score mode is set; is included if the range on right margin side (forward)
from current position is selected.

Left margin set

> Code: ESC I n
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
Left margin is set at (n) characters from printhead home position.

Command descriptions > 208

> Range:
Range n = 0 – 255

NAME PITCH ML5790 ML5791

PICA/ 10 0 - 70 0 - 126
PROPORTIONAL

ELITE 12 0 - 84 0 - 151

– 15 0 - 105 0 - 189

COMPRESSED 17.1 0 - 119 0 - 215

COMPRESSED ELITE 20 0 - 140 0 - 252

COMPRESSED Prop 20 0 - 140 0 - 252

> Out of range:

If n exceeds the maximum value, this command will be ignored.
> Additional details:
The left margin is set as an absolute position according to the current character pitch.
Changes in character pitch do not change the margin position.
The print buffer will be cleared.
Maximum difference between left margin and right margin values is 2 characters for
5 CPI.
> Related functions:
Right margin set – ESC Q n

Right margin set

> Code: ESC Q n
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
Right margin is set at (n) characters from head home position.
> Range:
Range n = 1 – 255

NAME PITCH ML5790 ML5791

PICA/ 10 4 - 80 4 - 136
PROPORTIONAL

ELITE 12 5 - 96 5 - 163

– 15 6 - 120 6 - 204

COMPRESSED 17.1 7 - 137 7 - 233

COMPRESSED ELITE 20 8 - 160 8 - 255

COMPRESSED Prop 20 8 - 160 8 - 255

> Out of range:

The number “n” must be within the ranges given above, otherwise it will be ignored.
If n = 0, or is less than or equal to the left margin, this command is ignored.

Command descriptions > 209

> Additional details:
The right margin is set as an absolute position, according to the current character
pitch. Changes in character pitch do not change the margin setting.
While in proportional mode the character pitch width will be set in pica character size.
(10 CPI = 36 dots)
Any graphics after the right margin are lost.
Setting the right margin clears the print buffer.
Minimum difference between left margin and right margin values is 5 characters for
5 CPI.
Attempting to print a character beyond the right margin will print the character on
the next line after a line feed and carriage return are executed.
The ML5791 default (power-up) for 20CPI is 272.

Set left/right margin

> Code: ESC X n1 n2
> Compatibility: IBM
> Function:
Sets the left and right margins in character positions from the home position by the
current character pitch.
> Range:
The ranges for n1 and n2 are:
0 <= n1 <= 255 Left margin
0 <= n2 <= 255 Right margin
n1 < n2
> Out of range:
If n1 or n2 = 0 then the current margin setting is used.
If n2 exceeds the default range n2 will be converted to the default value.

10 CPI 12 CPI 15 CPI 17.1 CPI 20 CPI

ML5790 80 96 120 137 160

ML5791 136 163 204 233 255

> Additional details:

The default value of the left margin is the first character.
The margin settings are absolute. Changes in character pitch do not affect the margin
position.
n1, n2 indicate the left and right edges of printable area. For example, if n1 = 10, n2
= 100, the printable area is from the 10th column to the 100th column: 91 characters
are printable.

Auto justification
> Code: ESC a n
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:

Command descriptions > 210

 The text position/alignment will be set according to one of the four given modes
assigned by n. (n is a Binary value.)
> Range:

N JUSTIFICATION

00H Left

01H Centre

02H Right

03H Full

> Additional details:

n = 0: Left justification is the default or standard format, in which the left margin is
justified and the right margin is not.
n = 1: The centring command centres a line of text between the margins. This
command is used for headings, titles and captions.
n = 2: Right justification is the opposite of left justification. The right margin is
justified and the left is not.
n =3: Full justification puts extra spaces where necessary so that both the left and
right margins are justified.
Full justification (n = 3) is performed when data exceeding 75% of printable
characters in a line is received at the time of print start.
BS, DEL, HT are invalid when auto justification is used except when n = 0.
Print position will be affected by the commands which set the left/right margin.

NOTE
When using full auto justification, use carriage return at the end of paragraphs
only, not at the end of each line of text.

Set/reset uni-direction printing

> Code: ESC U n
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function:
Uni-directional printing, from left to right, or bi-directional printing will be performed
based on the value of n.
> Range:
Range n:

EPSON IBM ACTION

01H, 31H, 81H, B1H ODD SET Uni-directional

00H, 30H, 80H, B0H EVEN RESET (Bi-directional)

> Out of range:

This command will be ignored if n equals a value other than the values mentioned
above.
> Additional details:
Short line seeking is performed in both uni-directional and bi-directional print modes.

Command descriptions > 211

One line uni-directional printing
> Code: ESC <
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
Uni-directional printing for one line only will be performed.
> Additional details:
The line is printed from left to right.
Subsequent lines will be printed, bi-directionally, according to short line seeking
priorities logic.
This command returns the printhead to the start of the print line before printing
begins.

Set/reset half speed printing

> Code: ESC s n
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
The printer starts/stops printing at 50% of normal speed upon receipt of this
command depending on the value of n.
> Range:
n = 01H, 31H, 81H, or B1H SET half-speed printing.
n = 00H, 30H, 80H, or B0H SET full speed printing.
> Out of range
This command will be ignored if n equals a value other than the values mentioned
above.
> Additional details:
Half Speed mode can be used to reduce printer noise.
If the print speed is slower than the printer’s physical lowest speed, the half speed
command is ignored and data is printed at that lowest speed.

Backspace
> Code: BS
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function:
Prints the data in the print buffer and moves the printhead one character to the left
according to the character pitch set.
> Additional details:
If a Multipass character (e.g. double height character) needs to be printed, after the
BS the printer performs a back space and a LF to the printing position and prints the
character. (Precise printing position is not guaranteed.)
A backspace code given when the printhead is at the left margin is ignored.
Moves back two character spaces if the printer is in double width mode.
If clearance between characters is set, BS value will be character width and clearance.

Command descriptions > 212

 In proportional mode:
EPSON LQ – The first character is back spaced by the width of the proportional
character and subsequently by 10 CPI character width (or reduced 12 CPI character
width in Reduce mode).
IBM – Back space by 12 CPI character width.

One character data delete

> Code: DEL
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
Deletes the last character data input into the print buffer.
> Additional details:
If the data which is to be deleted is a SP code, (20)H or (32)D, one SP code is deleted
by this command.
If the data which is to be deleted is in Bit Image Graphics, this command is ignored.
Horizontal tab or skip is not deleted.
Control codes are not affected.
This command is ignored if auto-justification is set, except when n = 0.

VERTICAL CONTROL

Set 1/8 inch fixed line spacing

> Code: ESC 0
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function:
The line spacing is set to 1/8 in.
> Additional details:
This command remains in effect until a new line spacing command is sent to the
printer.
This command does not set the top of form position.
> Related functions:
LF or CR (and the condition that Auto LF is on) executes 1/8 in LF.

Set 7/72 inch fixed line spacing

> Code: ESC 1
> Compatibility: IBM
> Function:
Line spacing will be set to 7/72 in upon receipt of this command.
> Additional details:
This command remains in effect until a new line spacing command is sent to the
printer.
This command is used to set line spacing for graphics printing.

Command descriptions > 213

Start line spacing
> Code: ESC 2
> Compatibility: IBM
> Function:
The line spacing value which is set by ESC A n will be activated when ESC 2 is sent.
The line spacing set by Menu is selected if it has not been stored by ESC A n.

Set 1/6 inch line spacing

> Code: ESC 2
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
The line spacing is set to 1/6 in.
> Additional details:
This command remains in effect until a new line spacing command is sent to the
printer.
This command does not set the top of form position.
> Related functions:
LF or CR (and the condition that Auto LF is on) executes 1/6 in LF.

Set n/60 inch line spacing

> Code: ESC A n
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM PPR/IBM AGM
> Function:
Sets line spacing to: n/60 in Epson LQ, n/60 in IBM AGM, n/72 in IBM PPR
> Range:
Range
n = 0 – 127 Number of 1/60 in increments – Epson
n = 1 – 255 Number of 1/60 in (1/72 in) increments – IBM
> Out of range:
Values of n not within the allowable range will be ignored.
> Additional details:
No line feed will occur when n = 0 in Epson mode. In IBM mode if n = 0 this command
is ignored, and the line spacing in not changed.
Power on default or l-Prime signal resets the value set by this command and sets the
value determined by the Menu.
Top of form will not be set.
> Related functions:
ESC 2 is used to initiate the selected line spacing for IBM PPR mode.

Command descriptions > 214

Set n/180 inch line spacing
> Code: ESC 3 n
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM PPR/IBM AGM
> Function:
Sets line spacing to: n/180 in Epson, n/216 in IBM PPR, and n/180 in IBM AGM.
> Range:
Range
n = 0 – 255 Number of 1/180 in increments – Epson, IBM AGM
n = 1 – 255 Number of 1/216 in increments – IBM PPR
> Additional details:
Power-on default or l-Prime signal resets the value set by this command and sets the
value which is determined by the Menu.
No line feed occurs when n = 0 in Epson, IBM AGM mode. In IBM PPR mode if n = 0
this command is ignored.
Top of form will not be set.
> (f) Related functions:
LF, VT, or CR (and when Auto LF is on) executes predetermined LF.
ESC [ \ sets the spacing increment in IBM mode.

Set n/360 inch fine line spacing

> Code: ESC [ n
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
Sets line spacing to n/360 in.
> Range:
Range n = 0 – 255 Number of 1/360 in increments.
> Additional details:
Power on default or l-Prime signal resets the value set by this command and sets the
value which is determined by the Menu.
No line feed occurs when n = 0.
Top of form will not be set.
> Related functions:
LF, VT, or CR (and the condition that Auto LF is on) precedes predetermined LF.

Set n/360 inch line spacing

> Code: ESC % 8 n
> Compatibility: IBM
> Function:
Sets line spacing to n/360 in.
> Range:
Range n = 1 – 255, Number of 1/360 in increments.

Command descriptions > 215

> Additional details:
Power on default or l-Prime signal resets the value set by this command and sets the
value which is determined by the Menu.
This command is ignored when n = 0.
Top of form will not be set.
> Related functions:
LF, VT, or CR (and the condition that Auto LF is on) precedes predetermined LF.

Line feed
> Code: LF
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function:
This command causes the data in the print buffer to be printed followed by a
movement to the next print line based on the current line spacing.
> Additional details:
A carriage return will also be executed; in IBM PPR mode auto CR must be set for CR
to be executed.
Line spacing pitch will be set by ESC A n, ESC 0, ESC 2, ESC 3 n, and ESC [ n.
Otherwise, the LF pitch will be set by Menu when power is on or an l-Prime signal is
received.
This code will cancel enlarged character mode set by the ESC SO (Epson mode only)
and SO code. If there is no data before the LF code or only spaces before this code,
only line feed is performed.

Set/reset automatic linefeed

> Code: ESC 5 n
> Compatibility: IBM
> Function:
Enables/disables automatic line feed. The printer performs an automatic LF each time
it receives a carriage return (CR).
> Range:
If n = ODD, SET automatic LF.
If n = EVEN, RESET automatic LF.
> Out of range:
The line feed is executed for the current line spacing setting.

Fine line feed (n/180 inch)

> Code: ESC J n
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM PPR/IBM AGM
> Function:
Immediate line feed is executed without changing the current line spacing.
n/180 in Epson LQ
n/180 in IBM AGM
n/216 in IBM PPR

Command descriptions > 216

> Range:
n = 0 – 255, Number of 1/180 in increments – Epson
n = 1 – 255, Number of 1/180 in (1/216 in) increments – IBM
> Additional details:
The contents of the buffer are printed without a Carriage Return. (The printhead does
not move to the left margin.) In IBM mode if auto CR is selected by Menu a carriage
return will be performed.
This command does not need a cancel code, since it is executed only once.
No feed is performed when n = 0. (Ignored in IBM mode)
> Related functions:
Double width set by SO (or ESC SO in Epson mode) will not be reset.
ESC [ \ sets the spacing increment for IBM mode.

Fine line feed (n/360 inch)

> Code: ESC ] n
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
A n/360 in immediate line feed is executed without changing the current line spacing.
> Range:
Range n = 0 – 255, Number of 1/360 in increments.
> Additional details:
The contents of the buffer will be printed without a CR. (Carriage does not move to
the home position.)
No line feed occurs when n = 0.
Top of form will not be set.
> Related functions:
Double width set by SO (or ESC SO in Epson mode) will not be reset.

Fine line feed (n/360 inch)

> Code: ESC % 4 n
> Compatibility: IBM
> Function:
A n/360 in immediate line feed is executed without changing the current line spacing.
> Range:
Range n = 0 – 255, Number of 1/360 in increments.
> Additional details:
The contents of the buffer will be printed without a CR. (Carriage does not move to
the home position.)
No line feed occurs when n = 0.
Top of form will not be set.
> Related functions:
Double width set by SO will not be reset.

Command descriptions > 217

Reverse line feed
> Code: ESC j n
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
Once this command is received the printer will execute an immediate reverse line
feed, which will be executed only once for each time this command is sent.
> Range:
Range n = 0 – 255
> Additional details:
The printer will perform an n/180 in reverse line feed each time this command is sent.
The current line spacing will not be changed.
It must not exceed TOF whether or not there is perforation skip.

NOTE
It is not recommended to use the pull tractor option feed unit when reverse
line feeds are required.

Reverse line feed

> Code: ESC ]
> Compatibility: IBM
> Function:
Prints data in the print buffer, then performs reverse line feed. Reverse line feed is
also performed when no print data is stored in the buffer.
Linefeed amounts conform to those which are set using ESC 0, ESC 1, ESC 2, ESC 3
Pn, ESC A Pn, and ESC % 8 Pn. When not set after the power is turned on, the amount
of line feed equates to a menu-set value.
> Additional Details
Printing and line feed are performed irrespective of AUTO CR in the menu (a carriage
return is not inserted).
One-line horizontal expansion by SO and ESC SO is not cancelled (also it is not
cancelled when AUTO CR is valid).
When the amount of line feed is doubled by setting using the ESC [ @ command, a
single reverse line feed is performed.
A new line does not start beyond the TOF position.
Page length is controlled.

Form feed
> Code: FF
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function:
Upon receipt of this command the printer prints the data in the print buffer and carries
out a carriage return, then feeds the paper to the next TOF position.

Command descriptions > 218

> Additional details:
Factory setting of form length is eleven (11) in. (Menu).
Pressing the FORM FEED button on the operator panel always feeds the paper forward
to the next top of form position.
FF will be performed to the next top of form position even when the FF is received at
the top of form position.
Double width set by SO (or ESC SO in Epson mode) will be reset.
> Related functions:
TOF will be set on power-up or l-Prime (or ESC 4 in IBM mode).
Receiving ESC [ K signal (IBM only)
Receiving ESC } NULL signal.
Receiving ESC { n signal.
Executing Menu setting.
Executing printer reset function by pressing SHIFT + CPI buttons in DESEL mode.

Vertical tab
> Code: VT
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function:
Upon receipt of this command the printer will print out what is in the buffer then move
the paper to the next preprogrammed tab stop.
> Additional details:
If vertical tabs are not set this command will function the same as: CR in Epson mode,
LF in IBM mode.
Executing more than the number of vertical tabs set will cause execution of the first
vertical tab of the channel on the next page.
> Related functions:
Double width set by SO (or ESC SO in Epson mode) will be reset.

Set vertical tab stops

> Code: ESC B n1 n2 ... nk NUL
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function:
Upon receipt of this command the printer will set the specified number of vertical
tabs.
> Range:
k specifies the number of vertical tabs set.
Range k = 1 – 16 (Epson), 1 – 64 (IBM)
n is the specific line number at which each vertical tab is to be set.
Range n = 0 – 255
> Out of range:
Values of k and n which exceed the maximum will be ignored.
If n is greater than the form length, the n value can be set regardless of form length.

Command descriptions > 219

> Additional details:
The distance is determined by the current line spacing.
To use an n setting of 255 the line spacing must be set at less than 3/72 in.
Vertical tab stops are absolute. They are not changed by setting the line spacing.
(Epson mode)
The tab sequence must be terminated by CHR$(0) or any number less than the last
tab or nk. (Epson mode)
The vertical tabs set by this command correspond to channel no. 0 in Epson mode.
The n value must be increasing: n > n2 > n3 > ... > nk
> Related functions:
ESC B NUL will reset the tab.

Set vertical format unit (VFU)

> Code: ESC b n m1 m2 ... mk NUL
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
Upon receipt of this command the printer sets up m vertical tabs for each channel n.
> Range:
m = 0 – 255, Tab stop value
n = 0 – 7, Vertical tab stop channel number
k = 1 – 16, Number of tab stops
> Out of range:
If n > 7, the VFU setting ESC sequence will be ignored.
> Additional details:
The VFU has 8 channels (n = 0 to 7), and up to 16 stops (m = 1 to 16) which can be
set within the page length in each channel.
This sequence must be terminated by CHR$(0), or any number less than mk.
Tab settings are not affected by subsequent changes in line spacing.
> Related functions:
On power up, n is set to channel no. 0. This means the same as ESC B.

Select vertical tab channel

> Code: ESC / n
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
Upon receipt of this code the printer selects a Vertical Tab channel specified by n.
> Range:
Range n = 0 – 7, Number of tab channel
> Out of range:
If n > 7, the VFU value will be ignored.

Command descriptions > 220

> Additional details:
Within each channel there can be up to 16 vertical tabs which are independently set.
In order to access the vertical tabs within each channel VT or CHR$(11) can be used.
Tabs set by the ESC B command correspond to channel no. 0.

Form length set by inches

> Code: ESC C NUL n
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function:
Upon receipt of this command the printer sets the form length to n in.
> Range:
n = 1 – 22 (Epson), Number of inches
n = 1 – 255 (IBM)
> Out of range:
n = 0 (or n > 22 in Epson mode) this command will be ignored.
> Additional details:
The skip perforation will be cleared when the n is valid data.
Top of form position is set by this command.
> Related functions:
Line pitch is based on the value set by ESC 0, ESC 2, ESC A n or ESC 3 n.

Form length set by lines

> Code: ESC C n
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/ IBM
> Function:
Upon receipt of this command the printer sets the form length to n lines.
> Range:
n = 1 – 127 (Epson), Number of lines
n = 1 – 255 (IBM).
> Out of range:
If n = 0 (or 128 for Epson mode) this command is treated as ESC C NUL n.
> Additional details:
Top of form will be set.
The value of the skip over perforation will be cleared when valid n data is received.
Bit 7 is cleared and set to that value in Epson mode.
In Epson mode if the line spacing is set to 0 this command is ignored.

Command descriptions > 221

Set perforation auto skip
> Code: ESC N n
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function:
Upon receipt of this command the printer sets the skip over perforation to n lines.
> Range:
n = 1 to 127 (Epson), Number of lines to skip
n = 1 to 255 (IBM)
> Out of range:
If n is equal to or greater than the current form length, in lines, this command will be:
– Set to form length (Epson mode).
– Ignored (IBM mode).
If n = 0 (or n > 127 in Epson mode), the last value will remain set.
> Additional details:
Skip over perforation value will not be changed by the line pitch change.
Entering the area of skip over perforation by LF, VT, CR (with LF), ESC J n and auto
line feed will cause skip over perforation and feed to the top of form.
> Related functions:
Line spacing value is based on ESC 0, ESC 2, ESC A n, ESC [ n or ESC 3 n.
ESC O resets skip over perforation.

Reset perforation auto skip

> Code: ESC O
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function:
Upon receipt of this code the printer resets the skip over perforation value to the
default value.
> Additional details:
Skip over perforation is set to default when power-down, power-up or l-Prime (or ESC
@ in Epson mode) occurs.
Skip over perforation is cleared when the form length is changed by the following
codes: ESC C n and ESC C NUL n.

Top of form set

> Code: ESC 4
> Compatibility: IBM
> Function:
Top of form setting will be set to the current position.
> Additional details:
This command does not affect the CSF or SASF.

Command descriptions > 222

Set vertical units
> Code: ESC [ \ 4 0 0 0 n1 n2
> Compatibility: IBM
> Function:
This command changes the base units for the line spacing command.
> Range:
n1 = 0, n2 = 180 for n/180 in units
n1 = 0, n2 = 216 for n/216 in units
> Out of Range:
Any value of n1, n2 other than those above will be ignored.

Cut sheet feeders single paper insert

> Code: ESC EM l
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function:
If CSF is installed, paper is fed from receiving this command. If CSF is not installed,
paper is not fed. If paper is loaded, the printer will eject the loaded sheet, and feed
another sheet to the TOF position.
FF code of (OC)H or (12)D is used to automatically feed the next paper from the
hopper.
Data that is in the print buffer is printed before new paper insertion.

Cut sheet feeders single paper eject

> Code: ESC EM R
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function:
If CSF is installed, paper in the printing path is ejected.
If CSF is not installed, paper cannot be fed.
Data that is in the print buffer is printed before the paper is ejected.

NOTE
An LF code at the end of the page will automatically load the next sheet.

Set n/360 inch fine line spacing

> Code: ESC + n
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
Sets line spacing to n/360 in.
> Range:
Range n = 0 – 255, Number of 1/360 in increments.
> Additional details:

Command descriptions > 223

 Power-on default or l-Prime signal resets the value set by this command and sets the
value which is determined by the Menu.
This command is valid in any group of lines.
No line feed occurs when n = 0.
Top of form will not be set.
> Related functions:
This command is identical to the ESC [ n command.
LF, VT, or CR (and Auto LF set on) precedes predetermined LF.

Set page length in defined unit

> Code: ESC (C Ln Hn Lp Hp
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
Set page length for the currently selected paper mode.
Paper modes are Top, Rear, Bottom and CSF
> Range:
Ln : 0 - 255, Hn : 0 - 255, Lp : 0 - 255, Hp : 0 - 255
Page Length = (Lp + Hp x 256) x defined unit
0 < Page Length <= 22 in.
> Additional details:
Default basic unit is 1/360 inch.
When the page length set by the command equals 0 or exceeds 22 in, the command
becomes invalid. Previously defined Page Length is effective.

Set page format

> Code: ESC (c Ln HN Lt Ht Lb Hb
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
Sets the Top and Bottom Margins in the defined unit.
> Range:
Ln : 0 - 255, Hn : 0 - 255, Lt : 0 - 255, Ht : 0 - 255, Lb : 0 - 255, Hb : 0 - 255
Top margin = (Lt + Ht x 256) x defined unit
Bottom margin = (Lb + Hb x 256) x defined unit
> Additional details:
Top margin < Bottom margin
Bottom margin <= 22 in

Command descriptions > 224

 Default unit is 1/360 in

Top margin

Page Printing Bottom

Length margin
Area

Set relative vertical print position

> Code: ESC (v Ln Hn Lp Hp
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
Execute relative vertical print position change by the basic unit stipulated by the unit
set command ESC ( U.
> Range:
Ln : 0 - 255 (FFH), Hn : 0 - 255 (FFH) makes MSB invalid, Lp : 0 - 255 (FFH),
Hp : 0 - 255 (FFH) makes MSB invalid.
Actual line feed value = (Lp + Hp x 256) x basic unit
In case of setting for reverse direction, actual line feed is set by a complement of 2.
> Additional details:
When the following value is selected, the setting with this command becomes invalid.
In forward direction: Value larger than approx. 46.2 in
In backward direction: Value larger than approx. 0.5 in

Set absolute vertical print position

> Code: ESC (V Ln Hn Lp Hp
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
Execute absolute vertical print position change by the basic unit stipulated with the
unit set command ESC ( U.
> Range:
Ln : 0 - 255 (FFH), Hn : 0 - 255 (FFH) makes MSB invalid, Lp : 0 - 255 (FFH),
Hp : 0 - 255 (FFH) makes MSB invalid.
Absolute position = (Lp + Hp x 256) x basic unit

Command descriptions > 225

> Additional details:
Depending on the value of the remainder, when the current position value is
subtracted from the absolute position value set as the TOF position, the printer
executes forward or backward line feed.
When value larger than approx. 46.2 in is selected, the setting by this command
becomes invalid.

Command descriptions > 226

CHARACTER SET

Copies ROM CG to RAM CG

> Code: ESC : 00 n 00
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
Upon receipt of this command, the printer copies the ROM CG to user defined
characters set in RAM.
> Range:
n = 00H, 30H, 80H, B0H – Roman
n = 01H, 31H, 81H, B1H – Swiss
n = 02H, 32H, 82H, B2H – Courier (Default font)
n = 03H, 33H, 83H, B3H – Prestige
n = 04H, 34H, 84H, B4H – Reserve
n = 05H, 35H, 85H, B5H - OCR B
n = 06H, 36H, 86H, B6H - OCR B
n = 07H, 37H, 87H, B7H – Orator
n = 08H, 38H, 88H, B8H – Reserve
n = 09H, 39H, 89H, B9H – Reserve
n = 0AH, 3AH, 8AH, BAH – Reserve
n = 0BH, 3BH, 8BH, BBH – Reserve
n = 0CH, 3CH, 8CH, BCH – Reserve
n = 0DH, 3DH, 8DH, BDH – Reserve
n = 0EH, 3EH, 8EH, BEH – Reserve
n = 0FH, 3FH, 8FH, BFH – Reserve
n = 10H – 2FH, 90H – AFH – Reserve
n = 40H – 79H, C0H – F9H – Reserve
n = 7AH, FAH – Swiss Bold
n = 7BH, FBH – Reserve
n = 7CH, FCH – Letter Gothic
n = 7DH, FDH – Reserve
n = 7EH, FEH – Conformed to Menu
n = 7FH, FFH – Reserve
> Additional details:
Address 20H – 7FH of ROM CG data will be transferred to the same address of RAM
CG area.
This command overwrites the previous DLL data.

Character definition
> Code: ESC & m n1 n2 d0 d1 d2 <DLL data>
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
Upon receipt of this command the printer defines user characters in RAM.
Mode of DLL data depends on the current print mode which is LQ, Draft or
Proportional.
> Range:
m selects the available area in RAM. Only available area is m = 0 or 128.
n1 = 00 – 127, Starting character location
n2 = n1 – 127, Ending character location

Command descriptions > 227

 Character width limits are shown as follows:
d0: leading space width
d1: character width
d2: trailing space width

MODE D1 (MAX) D0 + D1 + D2
(MAX)

Draft 15 18

LQ 37 42

PROPORTIONAL 37 42

> Out of range:

n1 = n2: One character loaded.
n1 > n2: Data up to n2 is dumped and this command is ignored.
80H <= n1, n2: Ignored from ESC to n2.
> Additional details:
To define a character, a grid that is 24 dots high is used, one dot for each wire. The
width of the character matrix is dependent upon the character set in use (i.e. LQ,
Draft or Proportional).
Dots in the same row may not print in adjacent columns. There must be an empty
dot position to the left and to the right of each dot that prints. This is true for Draft,
LQ, and Proportional. (See illustrations for character print positioning).
Each vertical column (which has a maximum of 24 dots) is first divided into three
groupings of 8 dots. Each group of 8 dots is represented by one byte.
DLL Data format is be sent in the following manner:

MSB

1 3 5 10 3m-2

b0~b7 valid as DLL Data

LSB
MSB
2 4 6 11 3m-1

b0~b7 valid as DLL Data

LSB
MSB
3 6 9 12 3m

b0~b7 valid as DLL Data

LSB
d0 d1 d2

d0 + d1 + d2 = cell matrix width

At loading time, if printer is in Super/Sub mode then only two bytes of data are
required for each column.

Command descriptions > 228

Load DLL character
> Code: ESC = n1 n2 # a1 a2 a3 m ad1 ad2 id1 id2 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 [data]
> Compatibility: IBM
> Function:
This sequence initiates character downloading.
> Range:
n1 = 0 – 255, Number of bytes in command string.
n2 = 0 – 255, N1 + n2 × 256
a1 = 0 – 255, Data starting address.
a2 = 0 – 255
a3 = 0 – 255
Character Pitch and mode.
m b0 – b3: 0X00 UTLALL, 0X01 LQ 10CPI, 0X10 LQ 12CPI, 0X11 LQ Proportional
m b6 = 0, last table
m b6 = 1, another table follows
ad1 = 0 – 255, character starting address.
ad2 = 0 – 255
id1 b0 – b5, 1 – 63, Number of loading columns.
id1 b6 = 0 (RAM), b6 = 1 (ROM-CG copy)
id1 b7 = 0, Normal
id1 b7 = 1, Elongated
id2 b0 – b5, 0 – 63 character Width (Valid in proportional)
id2 b6 – b7, 0 – 0, Data for pins 19-24, copy 25-30 pins
id2 b6 – b7, 0 – 1 = Data for pins 23, 24, duplicated for pins 25, 26, 27,28, 29, 30
id2 b6 – b7 1 – 0, Underline
id2 b6 – b7 1 – 1, No Elongation.
d1 = Repetition data for columns 1 – 8
d2 = Repetition data for columns 9 – 16
d3 = Repetition data for columns 17 – 24
d4 = Repetition data for columns 25 – 32
d5 = Repetition data for columns 33 – 40
0 = new data
1 = repeat previous column data.
> Additional details:
If fewer than 256 characters are loaded, all character codes must be consecutive from
the starting code point.
DLL characters are not saved after power is turned off.
This command makes a print block.
This command is broken into three parts:
1) ESC = n1 n2 # a1 a2 a3 m – once for each DLL sequence.
2) ad1 ad2 id1 id2 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 – repeated for each character.
3) Data – repeated for each character.

Command descriptions > 229

DLL font select
> Code: ESC % n
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
Selects the character set to be used.
> Range:
When n = 01H, 31H, 81H, B1H, DLL character set selected.
When n = 00H, 30H, 80H, B0H, DLL character set cancel.
> Out of range:
When n does not equal any of the values above, this command will be ignored.
> Additional details:
DLL character areas are 00H – 7FH.
If LQ DLL is loaded, LQ DLL will be selected.
If Draft DLL is loaded, Draft DLL will be selected.

Foreign character set select

> Code: ESC R n
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
Sets international character sets and code page.
“n” is defined in the table below.

Command descriptions > 230

> Range:

PN INTERNATIONAL PN INTERNATIONAL
CHARACTER SET CHARACTER SET

0 (00H) ASCII 11 (0BH) Spanish II

1 (01H) French 12 (0CH) Latin American

2 (02H) German 13 (0DH) French Canadian

3 (03H) British 14 (0EH) Dutch

4 (04H) Danish I 15 (0FH) Swedish II

5 (05H) Swedish I 16 (10H) Swedish III

6 (06H) Italian 17 (11H) Swedish IV

7 (07H) Spanish I 18 (12H) Turkish

8 (08H) Japanese 19 (13H) Swiss I

9 (09H) Norwegian 20 (14H) Swiss II

10 (0AH) Danish II 64 (40H) Publisher

PN CODE PAGE SET PN CODE PAGE SET

21 (15H) Cyrillic II-866 50 (32H) Windows Greek

22 (16H) Polska Mazovia 51 (33H) Latin 5 (Windows

Turkey)

23 (17H) ISO Latin2 52 (34H) Windows Cyrillic

24 (18H) Serbo Croatic I 54 (36H) Hungarian CWI

25 (19H) Serbo Croatic II 55 (37H) Kamenicky (MJK)

26 (1AH) Multilingual 850 57 (39H) Turkey 857

27 (1BH) Norway 865 58 (3AH) Roman-8

28 (1CH) Portugal 860 60 (3CH) Hebrew NC (862)

29 (1DH) Turkey 61 (3DH) Hebrew OC

30 (1EH) Greek ABG (Reserve) 62 (3EH) Windows Hebrew

31 (1FH) Greek ABC (Reserve) 63 (3FH) KBL-Lithuanian

32 (20H) Greek DEG (Reserve) 65 (41H) Arabic 864

33 (21H) Greek Quattro 66 (42H) Ukrainian

(Reserve)

34 (22H) Greek SYS 25 67 (43H) ISO Latin 6 (8859/

(Reserve) 10)

35 (23H) Greek ME 29 68 (44H) Windows Baltic

(Reserve)

36 (24H) Greek 927 mod 69 (45H) Cyrillic Latvian

(Reserve)

37 (25H) Greek 927 (Reserve) 72 (48H) Bulgarian

38 (26H) Greek 437 73 (49H) Icelandic-861

39 (27H) Greek 928 74 (4AH) Baltic 774

40 (28H) Greek 851 (Reserve) 78 (4EH) Asmo 708

Command descriptions > 231

 PN CODE PAGE SET PN CODE PAGE SET

41 (29H) Greek 437 CYPRUS 79 (4FH) Asmo 449+

42 (2AH) ECMA-94 80 (50H) BRASCII

43 (2BH) Canada French 81 (51H) Abicomp

44 (2CH) Cyrillic I - 855 82 (52H) ISO8859-15

45 (2DH) Cyrillic II - 866 83 (53H) Multilingual858

46 (2EH) East europe Latin II - 84 (54H) Windows Arabic

852

47 (2FH) Greek 869 85 (55H) Greek_737

49 (31H) Windows East Europe 86 (56H) POL 1

87 (57H) Macedonian

> Out of range:

If n does not equal one of the values above this command will be ignored and the last
setting will remain.
> Additional details:
Once you have selected a specific language you can use its special characters.
Each language has a set of 15 characters which can be accessed through the following
decimal numbers:
35 36 38 64 79 91 92 93 94 95 96 123 133 124 125 126
In the following cases, the international character set and code page selected by
Menu are set.
– ESC @ is received.
– I-Prime is received.
– Power-up or Menu
– Software I-Prime command (ESC } NUL) is received.
– Emulation change command (ESC { Pn) is received. (except same emulation)
- Printer reset function is executed by switch.
– See below for exact substitution character sets.

Select international character set

> Code: ESC ! n
> Compatibility: IBM
> Function:
The foreign language character set designated by n is substituted for the standard
characters on receiving this command.

Command descriptions > 232

> Range:

N(H) FOREIGN N(H) FOREIGN

LANGUAGE LANGUAGE

40 American Ø 4A French
Canadian

41 American 0 4B Spanish

42 British 4C Swedish II

43 German 4D Swedish III

44 French 4E Swedish IV

45 Swedish I 4F Turkish

46 Danish 50 Swiss I

47 Norwegian 51 Swiss II

48 Dutch 5A Publisher

49 Italian

Select character table

> Code: ESC t n
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
Upon receipt of this code, the printer selects a character table in address 128D to
255D, either line graphics, italics characters or DLL.
> Range:
n = 00, 30, 80, B0H … selects Italics character table.
n = 01, 31, 81, B1H … selects Epson Graphics character table.
n = 02, 32, 82, B2H … remaps DLL 0 – 127 into 128 – 255.
> Out of range:
Values other than above will be ignored.
> Additional details:
ESC 4 also selects italics printing.

Enable upper ASCII characters

> Code: ESC 6
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
To assign characters to the upper ASCII region 80H – 9FH.
> Additional details:
80H – 9FH will not be treated as control codes. Characters are assigned.
> Related functions:
ESC t 1 must be used prior to this command to select IBM character set II from Epson
mode.

Command descriptions > 233

Select character set II
> Code: ESC 7
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
To enable the upper ASCII region to function in the same manner as the lower ASCII
control codes.
> Additional details:
80H – 9FH will be treated as control codes 00H – 1FH.
> Related functions:
ESC t 1 must be used prior to this command to select IBM character set II.

Print continuously from all characters chart

> Code: ESC \ n1 n2
> Compatibility: IBM
> Function:
This command allows the printing of all codes received including control codes.
> Range:
n1 and n2 are equal to the total number of characters.
i.e. total count = n1 + (n2*256)

Print one character from all characters chart

> Code: ESC ^ n
> Compatibility: IBM
> Function:
This command will allow the printing of the next character in the all characters chart.
> Additional details:
Only one character is printed.
This command can be used to print control codes.

Select character set I

> Code: ESC 7
> Compatibility: IBM
> Function:
Selects IBM character set I.

Select character set II

> Code: ESC 6
> Compatibility: IBM
> Function:
Upon receipt of this code, the printer selects character set II

Command descriptions > 234

> Additional details:
80H – 9FH will not be treated as control codes. Characters are assigned.
> Related functions:
ESC t 1 must be used prior to this command to select IBM character set II from Epson
mode.

Code page select

> Code: ESC [T Ln Hn NUL NUL Hcp Lcp NUL
> Compatibility: IBM
> Function:
Sets code page.
> Range:
Ln and Hn designate the data quantity after Ln and Hn.
Ln: 0 – 255
Hn: 0 – 255
Data quantity = (Ln + Hn x 256)
(Ln + Hn x 255) <= 3: The command is ignored and data is dumped.
NUL 0 – 255
Hcp and Lcp designate ID No. of code page.
Hcp: 0 – 255
Lcp: 0 – 255
ID No. = (Hcp x 256 + Lcp)
ID Nos. and code pages are as listed below:

ID (HCP, LCP) CODE PAGE REMARK

437 (1B5H) USA

449 (1C1H) Asmo 449+

708 (2C4H) Asmo 708

737 (2E1H) Greek_737

774 (306H) Baltic 774

850 (352H) Multilingual

852 (354H) East Europe Latin II - 852

855 (357H) Cyrillic I - 855

857 (359H) Turkey 857

858 (35AH) Multilingual858

860 (35CH) Portugual

861 (35DH) Icelandic-861

862 (35EH) Hebrew NC (862) (same as 406)

863 (35FH) Canada French

864 (360H) Arabic 864

865 (361H) Norway

866 (362H) Cyrillic II - 866

Command descriptions > 235

ID (HCP, LCP) CODE PAGE REMARK

869 (365H) Greek 869

895 (37FH) Kamenickey (MJK)

1000 (3E8H) Greek ABG (Reserve)

1001 (3E9H) Greek ABC (Reserve)

1002 (3EAH) Greek DEC (Reserve)

1003 (3EBH) Greek Quattro (Reserve)

1004 (3ECH) Greek SYS 25 (Reserve)

1005 (3EDH) Greek ME 29 (Reserve)

1006 (3EEH) Greek 927 mod (Reserve)

1007 (3EFH) Greek 927 (Reserve)

1008 (3F0H) Greek 437

1009 (3F1H) Greek 928

1010 (3F2H) Greek 851 (Reserve)

1011 (3F3H) Greek 437 CYPRUS

1012 (3F4H) Turkey

1013 (3F5H) Cyrillic II - 866 (same as 866)

1014 (3F6H) Polska Mazovia

1015 (3F7H) ISO Latin 2

1016 (3F8H) Serbo Croatic I

1017 (3F9H) Serbo Croatic II

1018 (3FAH) ECMA-94

1019 (3FBH) Windows East Europe

1020 (3FCH) Windows Greek

1021 (3FDH) Windows Turkey

1022 (3FEH) Windows Cyrillic

1024 (400H) Hungarian CWI

1027 (403H) Ukrainian

1028 (404H) Roman-8

1029 (405H) ISO Latin6 (8859/10)

1030 (406H) Hebrew NC

1031 (407H) Hebrew OC

1032 (408H) Windows Hebrew

1033 (409H) KBL-Lithuanian

1034 (40AH) Windows Baltic

1035 (40BH) Cyrillic Latvian

1040 (410H) BRASCII

1041 (411H) Abicomp

Command descriptions > 236

 ID (HCP, LCP) CODE PAGE REMARK

1072 (430H) Bulgarian

1081 (439H) ISO8859-15

1086 (43EH) POL 1

1087 (43FH) Macedonian

1256 (4E8H) Windows Arabic

The command is ignored and data is dumped if there is no code page for the ID No.
selected by Hcp and Lcp.
> Additional details:
A code page other than USA is not converted into international characters.

Assign character table

> Code: ESC ( t Ln Hn Pn1 Pn2 Pn3
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
This command stores the character table selected by Pn2 and Pn3 in the area
stipulated by Pn1.
> Range:
Range of Ln, Hn
Ln: 0 – 255
Hn: 0 – 255
Data quantity = Ln + (Hn x 256)
Pn1: 0 – 255
With Pn1, maximum of 4 tables may be selected.
Pn1 = Pn of ESC t Pn.
Pn2: 0 – 255
Pn3: 0 – 255
For combinations of Pn2 and Pn3, specific character tables are selected.

PN2 PN3 CHARACTER TABLE

0 0 Italic

1 0 PC437 (USA)

3 0 PC850 (Multilingual)

7 0 PC860 (Portugal)

8 0 PC863 (Canada-French)

9 0 PC865 (Norway)

25 0 BRASCII

26 0 Abicomp

Command descriptions > 237

Select character table
> Code: FS I n
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
Upon receipt of this code, the printer selects a character table in address 128D to
255D, either line graphics or italics characters.
> Range:
n = 00H, 30H, 80H, B0H … selects Epson italics character table.
n = 01H, 31H, 81H, B1H … selects Epson graphics character table.
> Out of range:
Values other than above will be ignored.
> Additional details:
ESC 4 also selects italics printing.

Set unit
> Code: ESC ( U Ln Hn Pn(b)
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
Sets the Unit to Pn/3600 inch.
> Range:
Range of Ln and Hn
Ln : 0 ~ 255
Hn : 0 ~ 255
Data quantity = Ln + (Hn*256)
With Pn, basic unit is selected.
Pn : 0 ~ 255

PN UNIT

0 <= Pn <= 9 No change

10 <= Pn <= 19 1/360 inch

20 <= Pn <= 29 1/180 inch

30 <= Pn <= 39 1/120 inch

40 <= Pn <= 49 1/90 inch

50 <= Pn <= 59 1/72 inch

60 <= Pn <= 69 1/60 inch

70 <= Pn <= 127 No change

Commands affected with this command and the default basic unit is as below:
ESC ( c (SET PAGE FORMAT) 1/360 inch
ESC ( C (PAGE LENGTH IN DEFINED UNIT) 1/360 inch
ESC $ (ABSOLUTE HORIZONTAL DOT POSITION) 1/60 inch

Command descriptions > 238

 ESC \ (RELATIVE HORIZONTAL DOT POSITION) LQ mode – 1/80 inch, Draft mode –
1/120 inch
ESC ( V (SET ABSOLUTE VERTICAL POSITION) 1/360 inch
ESC ( V (SET RELATIVE VERTICAL POSITION) 1/360 inch

Select incremental print mode

> Code: ESC i n
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function:
Set / Reset the Incremental Print mode
> Range:
Range n = 01H, 31H, 81H, B1H selects Incremental mode.
Range n = 00H, 30H, 80H, B0H reset Incremental mode.

Select font by pitch and point

> Code: ESC X Pn Lp Hp
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
Sets the printer in multi-point (scalable font) mode, and selects the pitch and point
attributes of the font.
> Range:
Pn = 0 ~ 255 (FFH)
Lp, Hp = 0 ~ 255 (FFH)
Pitch:
Pn = 0H No change in pitch
Pn = 1H Selects proportional spacing
2H = Pn = 4H Makes this command invalid
Pn > 5H Selects fixed pitch equal to 360/Pn cpi
Point size:
Lp + Hp × 255
(point size) =
2

Character pitch at the time of proportional spacing

Normal script
Character pitch = 360
(CPI)
(point) × (standard width)
INT + 0.5)
10.5

Superscript/subscript
Character Pitch = 360
(CPI)
INT (point × 2/3) × (standard width)
INT + 0.5)
10.5

Standard width: proportional width at the time of 10.5 point

Command descriptions > 239

Select font by pitch and point
> Code: ESC DLE F Pno Pn Lp Hp
> Compatibility: IBM
> Function:
Sets the printer in multipoint (scalable font) mode, and selects the pitch and point
attributes of the font.
> Range:
Pno … 0 ~ 255 (FFH) Makes MSB invalid.
Pno < 2 … Makes this command invalid.
Pno > 3 … Upon receiving Lp and Hp, Pno-3 bytes data is discarded.
Pn … 0 ~ 255 (FFH) Makes MSB invalid.
Lp, Hp 0 ~ 255 (FFH)
Pitch Pn = 0
Pn = 1 Proportional spacing
2H <= Pn <= 4, 82H <= Pn <= 84H Makes this command invalid. Data in the
range stipulated by Pne is discarded.
360 CPI
Character pitch =
Pn

Point size (point size) =

Lp + Hp × 255
2

Command descriptions > 240

FONT DESCRIPTION

Select character font

> Code: ESC x n
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
Selects the print quality mode to be used.
> Range:
Range n = 01H, 31H, 81, B1H selects LQ character font.
Range n = 00H, 30H, 80H, B0H selects Draft character font.
> Out of range:
This command will be ignored when the value n is not one of the values above.
> Additional details:
LQ and Draft modes are printed in 10, 12, 15, 17.1, and 20 CPI.
Proportional mode does not work in any mode but LQ.
If Draft, DLL, or Proportional modes are selected the result will be LQ, proportional
printing, based on the Priority chart.

Select type styles

> Code: ESC k n
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function:
Upon receipt of this command the printer will select an LQ type style.
> Range:

00H, 30H, 80H, B0H Roman

01H, 31H, 81H, B1H Swiss

02H, 32H, 82H, B2H Courier

03H, 33H, 83H, B3H Prestige

04H, 34H, 84H, B4H OCR-B

05H, 35H, 85H, B5H OCR-A

06H, 36H, 86H, B6H [Reserve]

07H, 37H, 87H, B7H Orator

08H, 38H, 88H, B8H [Reserve]

09H, 39H, 89H, B9H [Reserve]

0AH, 3AH, 8AH, BAH [Reserve]

0BH, 3BH, 8BH, BBH [Reserve]

0CH, 3CH, 8CH, BCH [Reserve]

0DH, 3DH, 8DH, BDH [Reserve]

0EH, 3EH, 8EH, BEH [Reserve]

0FH, 3FH, 8FH, BFH [Reserve]

Command descriptions > 241

 10H – 2FH, 90H – AFH [Reserve]

40H – 79H, C0H – F9H [Reserve]

7AH, FAH Swiss Bold

7BH, FBH [Reserve]

7CH, FCH Gothic

7DH, FDH [Reserve]

7EH, FEH Menu Setting

7FH, FFH [Reserve]

> Additional details:

The default LQ font is Courier.
Typestyles can also be selected through the Menu or operator panel.
All typestyles are available in all pitches and features.

Set/reset proportional spacing

> Code: ESC p n
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
Sets/resets the character pitch to proportional mode in LQ print quality mode.
> Range:
Range n = 01H, 31H, 81H, or B1H SET Proportional Spacing
Range n = 00H, 30H, 80H, or B0H RESET Proportional Spacing
> Out of range:
If n does not equal any of the above values this command is ignored.
> Additional details:
Proportional printing is only available in LQ print quality.
The previous print mode (print quality and pitch) will be maintained and restored on
resetting proportional spacing.
Proportional spacing can also be designed by ESC ! n, the master select command.
Proportional spacing set by ESC ! n can be reset by ESC p 0.

Set/reset proportional spacing

> Code: ESC P n
> Compatibility: IBM
> Function:
This command sets/resets LQ proportional width characters.
> Range:
n = ODD, SET proportional spacing.
n = EVEN, RESET proportional spacing.
> Additional details:
Proportional spacing is only available in LQ mode.

Command descriptions > 242

 LQ Proportional mode has priority over other print qualities and character pitches.
Upon cancellation of Proportional mode, the printer is set to the previous pitch in LQ
mode.

Set pica character pitch (10 CPI)

> Code: ESC P
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
Change character pitch to 10 CPI.
> This command will not cancel double width mode.
Pitch changes can be allowed within a line
10 CPI is the factory default for character pitch.
In the compress mode, 17.1 CPI is selected.

Set 10 CPI
> Code: DC2
> Compatibility: IBM
> Function:
This command will turn on the 10 CPI mode.
> Additional details:
Upon receiving another pitch command this mode will be turned off.
Printing does not start if DC2 is received during 10 CPI mode.
Character pitch commands become effective immediately upon receipt, thereby
allowing a pitch change within a line.
This command will not cancel double width mode.

Set elite character pitch (12 CPI)

> Code: ESC M
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
Change character pitch to 12 CPI.
> Related functions.
Factory default setting is 10 CPI.
This command does not cancel double width mode.
A pitch change command is allowed at any point in the line.
In the compress mode, 20 CPI is selected.

Command descriptions > 243

Set 12 CPI
> Code: ESC :
> Compatibility: IBM
> Function:
This command will turn on the 12 CPI mode.
However in the following cases, either CPI is selected according to the setting of menu
item “SI Select (12 CPI)”:
17.1 CPI active … 12 CPI or 20 CPI
20 CPI active … 12 CPI or 20 CPI
> Additional details:
Upon receiving another pitch command, this mode will be turned off.
Printing does not start if ESC : is received during 12 CPI mode.
Character pitch commands become effective immediately upon receipt, thereby
allowing pitch change within a line.
This command will not cancel double width mode.

Set 15 character per inch

> Code: ESC g
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function:
Change character pitch to 15 CPI.
> Additional details:
Factory default setting is 10 CPI.
This command does not cancel double width mode.
A pitch change command can be allowed at any point in the line.
> Related function:
Compress command is ignored (SI and ESC SI).

Set compressed character pitch (17.1/20 CPI)

> Code: SI
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function
The character pitch becomes 17.1 CPI or 20 CPI after receiving this command.
EPSON:
17.1 CPI = compressed + 10 CPI
20 CPI = compressed + 12 CPI
IBM
If this command is received during active CPI as listed below, the associated CPI is
selected according to the setting of the menu item SI Select (10 CPI) and SI Select
(12 CPI).
10 CPI active ............. 17.1 CPI
12 CPI active ............. 12 CPI

Command descriptions > 244

 15 CPI active ............. 17.1 CPI
17.1 CPI active .......... 17.1 CPI
20 CPI active ............. 17.1 CPI
> Additional details:
Factory default setting is 10 CPI.
This command does not cancel double width mode.
A pitch change command can be allowed at any point in the line.
> Related functions:
ESC SI and SI are identical in function for Epson mode.

Set compressed character pitch (17.1/20 CPI)

> Code:ESC SI
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function:
The character pitch becomes 17.1 CPI or 20 CPI after receiving this command.
EPSON
17.1 CPI = compressed + 10 CPI
20 CPI = compressed + 12 CPI
IBM
20 CPI
> Additional details:
Factory default setting is 10 CPI.
This command does not cancel double width mode.
A pitch change command can be allowed at any point in the line.
> Related functions:
ESC SI and SI are identical in function for Epson.

Reset compressed character pitch

> Code: DC2
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
Upon receipt of this code, the printer turns Compressed mode off.
Pitch will reset to 10 CPI when in 17.1 CPI.
Pitch will reset to 12 CPI when in 20 CPI.

Set character spacing

> Code: ESC SP n
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
Upon receipt of this command the printer determines the amount of space to be
added to the right of each character (specified in dots).

Command descriptions > 245

> Range:
Range n = 0 – 255. Bit 7 is ignored.
> Additional details:
n is the number of dots to be added to the right of each character.
In double width mode, the value of clearance will be automatically doubled.
Dots width of clearance depends on DPI in each Print Quality.

Set italic characters

> Code: ESC 4
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
Select the alternate character set and print all characters in Italics mode.
> Additional details:
Italics characters are printed using a slant algorithm.
See priority table for detail command combination.
Italic characters may be overlapped on the next character cell.
Base of each italics cell is pin no. 24.
> Related functions:
This mode can also be selected by the ESC ! n command.

Reset italic characters

> Code: ESC 5
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
Italics mode is turned off upon receipt of this command.
> Related functions:
This mode can also be reset by the ESC ! n command.

Set italic character

> Code: ESC % G
> Compatibility: IBM
> Function:
Prints italics characters on receiving this command.
For details of italics characters printed by this command, see “Appendix B – Print
modes/features” on page 311.
> Additional details:
Fifty patterns, (B0)H – (DF)H and (F4)H(F5), structured by vertical 30 dots and line
graphics, cannot be italicised.

Command descriptions > 246

Reset italic characters
> Code: ESC % H
> Compatibility: IBM
> Function:
Releases Italic character printing on receiving this command.

Select font
> Code: ESC [ I Ln Hn Hfid Lfid Hfwd Lfwd fa Null Hcp Lcp
> Compatibility: IBM
> Function:
Sets font typeface, character pitch, spacing attributes and code page.
> Range:
Ln and Hn set the parameter bytes after Ln and Hn.
Ln, Hn = Ln + Hn × 256 (Byte)
Valid range
0H <= Ln, Hn <= FFFFH
Ln, Hn <= 01H................... Makes this command invalid.
Ln, Hn = 02H, 03H.............. Makes fid setting valid and keeps the other
modes unchanged.
Ln, Hn <= 04H................... Makes fid and fwd settings valid and keeps
fa mode unchanged.
Ln, Hn = 05H, 06H, 07H...... Makes fid, fwd and fa settings valid and
keeps cp unchanged.
Ln, Hn = 08H..................... Makes all of fid, fwd, fa and cp settings
valid.
Ln, Hn >= 09H................... Makes all of fid, fwd, fa and cp settings
valid, and receives and discards parameter
data after 9 byte.

The font ID designated by Hfid and Lfid sets a font typeface.

Hfid, Lfid = Hfid × 256 + Lfid
Valid range 01H <= Hfid, Lfid <= FFFFH

Command descriptions > 247

Typeface setting is invalid if Hfid, Lfid = OOH. Setting is also invalid if font ID not
listed in the table on next page is set.

Font ID Set Font ID Set

Font Name (Target Pr) Font Name (Target Pr)
(Hfid-Lfid) Typeface (Hfid-Lfid) Typeface
008 Courier Symbol 10 084 Script 12
011 Courier 10 200 Script PS
018 Courier 10 Italic 292 Script 24
046 Courier 10 Bold 468 Script 10
* Script
049 Courier 10/10 Shalom 469 Script 12
057 Courier 10 Bold Italic 470 Script 15
085 Courier 12 471 Script 17
092 Courier 12 Italic 472 Script 20
098 Courier 12/12 Shalom 003 OCR-B 10 OCR-B
108 Courier 12 Bold
116 Courier 12 Bold Italic 019 OCR-A 10 OCR-A
171 Courier PS 005 Orator 10
172 Courier PS Italic 198 Orator PS
184 Courier PS Bold 289 Orator 24
185 Courier PS Bold Italic 459 Orator 12 Orator
Courier
214 Courier 15 Bold 460 Orator 15
215 Courier 15 Italic 461 Orator 17
216 Courier 15 Bold Italic 462 Orator 20
223 Courier 15 036 Gothic 10
226 Courier 15/15 Shalom 087 Letter Gothic 12
244 Courier 10 DW DH 109 Gothic 12 Italic
245 Courier 10 DW DH Bold 110 Gothic 12 Bold
246 Courier 10 DW DH 157 Gothic PS Bold
253 Courier 17 Bold 162 Gothic PS Italic
254 Courier 17 174 Gothic PS
286 Courier 24 222 Gothic 15
491 Courier 12 241 Gothic 10 DW DH
492 Courier 15 Gothic
242 Gothic 10 DW DH Bold
493 Courier 17 243 Gothic 10 DW DH
494 Courier 20 255 Gothic 17
012 Prestige Pica 10 281 Gothic 20
060 Prestige 10 Bold 288 Gothic 24
080 Prestige Elite Symbol 12 396 Gothic 20
086 Prestige Elite 12 397 Gothic 17
100 Prestige Elite 12/12 Yas- 398 Gothic 15
min 399 Gothic 12
111 Prestige 12 Bold 155 Boldface Italic PS
112 Prestige 12 Italic 159 Boldface PS
Prestige Roman
164 Prestige PS 166 Boldface PS/PS Yasmin
221 Prestige 15 167 Boldface PS/PS Barak
256 Prestige 17
287 Prestige 24
457 Prestige 17
458 Prestige 20
495 Prestige 12
496 Prestige 15

*Note: When this is not present in the resident CG the Printer eventually
prints with Courier.

Command descriptions > 248

Hfwd and Lfwd set character pitch (CPI).
Hfwd, Lfwd = Hfwd × 256 + Lfwd
Character pitch = Hfwd, Lfwd inch (unit: 1/1440”)
1440
Valid range
01HHfwd, LfwdFFFFH
The character pitch does not change if Hfwd, Lfwd = 0H.

HFWD-LFWD SPEC.VALUE SET CPI

0090H~FFFFH 90H 10CPI

0078H~008FH 78H 12CPI

0060H~0077H 60H 15CPI

0054H~005FH 54H 17CPI

000CH~0053H 48H 20CPI

0001H~000BH - Proportional

The fa sets the following spacing attributes.

fa = 02H: Prints with proportional regardless of CPI set by Hfwd, Lfwd.
fa ≠ 02H: Prints with CPI set by Hfwd, Lfwd.
The font ID designated by Hfid and Lfid sets a font typeface.
00 <= Hfid, Lfid <= 0FFFFH

Command descriptions > 249

Code Page ID (Hfid-Lfid) (Hex) Code Page Name
1B5 USA
1C1 Asmo 449+
2C4 Asmo 708
2E1 Greek_737
306 Baltic_774
352 Multilingual
354 East Europe Latin II-852
357 Cyrillic I-855
359 Turkey_857
360 Arabic 864
35A Multilingual 858
35C Portugal
35D Icelandic-861
35E Hebrew NC (862)
35F Canada French
361 Norway
362 Cyrillic II-866
365 Greek_869
37F Kamenicky (MJK)
3F0 Greek_439
3F1 Greek_928
3F3 Greek_437 CYPRUS
3F4 Turkey
3F5 Cyrillic II-866
3F6 Polska Mozovia
3F7 ISO Latin 2
3F8 Serbo Croatic I
3F9 Serbo Croatic II
3FA ECMA-94
3FB Windows East Europe
3FC Windows Greek
3FD Latin 5 (Windows Turkey)
3FE Windows Gyrillic
400 Hungarian CWI
403 Ukrainian
404 Roman-8
405 ISO Latin 6 (8859/10)
406 Hebrew NC (862)
407 Hebrew OC
408 Windows Hebrew
409 KBL-Lithuanian
40A Windows Baltic
40B Cyrillic Latvian
410 BRASCII
411 Abicomp
430 Bulgarian
439 ISO 8859-15
4E8 Windows Arabic

Command descriptions > 250

Set print quality
> Code: ESC [ d Ln Hn Pn
> Compatibility: IBM
> Function: Sets print quality.
> Range:
00H <= Ln·Hn <= FFFFH
00H <= Pn <= FFH
> Additional details:
Sets the parameter bytes after Ln·Hn by Ln·Hn.
Parameter bytes = Ln + Hn × 256(byte)
When Ln + Hn x 256 > 2, data of (Ln + Hn × 256) – 1 byte is received and discarded
after receiving Pn.
Meaning of Pn is shown in the table below.

PN MEANING

00H Invalid

01H ~ 3FH HSD

40H ~ 7FH Draft

80H ~ FFH LQ

FFH Follows the menu setting

Select font
> Code: ESC y Pn
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
Selects HSD font or UTL font.
> Range:
00Hf”Pnf”FFH
> Additional details:
When Pn = 00H, 30H, 80H, B0H, selects UTL (normal) font.
When Pn = 01H, 31H, 81H, B1H, selects HSD (high speed) font.
This command is only valid in Draft and HSD mode and is suppressed in LQ mode.

Command descriptions > 251

Print quality – select HSD
> Code: ESC # 0
> Compatibility: IBM
> Function:
Select High Speed Draft Character Set.
> Additional details:
If inter-character clearance is defined while the High Speed Draft (HSD) mode is
selected, additional blank dot columns will be suppressed.
The HSD mode will be suppressed during proportional print mode.
Accessible addresses:
03H – 06H
15H
20H – 7FH
80H – AFH
E0H – F3H
F6H – FFH
Other areas will not be printed in High Speed draft mode.
See “Appendix B – Print modes/features” on page 311 for UTL & LQ Print Mode/
Features Combination Priority Charts.

Print quality – select HSD

> Code: ESC ( n
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
Select High Speed Draft Character Set.
> Range: n = 00H, 30H, 80H, or B0H HSD is selected.
If n has any other value, the current mode will remain effective.
> Additional details:
If inter-character clearance is defined while the High Speed Draft (HSD) mode is
selected, additional blank dot columns will be suppressed.
The HSD mode will be suppressed during the proportional print mode.
Accessible addresses:
03 – 06H
15H
20H – 7FH
80H – AFH
EOH – F3H
F6H – FFH
Other addresses will not be printed in High Speed draft mode.
See “Appendix B – Print modes/features” on page 311 for UTL & LQ Print Mode/
Features Combination Priority Charts.

Command descriptions > 252

TEXT PRINT FEATURES

Set/reset underlining
> Code: ESC — n
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function:
Starts/stops underlining of all text, including spaces and punctuation, received after
this command.
> Range:
Range n:

EPSON IBM ACTION

01H, 31H, 81H, B1H ODD SET underline

00H, 30H, 80H, B0H EVEN RESET underline

> Out of range:

This command will be ignored if n has any value other than the values mentioned
above.
> Additional details:
The underline is printed at the same time as the character is printed.
Underline prints using:
pins 23 and 24 for Normal/Sup/Sub text modes
pins 22 – 24 for double height.
Graphics printing and line graphics symbols are not underlined.
Space by HT will not be underlined.

Set subscript/superscript
> Code: ESC S n
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function:
The characters received after the set command will be printed in Super/Subscript
position.
> Range:
Range n:

EPSON IBM ACTION

01H, 31H, 81H, B1H ODD SET subscript

00H, 30H, 80H, B0H EVEN SET superscript

> Out of range:

This command will be ignored if n has any value other than the values mentioned
above.

Command descriptions > 253

> Additional details:
Super/Subscripts can be printed in double height mode.
> Related functions:
Super/Subscripts printing will be cancelled by receiving a reset command ESC T.

Reset super/subscript
> Code: ESC T
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function:
Cancels the Super/Subscript printing command.

Set emphasised print mode

> Code: ESC E
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function:
Characters will be printed in horizontally shifted double dot print mode.
> Additional details:
Emphasised mode is printed at half speed.
Emphasised printing can be selected at the same time as enhanced printing.
This command does not start the printer printing.
> Related functions:
Emphasised printing can also be selected by the ESC ! n command in the Epson mode.

Reset emphasised print mode

> Code: ESC F
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function:
Emphasised printing mode is cancelled on receiving this command.
> Additional details:
Emphasised mode stays on until it is turned off by this command.
> Related functions:
This command also resets Emphasised mode set by ESC ! n, in Epson mode.

Set double strike print mode

> Code: ESC G
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function:
Characters will be printed with each dot double struck.

Command descriptions > 254

> Additional details:
Double strike printing can be selected at the same time as emphasised printing.
This command does not make the printer start to print.
Enhanced print mode is printed in two-pass printing.
> Related functions:
Enhanced printing can also be set by the ESC ! n command, for Epson mode.

Reset double strike mode

> Code: ESC H
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function:
Double strike print mode is cancelled on receiving this command.
> Related functions:
Enhanced mode set by ESC ! n will be reset by ESC H (Epson mode).

Set double or expanded characters

> Code: ESC W n
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function:
This command sets/resets double width printing.
> Range:
Range n:

EPSON IBM ACTION

01H, 31H, 81H, B1H ODD SET double width

00H, 30H, 80H, B0H EVEN RESET double width

> Out of range:

This command will be ignored if n equals any value other than the values mentioned
above.
> Additional details:
Can be used with any character pitch.
Although dot spacing remains unchanged, double width mode produces half as many
characters per inch for any pitch.
> Related functions:
This mode can also be set by the ESC ! n command (Epson mode).

Set immediate double width characters

> Code: SO
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function:
Characters received after this command will be printed in double width for the length
of the line.

Command descriptions > 255

> Additional details:
The double width characters are only printed for the length of one line and then the
printer returns to the previous mode.
> Related functions:
If SO and ESC W 1 are active, ESC W 1 will take precedence.
SO can be cancelled by DC4, ESC W 0, ESC ! n, LF or CR + FF.

Set immediate double width characters

> Code: ESC SO
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
Characters received after this command will be printed in double width for the length
of the line.
> Additional details:
The double width characters are only printed for the length of one line and then the
printer returns to the previous mode.
> Related functions:
This function duplicates the SO command.

Reset immediate double width characters

> Code: DC4
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function:
Double width characters print mode is cancelled by this command.
> Related functions:
Does not cancel double width set by ESC W n or ESC ! n.
Only cancels double width mode set by SO or ESC SO (Epson mode only).

Set/reset double height characters

> Code: ESC US n
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
Characters will be printed twice as high after receiving this command.
> Range:
n = 00H, 30H, 80H, B0H – RESET double height printing.
n = 01H, 31H, 81H, B1H – SET double height printing.
> Additional details:
This command applies to all characters.
Double height can be mixed with standard height characters in the same line. The
Double height characters will be printed two times as high from the same base line
as the standard height.
Double height characters are printed uni-directionally in two passes.

Command descriptions > 256

 Underline in double height will be 4 dots below.
This command duplicates the ESC w n command.

Set/reset double height characters

> Code: ESC w n
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
Characters will be printed twice as high after receiving this command.
> Range:
n = 00H, 30H, 80H, B0H – RESET double height printing.
n = 01H, 31H, 81H, B1H – SET double height printing.
> Additional details:
This command applies to all characters.
Double height can be mixed with standard height characters in the same line. The
double height characters will be printed twice as high from the same base line as the
standard height.
Double height characters are printed uni-directionally in two passes.
Underline in double height will be 3 dots high.

Set/reset double height characters

> Code: ESC [ @ n1 n2 m1 m2 m3 m4
> Compatibility: IBM
> Function:
Upon receipt of this command, characters will be printed twice as high as standard
characters.
> Range:
The variables n1 and n2 specify the number of mode bytes in the command. Normally
n1 = 4 and n2 = 0.
The variables “m” control the mode: m1 = 0 m2 = 0
The values of m3 and m4 are defined as follows:
m3 = 0 0 N N 0 0 N N, m4 = 0 0 0 0 0 0 N N
m3 = line spacing/height, m4 = 0/character width
NN = 00, no change
NN = 01, standard
NN = 10, double
> Additional details
This command can be used with a double width command to print double size
characters.
Double height can be mixed with standard height characters in the same line. The
double height characters will be printed twice as high from the same base line as the
standard height characters.

Command descriptions > 257

Overscore set/reset
> Code: ESC _ n
> Compatibility: IBM
> Function:
Prints a continuous line (overscore) above the characters designated.
> Range:
n = ODD, SET overscore mode
n = EVEN, RESET overscore mode
> Additional details:
Spaces specified by HT will not be overscored.

Select character style

> Code: ESC q n
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function:
Characters will be printed with the style defined by the variable n. These styles
include outline and shadow print.
> Range:
n = 00H, 30H, 80H, B0H, SET Normal style.
n = 01H, 31H, 81H, B1H, SET Outline style.
n = 02H, 32H, 82H, B2H, SET Shadow style.
n = 03H, 33H, 83H, B3H, SET Outline with Shadow style.
> Out of range:
Values other than those specified will be ignored.
> Additional details:
This feature does not work with line graphics.
Characters are algorithmically produced.

Selects score style

> Code: ESC ( - Ln Hn Pn D1 D2
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
This command selects score.
> Range:
Ln, Hn … Designates data quantity after Ln, Hn.
Ln, Hn = Ln + × 256 (Byte)
Ln, Hn < 3: Data within the range set by Ln, Hn is dumped.
Pn = 01H

Command descriptions > 258

 If Pn is other than 01H, data within the range set by Ln, Hn is dumped.
D1 … Selects the kind of score.
D1 = 01H Underline
D1 = 02H Strike through
D1 = 03H Overscore
Except the above specified, data within the range set by Ln, Hn is dumped.
D2 … Selects score attributes.
b7 b0

00 : Cancels score mode set by D1.

01 : Selects a single line for score
set by D1.
10 : Selects double lines for score
set by D1.
11 : Selects double lines for score
set by D1.
0 : Selects continuous line for
score set by D1.
1 : Selects a dash line for score
set by D1.

> Additional details:

Even after the score line mode is cancelled, the continuous line/dash line mode can
be set, and the double line mode changes to single line mode.
The underline, strike through and overscore can coexist with each other, and any one
can designate another score type.
No score can be added to bit image graphics, integral (F4H, F5H) and line graphics.
No score is added to spaces generated by horizontal tab.

Set horizontal motion index (HMI)

> Code: ESC c Lp Hp
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function: Set a horizontal motion index (HMI) between characters.
> Range:
Hp = 0 ~ 155 (FFH) bit 5 through 7 are invalid.
HMI = Lp + Hp × 256 inch
360
When Lp=Hp=O, the command becomes invalid and the previous setting is still valid.
Range from 1/360 to 3 inch is available for setting.
(LP + Hp × 256)/360 > 3 inch, the command becomes invalid and the previous
setting is still valid.

Command descriptions > 259

Score select
> Code: ESC [ - Ln Hn p1 p2
> Compatibility: IBM
> Function: Selects score type and its line type.
> Range:
00H <= Ln·Hn <= FFFFH
00H <= P1 <= FFH
00H <= P2 <= FFH
> Detail:
Sets parameter bytes after Ln·Hn by Ln·Hn.
Parameter bytes = Ln + Hn × 256 (byte)
When Ln + Hn x 256 > 3, receives and discards (Ln + Hn × 256) – 2 bytes data after
receiving P1 and P2.
Usually designates Ln + Hn × 256 = 2.
Designates score type by P1, as shown in the table:

DESIGNATED VALUE OF P1 SCORE TYPE TO BE

DESIGNATED

01H Selects underscore

02H Selects strikethrough

03H Selects overscore

When P1 is other than above, this command shall be invalid and (Ln + Hn × 256) –
1 bytes of the further parameter will be received and discarded.
By P2, selects line type of score type designated by P1, as shown in the table:

DESIGNATED VALUE OF P2 LINE TYPE TO BE

DESIGNATED

00H Selects no line

01H Selects single line

02H Selects double line

03H to FEH Selects single line

FFH Does not print score line

regardless of P1 designation

Command descriptions > 260

GRAPHICS MODE

Enter/exit bit image graphics

> Code: ESC * m n1 n2 <graphics data>
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM AGM
> Function:
Selects the graphics mode specified by m and prints graphics data. Not valid in IBM
PPR mode.
> Range:
n1 in conjunction with n2 specifies the total number of dot columns to be printed in
graphics.
n1 = 0 – 255, Remainder of dot columns
n2 = 0 – 255, Number of groups of 255 dot columns
m selects the graphic mode. The value of “m” determines whether 8 pin or 24 pin
graphics is used. See table below:

MODE PINS M DPI WIDE NARROW

BYTES BYTES/
/LINE LINE

Single density 8 0 60 816 480

Double density 8 1 120 1632 960

Fast double 8 2 120 * 1632 960

density

Quadruple 8 3 240 * 3264 1920

density

CRT I 8 4 80 1088 640

CRT II 8 6 90 1224 720

Single density 24 32 60 816*3 480 *3

Double density 24 33 120 1632*3 960 *3

CRT III 24 38 90 1224*3 720 *3

Triple density 24 39 180 2448*3 1440 *3

Hex density 24 40 360 * 4896*3 2880 *3

NOTE
Modes marked “*” are printed in Quasi density.

> Out of range:

If m is specified in the above table, “ESC*m” is ignored and data is not printed as
graphics data.
> Additional details:
When using 8 pin graphics, only one byte per column needs to be sent to the printer.
When 24 pin graphics is used, three bytes per column need to be sent to the printer.

Command descriptions > 261

 Pin numbering system

8 Pin-EPSON/
Pin # 24 Pins IBM PPR
IBM AGM

Top pin 1 128

128 128
2 64
3 32
4 16
64 64
5 8
6 4
7 2 32 32
8 1

9 128
16
10 64
11 32 16
12 16 8
13 8
8
14 4
4
15 2
16 1
2 4
17 128
18 64
19 32
1 2
20 16
21 8
22 4
1
23 2
Bottom pin 24 1

The decimal value used for the data elements can be calculated by adding the
equivalent decimal values of the dots that need to be printed.
The following example uses X to denote Print and O to denote Not Print:

128 X 128

64 O

32 X 32

16 O

8 X 8

4 O

2 X 2

1 O

Total 170

This value corresponds to one byte of data. Three bytes are needed for 24 pin
graphics.
The values for n1, n2 can be calculated as follows:
n = total number of dots to be printed.
n2 = INT (n/256)
n1 = n - (n2 × 256).

Single density graphics

> Code: ESC K n1 n2 <graphics data>
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function:
Selects normal speed single density graphics (60 DPI horizontal) for the number of
columns specified by n1 and n2.

Command descriptions > 262

> Range:
n1 = 0 – 255, Remainder of dot columns
n2 = 0 – 255, Number of groups of 255 dot columns
n1 in conjunction with n2 specifies the total number of dot columns to be printed in
graphics. Dots = n1 + (n2*256).
Number of dots/line

DOTS/LINE N1 N2

ML5790 480 224 1

ML5791 816 48 3

> Additional details:

The values for n1, n2 can be calculated as follows:
n = total number of dots to be printed.
n2 = INT (n/256)
n1 = n - (n2 × 256)
> Related functions:
This command is equivalent to the 8 pin graphics mode command specified by ESC*
“0” n1 n2.

Double density graphics

> Code: ESC L n1 n2 <graphics data>
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function:
Selects normal speed double-density graphics (120 DPI horizontal) for the number of
columns specified by n1 and n2.
> Range:
n1 = 0 – 255, Remainder of dot columns.
n2 = 0 – 255, Number of groups of 255 dot columns.
n1 in conjunction with n2 specifies the total number of dot columns to be printed in
graphics. Dots = n1 + (n2*256)
Number of dots/line

DOTS/LINE N1 N2

ML5790 960 192 3

ML5791 1632 96 6

> Additional details:

The values for n1, n2 can be calculated as follows:
n = total number of dots to be printed.
n2 = INT (n/256)
n1 = n - (n2 × 256)
> Related functions:
This command is equivalent to the 8 pin graphics mode command specified by ESC*
“1” n1 n2.

Command descriptions > 263

Quasi-double-density graphics
> Code: ESC Y n1 n2 <graphics data>
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function:
Selects high speed double-density graphics (120 DPI horizontal) for the number of
columns specified by n1 and n2.
> Range:
n1 = 0 – 255, Remainder of dot columns
n2 = 0 – 255, Number of groups of 255 dot columns
n1 in conjunction with n2 specifies the total number of dot columns to be printed in
graphics. Dots = n1 + (n2*256)
Number of dots/line

DOTS/LINE N1 N2

ML5790 960 192 3

ML5791 1632 96 6

> Additional details:

The values for n1, n2 can be calculated as follows:
n = total number of dots to be printed.
n2 = INT (n/256)
n1 = n - (n2 × 256)
High speed double-density graphics prints at 120 DPI. This is the same density as low
speed double-density graphics, but the printer cannot place two adjacent dots in the
same row (quasi-density).
> Related functions:
This command is equivalent to the 8 pin graphics mode command specified by ESC*
“2” n1 n2.

Set quadruple density graphics

> Code: ESC Z n1 n2 <graphics data>
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function:
Upon receipt of this code the printer switches to quadruple- density graphics (240 DPI
horizontal) for the number of columns specified by n1 and n2.
> Range:
n1 = 0 – 255, Remainder of dot columns
n2 = 0 – 255, Number of groups of 255 dot columns.
n1 in conjunction with n2 specifies the total number of dot columns to be printed in
graphics. Dots = n1 + (n2*256)
Number of dots/line

DOTS/LINE N1 N2

ML5790 1920 128 7

ML5791 3264 192 12

Command descriptions > 264

> Additional details:
The values for n1, n2 can be calculated as follows:
n = total number of dots to be printed.
n2 = INT (n/256)
n1 = n - (n2 × 256)
As quad-density graphics are printed in a quasi-density, the printer does not print
consecutive dots in any one row.
> Related functions:
This command is equivalent to the 8 pin graphics mode command specified by ESC*
“3” n1 n2.

Reassign alternate graphics codes

> Code: ESC ? m n
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
Upon receipt of this command the printer reassigns one of the alternate graphics
modes (“m”), so that it represents any other of the eleven graphics modes (“n”).
> Range:
“m” represents one of the following four graphics modes:
K – Single-density
L – Low speed double-density
Y – High speed double-density
Z – Quadruple-density
n is a decimal value.

MODE PINS N HOR. DENS WIDE NARROW

(DOTS/IN.) BYTES BYTES/LINE
/LINE

Single-density 8 0 60 816 480

Double-density 8 1 120 1632 960

HS Double- 8 2 120 1632 960

density

Quadruple- 8 3 240 3264 1920

density

CRT I 8 4 80 1088 640

CRT II 8 6 90 1224 720

Single-density 24 32 60 816*3 480*3

Double-density 24 33 120 1632*3 960*3

CRT III 24 38 90 1224*3 720*3

Triple-density 24 39 180 2448*3 1440*3

Hex-density 24 40 360 4896*3 2880*3

> Out of range:

If n does not equal a value specified in the above table, {ESC ? m n” is ignored and
data is not printed as graphics data.

Command descriptions > 265

Graphics resolution
> Code: ESC [ g n1 n2 m data
> Compatibility: IBM
> Function:
This command selects the graphics resolution and sends the graphics data.
> Range:
n1 = 0 – 255, Remainder of dot columns
n2 = 0 – 255, Number of groups of 256 dot columns
n1 in conjunction with n2 specifies the total number of dot columns to be printed in
graphics.
Graphic data quantity +1 = n1 + (n2*256)

M DPI WIRES COMMAND

(H)

0 60 8 Same as ESC K command

1 120 8 Same as ESC L command

2 120 8 Same as ESC Y command

3 240 8 Same as ESC Z command

8 60 24 High resolution for ESC K

9 120 24 High resolution for ESC L

11 180 24

12 360 24

> Out of range:

Any value of n1, n2, m other than those above will be ignored.
> Additional details:
If the value of n1, n2 is zero (0) the current value is maintained.

Select aspect ratio

> Code: ESC n Pn
> Compatibility: IBM PPR
> Function:
Sets vertical-to-horizontal ratio in density of bit image graphics.
> Range:
Pn = 0 – 1, Sets aspect ratio 5:6 in bit image graphics mode.
Pn = 2, Sets aspect ratio 1:1 in bit image graphics mode.
Pn >= 3, Data up to ESC n Pn is dumped.
> Additional details:
This command is active for commands ESC K, ESC L, ESC Y and ESC Z.

Command descriptions > 266

Select graphics mode
> Code: ESC ( G Ln Hn Pn
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
Set raster graphics mode.
> Range:
Ln 0 ~ 255 (FFH)
Pn 1, 31H
Hn 0 ~ 255 (FFH)
Ln + Hn × 256 = 0 Makes this command invalid.
Ln + Hn × 256 = 0 >1
When received Pn is in a valid range, data that follows is treated as data in raster
graphics mode.
When received Pn is not in a valid range, this command becomes invalid and data that
follows is treated as character data or function data.

Set/reset graphics mode

> Code: ESC DLE G Pno Pn
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ(c)
> Function:
Set/Reset raster graphics mode.
> Range:
Pno = 0 Makes this command invalid.
Pno = 1 Makes the Pn data valid.
Pno > 1 Makes the Pn data valid and data that follows are treated according
to Pno and then discarded.
Pn = odd Set raster graphics mode.
Pn = even Reset raster graphics mode.

Print raster graphics

> Code: ESC . Pc Pv Ph Pm Ln Hn data
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ(c)
> Function: Print input data in bit map in horizontal direction.
> Range:
Pc … 0 - 1 (Makes MSB invalid.)
Pv … 10, 20
Ph … 10, 20

Command descriptions > 267

 Pm … Number of dots in vertical direction.

PV PRN REMARKS

10 0 <= Prn <= 48 When the value exceeds the

maximum value, the maximum
20 0 <=Prn <= 24 value is applied.

Ln, Hn … Number of dots in horizontal direction.

Number of dots = Ln + Hn × 256

PV NUMBER OF REMARKS
DOTS

10 0 <= Number of Dots that exceed he valid range are

dots <= 2880 received and discarded.
(4896)

20 0 <= Number of ( ) wide

dots <= 1440
(2448)

COMPOSITE COMMANDS

Print mode select

> Code: ESC ! n
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
Upon receipt of this command the printer selects one of the unique print mode
combinations.
> Range:

BIT BR (R = 0 – 7) OF “N”

1 0

b7 Set Underline Reset Underline

b6 Set Italics Reset Italics

b5 Set Double Width Reset Double Width

b4 Set Enhanced Reset Enhanced

b3 Set Emphasised Reset Emphasised

b2 Set Compressed Reset Condensed

b1 Set Proportional Reset Proportional

b0 Set 12 CPI Set 10 CPI

> Additional details:

With this code you can quickly produce any possible combination of the modes in the
following section.
There is no need to reset each mode separately when you use this code; when you
select a new combination the printer takes care of all resets.
The selectable modes are given in the following section.

Command descriptions > 268

Print mode select
> Code: ESC I n
> Compatibility: IBM
> Function:
This command controls the current print mode according to the value of n.
> Range:

N PRINT MODE CPI ROM/RAM

0 Utility 10 CPI ROM

2 LQ 10 CPI ROM

3 LQ PROP ROM

4 Draft 10 CPI RAM

6 LQ 10 CPI RAM

7 LQ Proportional RAM

8 Utility 12 CPI ROM

10 LQ 12 CPI ROM

12 Draft 12 CPI RAM

14 LQ 12 CPI RAM

16 Utility 17.1 CPI ROM

18 LQ 17.1 CPI ROM

20 Draft 17.1 CPI RAM

22 LQ 17.1 CPI RAM

24 Utility 15 CPI ROM

26 LQ 15 CPI RAM

32 Utility 20 CPI ROM

34 LQ 20 CPI RAM

Command descriptions > 269

GENERAL CONTROL

Printer initialisation
> Code: ESC @
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
Upon receipt of this code the printer will be initialised to all its menu default settings.
This command is enabled or disabled by a Menu selection.
> Additional details:
All data in the buffer will be cleared and the current printhead position becomes top
of page.
DLL data will not be deleted.

Cancel code
> Code: CAN
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function:
Upon receipt of this command the printer will clear all data from the print buffer.
> Additional details:
This code does not clear or affect the control codes which are resident in the buffer.

Set bit 7 code to 1

> Code: ESC >
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
Upon receipt of this command the printer will set bit 7 of the data to 1.
> Additional details:
This code limits the range codes from 80H to FFH.

Set bit 7 code to 0

> Code: ESC =
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
Upon receipt of this command the printer will set bit 7 of the data to 0.
> Additional details:
This code limits the range codes from 00H to 7FH.

Command descriptions > 270

Reset 8 bit mode
> Code: ESC #
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
Upon receipt of this command the printer cancels the mode set by either ESC “>” or
ESC “=”.
> Additional details:
The printer accepts the eighth bit “as is” from the computer (8-bit mode).

Set print suppress

> Code: DC3
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
Upon receipt of this command the printer is placed in the inactive state.
> Additional details:
All data is unavailable after receiving this code.
The SEL/BUSY signal will not be changed by this command.

Print suppress
> Code: ESC Q n
> Compatibility: IBM
> Function:
This printer mode will not allow the printer to receive any data except DC1.
> Range:
n = 36
> Additional details:
The printer cannot be reselected by using the Select key.
The SEL indicator will flash while in Print Suppress mode.

Reset print suppress mode

> Code: DC1
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function:
Upon receipt of this command the printer is placed in the active state.
> Additional details:
The printer processes all the data sent to it.

Command descriptions > 271

Stop printing
> Code: ESC j
> Compatibility: IBM
> Function:
This command places the printer in deselect status.
> Additional details:
To cancel the deselect status, press the SEL button or load paper (Menu “Auto Select”
set to “Yes”).
Data received before ESC j is printed.

Enable paper out sensor

> Code: ESC 9
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function:
This command enables the printer function which detects whether less than
approximately 1 in of paper remains. Upon detection, the alarm indicator is lit and
the printer is deselected.
Manual paper override.
Bottom margin:
Rear Feed: Approximately 1 in
Bottom Feed: Approximately 1 in
Top Feed: Approximately 1 in
> Additional details:
The paper out detector can also be enabled by MENU.
Manual Paper Out Override
While the Alarm indicator is on, if the SEL button is pressed, 1 line of data is printed,
and a line feed follows (paper override). During the processing of 1 line of data, select
mode returns.
The paper override function is effective after paper end is turned on until the next
TOF position. The paper override function becomes invalid when it reaches the TOF
position.
After the override function is processed to TOF position, paper is reset at TOF position.
When the SEL button is pressed, data is normally printed from the TOF position.
When the SEL button is pressed after paper is reset (Alarm LED is Off), the following
states return and the printer is in the select mode:
– SEL indicator is On.
– Alarm indicator is Off.
– Printer is ready to receive data.
During the paper override, if continuous line feed exceeding the TOF position is input,
line feed proceeds until the TOF position. The remaining amount of line feed is held
until new paper is installed and printing executed.
Unprinted data will be saved in the buffer and printed after paper is replaced and the
SEL button is pressed.

Command descriptions > 272

Disable paper out sensor
> Code: ESC 8
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function:
This command disables the paper out detecting function.
> Additional details:
Paper out detector can also be disabled by MENU.
Printer prints up to TOF, then stops print and the Paper End Signal is active.

Select emulation
> Code: ESC { n
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function:
This command allows the software developer to change the printer emulation to
access the features that match his requirements.
> Additional details:
This command is not documented for public use.
This command duplicates the MENU selection.
When emulation is changed DLL will be cleared.

Printer initialisation
> Code: ESC } NUL
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function:
Upon receipt of this code the printer will be initialised to all its menu default settings.
This command is always active regardless of the menu “Reset Inhibit”.
> Additional details:
All data in the buffer will be cleared and the current printhead position becomes top
of page.
DLL data will be deleted (EPSON).

Set intial condition

> Code: ESC [ K Ln Hn Init Id Parm1 Parm2
> Compatibility: IBM
> Function:
Sets initial conditions of printer
> Range:
Ln, Hn … Sets subsequent parameter bytes.
00H <= Ln <= FFH
00H Hn FFH
The subsequent parameter bytes is Ln + (Hn ¥ 256) bytes.

Command descriptions > 273

If Ln = Hn = 00H, data up to ESC [ K Ln Hn is dumped and this command mode is
cancelled.
Normally, use Hn = 00H and also Ln = 01H – 04H.
Init … Sets initial conditions of printer.
Init = 00H
Settings of menu item A are retained.
Parm1 and Parm2 settings are set for each mode.
Init = 01H
Settings of menu item A are retained.
Parm1 and Parm2 settings are set for each mode.
Init = 04H
Each mode of menu item A is cleared.
Parm1 and Parm2 settings are set for each mode.
Init = 05H
Each mode of menu item A is cleared.
Parm1 and Parm2 settings are set for each mode.
Init = FEH
Settings of menu item A are retained.
Parm1 and Parm2 settings are set for each mode.
Init = FFH
Settings of menu item A is cleared.
Parm1 and Parm2 settings are set for each mode.
If Init is other than 00H, 01H, 04H, 05H, FEH and FFH, same operation as in Init =
00H is executed.
Id … Sets printer ID No.
Id = 03H, 16H, 24H are valid.
Parm1 … Sets menu item B.

BIT FUNCTION OFF(0) ON(1)

7 Sets valid/invalid of Valid Invalid

parameter

6 Invalid Function - -

5 Turns ON/OFF paper None (always <-

end alarm buzzer. OFF)

4 Sets auto CR mode Invalid (LF only) Valid (LF + CR)

3 Sets auto LF mode Invalid (CR only) Valid (CR + LF)

2 Sets page length 11” 12”

1 Sets zero character without slash with slash

0 Selects character set Set I Set II

Command descriptions > 274

 Parm1 … Sets menu item C.

BIT FUNCTION OFF(0) ON(1)

7 Sets valid/invalid of Valid Invalid

parameter

6 Invalid Function - -

5 Invalid Function - -

4 Sets CPI mode for 20CPI 12CPI

12CPI + condensed

3 Invalid Function - -

2 Sets FF code FF is executed FF is not

operation at TOF executed
position

1 Sets page printing 13.6” 8”

width

0 Turns ON/OFF CSF None (current <-

mode mode)

> Additonal details:

This command is active when menu item “Reset Inhibit” is set to “No” If “Yes”, this
command is ignored.
If there is data that is not printed yet when this command is received, it is printed.
In such a case, CR is executed but LF is not.
The relationship between menu items and parameters is as below:

NOTE
The bold setting shows default setting (when mode is cleared).

MENU ITEM A DETAIL

NO ITEMS

1 Emphasized Print None (always OFF)

2 Double-High Print As per menu item Normal

Size setting

3 Double-Wide Print As per menu item Normal

Size setting

4 Pitch As per menu item 10CPI

Pitch setting

5 LQ As per menu item Draft

Print Mode setting

MENU ITEM B DETAIL

NO ITEMS

1 Paper end alarm None (always OFF)

buzzer

2 Auto CR mode As per menu item Auto CR setting.

3 Auto LF mode As per menu item Auto LF setting.

Command descriptions > 275

 MENU ITEM B DETAIL

NO ITEMS

4 Page length As per menu item Page Length

setting.

5 Zero character As per menu item Zero Character

setting.

6 Character set As per menu item Character Set

setting.

MENU ITEM C DETAIL

NO ITEMS

1 CPI mode upon As per menu item SI Select (12CPI)

receipt of 12CPI + setting.
condensed

2 FF code operation at None (FF is always executed).

TOF position

3 Page print width As per menu item Page Width.

4 ON/OFF of CSF None (current printer mode is

mode retained).

Set config group

> Code : ESC DLE J P1 DATA
> Compatibility : EPS FX/IBM III/ML
> Function :
This command selects the COFIG group (configuration menu) and initialize the
setting, which is equivalent with the “CONFIG” switch function.
> Range :
P1 represents the data size (number of bytes) since the designated number (invalid
with MSB).
If P1 >= 2, this command makes the DATA valid and flushes the remaining bytes
P1indicates.
If P1 = 1, the DATA is valid.
If P1 = 0, all the commands become invalid.
A CONFIG group is designated by the DATA. (Invalid with MSB)
ML5790/ML5791; two groups, 01H and 02H can be designated. Any value except for
these values will make this command completely invalid.
> Additional details :
Group 1 (CFG1) is designated at DATA = 01H.
Group 2 (CFG2) is designated at DATA = 02H.
When the same group as the currently selected CONFIG group is designated, the
command performs only initialization.
The printing is started at the point when ESC DLE J is received.

Command descriptions > 276

Because this command also sets the receiving Buf size, if continuous data is sent after
this command is processed, the data needs to be sent after the sending of Null data
of 128 K bytes.
It is the currently selected CONFIG group to make the settings valid by the menu
setting command (ESC DLE D)
The menu factory value loading command (ESC DLE 02H P1 DATA) sets the CONFIG
group 1 and 2 to be the same value.
Although CONFIG groups selected by this command are stored to the Flash Memory.
The DLL data becomes DLL copy status regardless of the emulation mode in the menu
setting. But if the receiving buffer is 128K bytes, which disables the DLL function, the
DLL copy will not executed.
The initial setting of each mode is set after the completion of this command setting.

MENU ITEM B DETAIL

NO ITEMS

1 Character pitch Complies with the menu setting.

2 Line feed pitch Complies with the menu setting.

3 Horizontal tab Default (each 8 characters)

4 Vertical tab Default

5 Character modification:
> Horizontal scale > Complies with the menu setting.
> Vertical scale > Complies with the menu setting.
> Score > Released
> Horizontal emphasis > Released
> Vertical emphasis (double > Released
strike)
> Super/subscript > Released
> Italic > Complies with the menu setting.

6 Setting of uni-directional
printing
> Character > Bi-directional printing
> Bit image graphics > Complies with the menu setting.

7 Clearance between Released

characters

8 CG
> Fonts > Complies with the menu setting.
> ROM/RAM > ROM
> Character table > Complies with the menu setting.
> Code page setting > Complies with the menu setting.
> International character set > Complies with the menu setting.
> Zero font > Complies with the menu setting.

9 NLQ font Complies with the menu setting.

10 Left margin Default (home position)

11 Right margin Complies with the menu setting.

12 Paper position TOF

13 Print position Left margin

14 Page length (Front/Rear) Complies with the menu setting.

15 Skip Over Perforation Complies with the menu setting.

(Front/Rear)

Command descriptions > 277

 MENU ITEM B DETAIL

NO ITEMS

16 Enable/disable of paper end Complies with the menu setting.

detection

17 Enable/disable of print Complies with the menu setting.

suppress

18 AUTO LF Complies with the menu setting.

19 Impact mode Complies with the menu setting.

20 Emulation mode Complies with the menu setting.

21 Bar code Default

22 Receiving buffer size Complies with the menu setting.

23 Auto I/F setting Complies with the menu setting.

24 Various settings of serial Complies with the menu setting.

board

Command descriptions > 278

BARCODE

Select barcode
> Code: ESC DLE A P1 N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function: Selects the type of barcodes and sets its size.
> Range:
P1 designates subsequent data quantity. (MSB is invalid)
P1 = 0, 1, 3 This command is invalid.
P1 = 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 This command is valid.
P1 = 9 N1~N8 are valid, and N9~P1 are dumped.
N1 and N2 select the barcode type. (Higher 4 bits are invalid)

N1 N2 BARCODE TYPE

0 1 EAN8

0 2 EAN13

1 0 UPC-A

1 4 UPC-E

2 0 CODE39

3 0 Interleave 2 of 5

4 0 CODE128

If N1 and N2 are other than above, this command is ignored and the data designated
by P1 is dumped.
N3 and N4 set vertical length of barcode. The unit is 15/180 inch. (Higher 4 bits are
invalid.)
Barcode vertical length: (N3 × 10 + N4) × (15/180)”
N3 = N4 = 0: Setting does not change
N3 ¥ 10 + N4 = 25: 24 is set

N5 sets the width of black bar.

The minimum black bar width is 1/360 inch.
N5 = 0 : Setting does not change.
N5 = 8 : N5 = 7 is set.
N6 sets space width.
The minimum space width is 1/360 inch.
N6 = 0 : Setting does not change.
N6 = 8 : N6 = 7 is set.
N7 sets wide element to narrow element ratio.

N7 WIDE-TO-NARROW
RATIO

1 2:1

Command descriptions > 279

 N7 WIDE-TO-NARROW
RATIO

2 2.5: 1

3 3:1

4 3.5 : 1

5 4:1

6 4.5 : 1

7 5:1

N7 = 0 : Setting does not change.

N7 = 8 : N7 = 7 is set.
N8 sets the type of characters.
N8 = 0 : No character is added.
N8 = 1 : LQ characters are added.
The character is fixed to 12CPI.
> Additional details:
Default settings of these parameters are as follows:
N1 N2 = 10 (UPC-A)
N3 N4 = 09 (3/4 inch)
N5 = 1 (1/72 inch)
N6 = 1 (1/72 inch)
N7 = 2 (2.5 : 1)
N8 = 1 (LQ characters)

Print barcode data

> Code: ESC DLE B P1 Pm [DATA]
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function:• Prints barcode data.
> Range:
P1 designates the subsequent data quantity (MSB is invalid).
Pm selects either mode A, B or C of CODE128.
This is valid only when CODE128 is selected.
Pm = 65 : Selects CODE128 mode A.
Pm = 66 : Selects CODE128 mode B.
Pm = 67 : Selects CODE128 mode C.
In other than above cases, the command is ignored and all data is dumped.
[DATA] designates barcode data.

Command descriptions > 280

> Additional details:
The number of characters (data) available with this command is as listed below:

BARCODE TYPE NO. OF

CHARACTERS

EAN8 8

EAN13 13

UPC-A 12

UPC-E 6

CODE39 1 ~ 50

Interleave 2 of 5 1 ~ 50

CODE128 (A, B, C) 1 ~ 50

Print postnet barcode data

> Code: ESC DLE C P1 [DATA]
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ/IBM
> Function: Prints the postnet barcode.
> Range:
P1 designates the subsequent data quantity. (MSB is invalid)
P1 : 1 ~ 20
If P1 is other than above range, this command is ignored and data is dumped.
[DATA] designates the postnet barcode data.
External code lists for Barcode data, see “Appendix E – Barcode” on page 361.
Barcode data not registered to external code lists is invalid.

Print barcode
> Code: ESC ( B Ln Hn k m S v1 v2 c [DATA]
> Compatibility: EPSON LQ
> Function:
Prints barcode data.
> Valid range and meaning of Ln and Hn
0(00H) <= Ln <= 255(FFH)
0(00H) <= Hn <= 255(FFH) MSB is invalid
Indicates number of further parameter bytes.
Number of parameter bytes = Ln + Hn x 256
This parameter will be valid only when set by further parameter bytes (6 bytes) +
number of data (differs depending on barcode type). For settings other than this, this
command is invalid and the data after the number of bytes designated by this
parameter will be received and discarded.

Command descriptions > 281

Sets barcode type by parameter k (MSB valid):

K (HEX) BARCODE TYPE

00 EAN-13

01 EAN-8

02 Interleaved 2 of 5

03 UPC-A

04 UPC-E

05 Code 39

06 Code 128

07 POSTNET

When a barcode type other than above is designated, this command will be invalid
and the number of bytes indicated by Ln and Hn will be received and discarded.
Sets module (black bar and SP bar) width by parameter m (MSB valid).

M MODULE WIDTH
(1/180 IN UNIT)

02 2 dots

03 3 dots

04 4 dots

05 5 dots

For settings other than above, width is 2 dots.

Sets SP bar width on the basis of parameter m, setting by parameter S (MSB valid).

S ADJUSTMENT VALUE FOR THE

STANDARD WIDTH OF SP BAR (1/360
IN UNIT)

FDH -3

FEH -2

FFH -1

00H 0 (default)

01H +1

02H +2

03H +3

For settings other than above, the value is set to 0.

Command descriptions > 282

Sets height (1/180 in unit) of black bar by parameter v1 and v2.
Black bar height = v1 + v2 x 256
0(00H) <= v1 <= 255(FFH)
0(00H) <= v2 <= 255(FFH)
The maximum setting value for height is 2 in. This can be set in units of 15/180 in as
follows:

SETTING RANGE SET SETTING RANGE SET

VALUE VALUE
(IN) (IN)

1 <= v1.v2 <= 15 15/180 196 <= v1.v2 <= 210 210/180

16 <= v1.v2 <= 30 30/180 211 <= v1.v2 <= 225 225/180

31 <= v1.v2 <= 45 45/180 226 <= v1.v2 <= 240 240/180

46 <= v1.v2 <= 60 60/180 241 <= v1.v2 <= 255 255/180

61 <= v1.v2 <= 75 75/180 256 <= v1.v2 <= 270 270/180

76 <= v1.v2 <= 90 90/180 271 <= v1.v2 <= 285 285/180

91 <= v1.v2 <= 105 105/180 286 <= v1.v2 <= 300 300/180

106 <= v1.v2 <= 120 120/180 301 <= v1.v2 <= 315 315/180

121 <= v1.v2 <= 135 135/180 316 <= v1.v2 <= 330 330/180

136 <= v1.v2 <= 150 150/180 331 <= v1.v2 <= 345 345/180

151 <= v1.v2 <= 165 165/180 346 <= v1.v2 <= 360 360/180

166 <= v1.v2 <= 180 180/180 361 <= v1.v2 360/180

181 <= v1.v2 <= 195 195/180

c: Sets control information.

PC MODULE WIDTH

bit 0 Sets check digit

0: Does not add check digit
1: Adds check digit

bit 1 Sets human readable characters

0: Prints
1: Does not print

bit 2 Sets flag character print position (Setting invalid)

0: Prints in centre
1: Prints in lower line

bit 3 (reserved)

bit 4 (reserved)

bit 5 (reserved)

bit 6 (reserved)

bit 7 (reserved)

Command descriptions > 283

 DATA: Transmits barcode data.
The following table shows the barcode data number.

BARCODE TYPE CHECK DIGIT CHECK DIGIT

NOT ADDED ADDED

EAN-13 0DH 0CH

EAN-8 08H 07H

Interleaved 2 of 5 01H – 32H 01H – 32H

UPC-A 0CH 0BH

UPC-E 06H 06H

Code 39 01H – 32H 01H – 32H

Code 128 02H – 32H 02H – 32H

POSTNET 06H or 0AH or 0CH 05H or 09H or 0BH

Set-up barcode parameter

> Code: ESC [ f Ln Hn k m S v1 v2 c [DATA]
> Compatibility: IBM
> Function:
Sets barcode type.
> Valid range and meaning of 06H and 00H
0(00H) <= Ln <= 255(FFH)
0(00H) <= Hn <= 255(FFH) MSB shall be invalid
Indicates number of further parameter bytes.
Number of parameter bytes = Ln + Hn x 256
This parameter shall be valid only when set by the further parameter bytes (6 bytes)
+ number of data (differs depending on barcode type). For the settings other than
this, this command shall be invalid and the data after the number of bytes designated
by this parameter will be received and discarded.
Sets barcode type by parameter k (MSB valid)

K(HEX) BARCODE TYPE

B2H EAN-13

B3H EAN-8

B4H CODE 39

B6H Interleaved 2 of 5

B7H UPC-E

B9H POSTNET

BAH Code 128

When the barcode type other than above is designated, this command shall be invalid
and number of bytes indicated by Ln and Hn will be received and discarded.

Command descriptions > 284

Sets module (black bar and SP bar) width by parameter m (MSB valid).

M MODULE WIDTH (1/180”

UNIT)

00H 2 dots

01H 1 dots

02H 2 dots

03H 3 dots

04H 4 dots

For the settings other than above, width shall be 2 dots.

Sets SP bar width on the basis of parameter Pm setting by parameters (MSB valid).

S ADJUSTMENT VALUE FOR

THE STANDARD WIDTH OF
SP BAR (1/360” UNIT)

FDH -3

FEH -2

FFH -1

00H 0 (default)

01H +1

02H +2

03H +3

For settings other than the above, setting value shall be 0.

Sets height (1/2160" unit) of black bar by parameter v1 and v2.
(Black bar height = v1 + v2 × 256)
0(00H) <= v1 <= 255(FFH)
0(00H) <= v2 <= 255(FFH)
Maximum setting value for height is 2 inches. (Possible to set in 15/180" unit)

SETTING RANGE SET SETTING RANGE SET

VALUE VALUE

1 <= v1.v2 <= 180 15/180" 2341 <= v1·v2 <= 2520 210/180"

181 <= v1·v2 <= 360 30/180" 2521 <= v1·v2 <= 2700 225/180"

361 <= v1·v2 <= 540 45/180"2 2701 <= v1·v2 <= 2880 240/180"

541 <= v1·v2 <= 720 60/180" 2881 <= v1·v2 <= 3060 255/180"

721 <= v1·v2 <= 900 75/180" 3061 <= v1·v2 <= 3240 270/180"

901 <= v1·v2 <= 1080 90/180" 3241 <= v1·v2 <= 3420 285/180"

1081 <= v1·v2 <= 1260 105/180" 3421 <= v1·v2 <= 3600 300/180"

1261 <= v1·v2 <= 1440 120/180" 3601 <= v1·v2 <= 3780 315/180"

1441 <= v1·v2 <= 1620 135/180" 3781 <= v1·v2 <= 3960 330/180"

1621 <= v1·v2 <= 1800 150/180"3 3961 <= v1·v2 <= 4140 345/180"

1801 <= v1·v2 <= 1980 165/180" 4141 <= v1·v2 <= 4320 360/180"

Command descriptions > 285

 SETTING RANGE SET SETTING RANGE SET
VALUE VALUE

1981 <= v1·v2<= 2160 180/180" 4321 <= v1·v2 360/180"

2161 <= v1·v2 <= 2340 195/180"

Sets control information

PC MODULE WIDTH

bit 0 Sets check digit

0: Does not add check digit
1: Adds check digit

bit 1 Sets human readable character

0: Prints
1: Does not print

bit 2 Sets flag character print position (Setting

invalid)
0: Prints in center
1: Prints in lower line

bit 3 (reserved)

bit 4 (reserved)

bit 5 (reserved)

bit 6 (reserved)

bit 7 (reserved)

Print postnet bar code data

> Code: ESC [ p n1 n2 [DATA]
> Compatibility: IBM III
> Function:
Prints barcode.
> Valid range and meaning of n1 and n2
0(00H) <= n1 <= 255(FFH)
0(00H) <= n2 <= 255(FFH)
Indicates number of further parameter bytes.
Number of parameter bytes = n1 + n2 x 256
This parameter shall be valid only when set by the further parameter bytes (6 bytes)
+ number of data (differs depending on barcode type). For the settings other than
this, this command shall be invalid and the data after the number of bytes designated
by this parameter will be received and discarded.

Command descriptions > 286

DATA: Transmits barcode data. (The following table shows number of barcode data)

BARCODE WHEN CHECK WHEN CHECK

TYPE DIGIT IS NOT DIGIT IS ADDED
ADDED

EAN-13 0DH 0CH

EAN-8 08H 07H

Code39 01H to 32H 01H to 32H

Interleaved 2 of 5 01H to 32H 01H to 32H

UPC-A 0CH 0BH

POSTNET 0AH 09H

CODE 128 02H to 32H 02H to 32H

Command descriptions > 287

SPECIFICATIONS
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATION

375mm

375mm
320mm

320mm
191mm

159mm
191mm
139mm
159mm
139mm

568mm 24mm
414mm 24mm

ML5720/ML5790 ML5721/ML5791

> Outside dimensions (W x D x H)

ML5720/ML5790: 438 x 375 x 191mm
ML5721/ML5791: 592 x 375 x 191mm

These dimensions include the platen knob, pull-up guide assembly support and paper
separator.
> Weight
ML5720/ML5790: Approx. 7.5 kg
ML5721/ML5791: Approx. 10 kg

POWER REQUIREMENTS

WARNING!
Operations of this equipment are not warranted when the
equipment is connected to UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply)
and/or inverter. Doing so may result in damage of this equipment.
Do not use an UPS and/or inverter.

> Input power

Specifications > 288

 Single-phase AC
Voltage: 220-240V ± 10%
Frequency: 50/60 Hz ± 2%

Power consumption
Operation:
ML5720/ML5721: Typ. 59W (ISO/IEC10561/Letter/Draft Range 1)
ML5790/ML5791: Typ. 88W (ISO/IEC10561/Letter/Draft Range 1)

Standby mode: Max. 9.7W (ENERGY STAR compliant).

Power Save mode: 1.34 W

> AC power cable

Length: Approx. 1.8m

ELECTRICAL INSULATION
> Insulation resistance
20 megohms or more when measured between AC input line and frame using 500-
VDC megohmmeter.
> Dielectric strength
3000 VAC (50/60 Hz)
(No damage will result when the above voltage is applied between the AC input line
and frame for 1 minute.)

ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
> Ambient temperature and relative humidity

CAUTION!
> The printer must be packaged during storage.
> Avoid condensation at all times.

CONDITION TEMPERATURE REL. HUMIDITY

Operating 41 – 95 °F 20 – 80% RH
(5 – 35 °C)

Non-operating, 32 – 109.4 °F 10 – 90% RH

power on (0 – 43 °C)

Storage 14 – 122 °F 5 – 95% RH

(-10 – 50 °C)

Transportation -4 – 158 °F 5 – 95% RH

(-20 – 70 °C)

> Vibration
Operating: The following frequency ranges is applied in each of X, Y and Z direction:
5 to 10 Hz (0.004 inch displacement),
10 to 14 Hz (0.02G),
14 to 4 Hz (0.002 inch displacement) and
4 to 200 Hz (0.3G).

Specifications > 289

 To be performed for 30 minutes with a continuous test pattern.
Non-operating: The following frequency ranges is applied in each of X, Y and Z
direction:
5 to 10 Hz (0.1 inch displacement),
10 to 30 Hz (0.G),
30 to 4 Hz (0.01 inch displacement) and
4 to 300 Hz (1.G).
To be performed for 30 minutes with a continuous test pattern.

NOISE
> Measurement method
The printer is placed 2.46 ft (0.75 m) above the floor and the microphone is set 3.28
ft (1 m) and 4.92 ft (1.5 m) above the floor.
> Printing operation
The printer is measured in the ECMA Standard pattern of 40 characters/line and rear
path on one-part paper of 57 g/m2 (15lbs).
> Noise value
ML5720/ML5721: The 8-sec average noise is less than 57 dB(A) (NLQ mode) when
measured under the above conditions with the printer fitted with the acoustic cover.
ML5790/ML5791: The 8-sec average noise is less than 57 dB(A) (Draft mode) when
measured under the above conditions with the printer fitted with the acoustic cover.

AGENCY APPROVALS
CE
EN55022: 2006 + A1:2007 Class B
EN55022: Class A (when fitted with Optional Cut-sheet Feeder/ RS-232C
Serial Interface card or a LAN7120E3 Network Interface card)
EN61000-3-2: 2006 +A2 2009 + A1 2009
EN61000-3-3: 2008
EN55024: 1998+A1:2001+A2:2003
Safety GS: EN60950 - 1: 2006 + A11: 2009

PRINT SPECIFICATION
> Print method: Impact dot matrix
> Number of dot wires:
ML5720/ML5721: 18
ML5790/ML5791: 24
> Dot wire diameter:
ML5720/ML5721: 0.012 in (0.30 mm)
ML5790/ML5791: 0.0079 in (0.2 mm)
> Print direction
Bi-directional, short-line-seeking printing
Uni-directional printing specifiable

Specifications > 290

> Print speed:
ML5720/ML5721

CHARACTER HSD NLQ DRAFT SSD

PITCH

10 CPI 600 CPS 113 CPS 450 CPS -

12 CPI 600 CPS 113 CPS 450 CPS 700 CPS

15 CPI 600 CPS 113 CPS 450 CPS -

17.1 CPI 600 CPS 108 CPS 431 CPS -

20 CPI 600 CPS 108 CPS 450 CPS -

ML5790/ML5791

CHARACTER HSD NLQ DRAFT

PITCH

10 CPI 480 CPS 120 CPS 360 CPS

12 CPI - 144 CPS 432 CPS

15 CPI - 180 CPS 540 CPS

17.1 CPI - 206 CPS 309 CPS

20 CPI - 240 CPS 360 CPS

> Character sets

Standard ASCII
Epson Character Set (Italics/Graphics)
IBM Character Set (SetI/SetII)
IBM Proprietor Compatible Character Set (ML5790/ML5791)
ML Character Set (Standard/Line Graphics/Block Graphics)
Foreign Character Set
Code Page Character Set
Barcode

> Selectable character pitches

5 CPI: 0.2 in (5.08 mm)
6 CPI: 0.167 in (4.23 mm)
6.7 CPI: 0.15 in (3.81 mm)
7.5 CPI: 0.133 in (3.39 mm)
8.5 CPI: 0.117 in (2.96 mm)
10 CPI: 0.1 in (2.54 mm)
12 CPI: 0.083 in (2.12 mm)
15 CPI: 0.067 in (1.69 mm)
17.1 CPI: 0.058 in (1.48 mm)
20 CPI: 0.05 in (1.27 mm)

Specifications > 291

> Maximum number of dot columns per line in graphics:
Graphics

MODEL DPI SINGLE DOUBLE QUADRUPLE

DENSITY DENSITY DENSITY

ML5720/ 60 480 960 1920

ML5790
80 640 - -

90 720 1440 2880

ML5721/ 60 816 1632 3264

ML5791
80 1088 - -

90 1224 2448 4896

ANK Text
ML5720/ML5721

MODEL CHARACTER DRAFT NLQ HSD SSD

PITCH (CPI) MODE MODE MODE MODE

ML5720 10 960 1920 720 -

ML5721 1632 3264 1224 -

ML5720 12 1152 2304 864 768

ML5721 1958 3917 1468 1305

ML5720 15 1440 2880 1080 -

ML5721 2448 4896 1836 -

ML5720 17.1 1646 3292 1234 -

ML5721 2798 5596 2098 -

ML5720 20 1920 3840 1440 -

ML5721 3264 6528 2448 -

ML5790/ML5791

MODEL CHARACTER DRAFT LQ HSD

PITCH (CPI) MODE MODE MODE

ML5790 10 960 2880 720

ML5791 1632 4896 1224

ML5790 12 960 2880 -

ML5791 1632 4896 -

ML5790 15 960 2880 -

ML5791 1632 4896 -

ML5790 17.1 1920 2880 -

ML5791 3264 4896 -

ML5790 20 1920 2880 -

ML5791 3264 4896 -

Specifications > 292

> Maximum number of characters per line:

CHARACTER NO OF CHARACTERS
PITCH (CPI)
ML5720/ ML5721/
ML5790 ML5791

5 40 68

6 48 81

7.5 60 102

8.5 68 116

10 80 136

12 96 163

15 120 204

17.1 137 233

20 160 272

> Line feed pitches

6 LPI: 0.167 in (4.23 mm)
8 LPI: 0.125 in (3.175 mm)

A variable line feed pitch of n/60, n/72, n/180, n/216 or n/360 in can also be
specified.
> Line feed speed
6 LPI spacing: One LF = 53 ms
8 LPI spacing: One LF = 45 ms
ML5720/ML5721: Continuous paper feed rate is 5.25 in per second.
ML5790/ML5791: Continuous paper feed rate is 5.5 in per second.

PAPER SPECIFICATION
> Cut-sheet Paper
ML5720/ML5790: A4 (210 x 297mm)
ML5721/ML5791: A4 (210 x 297mm)
Single-part weight: 45 - 90 g/m2 (12 - 24 lb)
Multiple-part weight: Multiple-part cut-sheet cannot be used.

> Continuous Paper

ML5720/ML5790: 76.2 - 254mm (3 - 10 in)
ML5721/ML5791: 76.2 - 406.4mm (3 - 16 in)
Single-part weight: 45 - 90 g/m2 (12 - 24 lb)
Multiple-part paper: Max. 0.46mm (0.018 in) thickness
Max. 0.48mm (0.019 in) thickness for Bottom feed only

Specifications > 293

 MODEL PAPER WEIGHT MAX. NUMBER OF
SHEETS

ML5720/ML5721 Carbon-lined 35 - 40 g/m2 Five sheets including

paper (9 - 11 lb) original.
Pressure
ML5790/ML5791 sensitive paper > Six sheets including
original (with Rear/Front
Push feed)
> Seven sheets including
original (with Front/
Bottom Pull feed)

ML5720/ML5721 Interleaf paper Paper: 38 - Four sheets including

45g/m2 original.
10 - 12 lb)
ML5790/ML5791 > Five sheet including
Carbon paper: original (with Rear/Front
Push feed)
34g/m2
> Six sheet including
(9 lb) original (with Front/
Bottom Pull feed)

Multiple-part paper should be held together by spot-pasting or crimping on both sides

and should be free of wrinkles.
> Cut Form Envelope
Weight: Max. 90 g/m2 (24 lb)
Thickness: Max. 0.41mm (0.016 in)
6-1/2 × 3-/8 in
8-7/8 × 3-7/8 in
9-1/2 × 4-1/8 in

> Continuous Envelope

Weight: Max. 90 g/m2 (24 lb)
Thickness: Max. 0.36mm (0.014 in)
Width: 76.2 – 24mm (3 – 10 in)
Media path: Bottom feed only

For detailed media specifications see “Appendix D – Media specifications” on page 340.

RIBBON SPECIFICATION
> Original OKI cartridge ribbon:
Ink colour: Black
Ribbon life:
ML5720/ML5790: 8 million characters
ML5790/ML5791: 13 million characters

Specifications > 294

APPENDIX A – COMMAND SUMMARY
ML5720/ML5721

ASCII Code Function Name Compatibility

HORIZONTAL CONTROL
CR CARRIAGE RETURN – EXECUTE EPS FX/IBM III/ML
BS BACKSPACE EPS FX/IBM III/ML
DEL DELETE EPS FX
ESC U n PRINT DIRECTION – EPS FX/IBM III
SELECT UNI/DIRECTIONAL PRINT
ESC < PRINT DIRECTION- EPS FX
UNIDIRECTIONAL PRINT_ONE LINE ONLY
ESC — PRINT DIRECTION – ML
UNI–DIRECTIONAL
ESC = PRINT DIRECTION – ML
BI–DIRECTIONAL
ESC $ n1 n2 PRINT POSITION – EPS FX
EXECUTE PRINT POSITION
FROM LEFT MARGIN
ESC % B n1 n2 n3 n4 PRINT POSITION–DEFINE PRINT IBM III/ML
POSITION FROM LEFT MARGIN
ESC % E n1 n2 n3 n4 PRINT POSITION–DEFINE RIGHT ML
RELATIVE POSITION
ESC % F n1 n2 n3 n4 PRINT POSITION–DEFINE LEFT ML
RELATIVE POSITION
ESC \ n1 n2 PRINT POSITION – EPS FX
DEFINE INDEXED POSITION –
BY DOT COLUMN
ESC | n1 n2 PRINT POSITION–DEFINE RELATIVE DOT IBM III
POSITION
ESC DLE @n A1 A2 P1 P2 P3 SET PRINT POSITION EPSON FX/
P4 IBM III/ML
ESC D x1 x2 x3...xk NUL HORIZONTAL TABS – EPS FX/IBM III
DEFINE STOPS – BY CHARACTERS
HT HORIZONTAL TAB – EXECUTE EPS FX/IBM III
ESC R HORIZONTAL TABS – DEFINE IBM III
STOPS – DEFAULT VALUES
ESC HT X1, Y1 Z1,..., HORIZONTAL TABS – ML
Xm Ym Zm CR DEFINE STOPS – BY CHARACTERS
ESC ETX X1 Y1 Z1 W1,..., HORIZONTAL TABS – ML
Xm Ym Zm Wm CR DEFINE STOPS – BY DOT COLUMN
HT HORIZONTAL TAB – EXECUTE ML
ESC n MARGINS – DEFINE LEFT MARGIN EPS FX
ESC Q n MARGINS – DEFINE RIGHT MARGIN EPS FX
ESC X n1 n2 MARGINS – IBM III
DEFINE LEFT & RIGHT MARGIN
ESC a n PRINT – LINE JUSTIFICATION – SELECT EPS FX
ESC % C n1 n2 n3 MARGINS – DEFINE LEFT MARGIN ML
ESC % R n1 n2 n3 n4 MARGINS – RIGHT MARGIN ML
ESC d Ln Hn Relative Move Inline Forward IBM III

Appendix A – Command summary > 295

ASCII Code Function Name Compatibility

VERTiCAL CONTROL
ESC 2 LINE SPACING – EPS FX
SELECT FIXED AMOUNT – 1/6 INCH
ESC 6 LINE SPACING – ML
SELECT FIXED AMOUNT – 1/6 INCH
ESC 0 LINE SPACING – EPS FX/IBM III
SELECT FIXED AMOUNT – 1/8 INCH
ESC 8 LINE SPACING – ML
SELECT FIXED AMOUNT – 1/8 INCH
ESC 1 LINE SPACING – EPS FX/IBM III
SELECT FIXED AMOUNT – 7/72 INCH
ESC A n LINE SPACING – IBM III
DEFINE AMOUNT – n/72 INCH
ESC A n LINE SPACING – EPS FX
DEFINE AMOUNT – n/72 INCH
ESC 3 n LINE SPACING – DEFINE AMOUNT – EPS FX/IBM III
n/216 INCH
ESC 2 LINE SPACING – ACTIVATE AMOUNT IBM III
DEFINED BY n/72 INCH
ESC J n LINE FEED – EXECUTE AMOUNT – EPS FX/IBM III
n/216 INCH
ESC % 5 n FINE LF – EXECUTE – EPS FX/IBM III/ML
n/144 INCH AMOUNT
ESC % 9 n LINE SPACING – DEFINE AMOUNT – EPS FX/IBM III/ML
n/144 INCH
LF LINE FEED – EPS FX/IBM III
EXECUTE FORWARD LF WITH CR
ESC j n LINE FEED – EPS FX
EXECUTE REVERSE LF
ESC ] LINE FEED – IBM III
EXECUTE REVERSE LF –
ONE LINE ONLY
LF LINE FEED – ML
EXECUTE FORWARD LF WITH CR
ESC LF LINE FEED – EXECUTE ML
REVERSE LINE FEED
ESC 5 n LINE FEED – AUTOMATIC LF – IBM III
ON/OFF
ESC DC2 LINE FEED – ML
W/O CARRIAGE RETURN
ESC VT n1 n2 LINE FEED – ML
EXECUTE DIRECT SKIP
ESC C nul n FORM LENGTH – DEFINE AMOUNT – EPS FX/IBM III
BY INCHES
ESC C n FORM LENGTH – EPS FX/IBM III
DEFINE AMOUNT – BY LINES
ESC G n1 n2 FORM LENGTH – ML
DEFINE AMOUNT – BY 1/2 INCH
ESC F n1 n2 FORM LENGTH – ML
DEFINE AMOUNT – BY LINES

Appendix A – Command summary > 296

ASCII Code Function Name Compatibility

FF FORM FEED – EXECUTE EPS FX/IBM III/ML

ESC 5 TOP OF FORM – DEFINE ML

ESC % S n MARGIN – DEFINE ML
BOTTOM MARGIN (AUTO SKIP)
ESC 4 TOP OF FORM – DEFINE IBM III
ESC N n MARGINS – DEFINE EPS FX/IBM III
BOTTOM MARGIN (AUTO SKIP)
ESC 0 MARGINS – EPS FX/IBM III
CANCEL BOTTOM MARGIN
(AUTO SKIP)
ESC / n VERTICAL TABS – SELECT CHANNEL EPS FX
ESC B n1 n2...nk NUL VERTICAL TABS – EPS FX/IBM III
DEFINE TAB STOPS
ESC b n m1 m2... mk NUL VERTICAL TABS – EPS FX
DEFINE TAB STOPS IN CHANNELS
VT VERTICAL TAB – EXECUTE EPS FX/IBM III
DC4 SP...SP n1 ? VERTICAL TABS – ML
DEFINE TAB STOPS IN CHANNELS (VFU)
VT n VERTICAL TABS – EXECUTE ML
ESC 9 PAPER – OUT SENSOR – ENABLE EPS FX/IBM III
ESC 8 PAPER – OUT SENSOR – DISABLE EPS FX/IBM III
ESC E n PAPER – OUT ML
DETECTION OVERRIDE –
ENABLE/DISABLE
ESC EM I CUT – SHEET FEEDER – EPS FX/IBM III
SINGLE SHEET INSERT
ESC EM R CUT – SHEET FEEDER – EPS FX/IBM III
SINGLE SHEET EJECT
ESC S CUT – SHEET FEEDER – ML
SINGLE SHEET INSERT
ESC V CUT – SHEET FEEDER – ML
SINGLE SHEET EJECT
ESC DLE H Pno A1 A2 P1 P2 LINE SPACING SELECT/EXECUTION EPS FX/IBM III/ML
P3 COMPOUND COMMAND
ESC [ D Ln Hm pft fc sd CSF Control IBM III
ESC ( C Ln Hn Lp Hp Set Page Length in Defined Uuit EPS FX
ESC ( c Ln Hn Lt Ht Lb Hb Set Page Format EPS FX

SYMBOL SETS
ESC 7 IBM CHAR SET I – SELECT IBM III
ESC 6 IBM CHAR SET II – SELECT IBM III
ESC \ n1 n2 IBM CHAR SET III (ALL CHAR) – IBM III
CONTINUOUS – SELECT
ESC ^ IBM CHAR SET III (ALL CHAR) – IBM III
PRINT ONE CHAR ONLY

Appendix A – Command summary > 297

ASCII Code Function Name Compatibility

ESC ! 0 SYMBOL SET – OKIDATA – ML

STANDARD – SELECT
ESC ! 1 BLOCK GRAPHICS TABLE SELECT ML
ESC ! 2 SYMBOL SET – OKIDATA – ML
IBM – SELECT
ESC R n INTERNATIONAL LANGUAGE EPS FX
CHAR SET – SELECT
ESC ! n INTERNATIONAL LANGUAGE IBM III/ML
CHARACTER SET –
ESC [T Ln Hn NUL NUL Hcp Lcp SELECT CODE PAGE IBM III/ML
NUL
ESC t n CHARACTER TABLE – SELECT ESC FX
ESC I n EPSON – CONTROL CODES OR EPS FX
PRINTABLE CHARACTERS – ON/OFF
ESC 6 EPSON – CONTROL CODES OR EPS FX
PRINTABLE CHARACTERS – ON
ESC 7 EPSON – CONTROL CODES OR EPS FX
PRINTABLE CHARACTERS – OFF
ESC 4 EPSON – ITALIC CHARACTER SET – EPS FX
SELECT
ESC 5 EPSON – ITALIC CHARACTER SET – EPS FX
CANCEL
ESC ( t Ln Hn Pn1 Pn2 Pn3 EPSON CHARACTER TABLE SELECT EPS FX

FONT DESCRIPTION
ESC x n PRINT QUALITY – SELECT MODE – EPS FX
Draft/NLQ
ESC # 0 PRINT QUALITY – SELECT HSD IBM III
ESC ( n PRINT QUALITY – SELECT HSD EPS FX
ESC I n PRINT QUALITY – SELECT FONT IBM III
ESC # 0 PRINT QUALITY – ML
SELECT HIGH SPEED DRAFT
ESC 0 PRINT QUALITY – SELECT Draft ML
ESC 1 PRINT QUALITY – SELECT NLQ ML
ESC 3 PRINT QUALITY – SELECT NLQ – GOTHIC ML
ESC 2 CUSTOM FONT – ML
SELECT Draft DLL FONT
ESC 7 CUSTOM FONT – ML
SELECT SYNTHETIC – NLQ DLL FONT
ESC [ d 01H 00H n Set Print Quality IBM III
ESC [ I Ln Hn data Select Font IBM III
ESC k n TYPESTYLES – SELECT EPS FX/IBM III(OEL
only)/ML (OEL only)
ESC : NUL n NUL CUSTOM FONT – CREATE – EPS FX
COPY ROM DATA TO RAM
ESC $ CUSTOM FONT – CREATE – IBM III/ML
COPY ROM DATA TO RAM

Appendix A – Command summary > 298

ASCII Code Function Name Compatibility

ESC & m n1 n2 a d1...d11 CUSTOM FONT – CREATE – CHAR – EPS FX

a d1...d11 PATTERN – Draft DLL
ESC = c1 c2 m n CUSTOM FONT – CREATE – CHAR – IBM III
a1 a2 d1...d11 a1 a2 d1...d11... PATTERN – Draft/NLQ DLL
ESC % n CUSTOM FONT – SELECT DLL FONT EPS FX
ESC P CHARACTER PITCH – SELECT 10 CPI EPS FX
DC2 CHARACTER PITCH – SELECT 10 CPI IBM III
ESC M CHARACTER PITCH – SELECT 12 CPI EPS FX
ESC : CHARACTER PITCH – SELECT 12 CPI IBM III
ESC g CHARACTER PITCH – SELECT 15 CPI EPSON FX/IBM III/ML
SI CHARACTER PITCH – EPS FX/IBM III
SELECT CONDENSED (17, 20 CPI)
ESC SI CHARACTER PITCH – EPS FX
SELECT CONDENSED (17, 20 CPI)
DC2 CHARACTER PITCH – EPS FX
CANCEL CONDENSED (17, 20 CPI)
RS CHARACTER PITCH – SELECT 10 CPI ML
FS CHARACTER PITCH – SELECT 12 CPI ML
GS CHARACTER PITCH – SELECT 17.1 CPI ML
ESC # 3 CHARACTER PITCH – SELECT 20 CPI ML
ESC N n CHARACTER DENSITY – DEFINE INTER – ML
CHAR CLEARANCE – BY DOT COLUMN
ESC SI CHARACTER PITCH SELECT – 20 CPI IBM III
ESC SP n INTER – CHARACTER CLEARANCE – EPS FX
DEFINE AMOUNT – BY DOT COLUMN
ESC V n INTER – CHARACTER CLEARANCE – IBM III
DEFINE AMOUNT – BY DOT COLUMN
ESC p n CHARACTER CELL SIZE – EPS FX
PROPORTIONAL WIDTH – ON/OFF
ESC P n CHARACTER CELL SIZE – IBM III
PROPORTIONAL WIDTH – ON/OFF
ESC Y CHARACTER CELL SIZE – ML
PROPORTIONAL WIDTH – ON
ESC Z CHARACTER CELL SIZE – ML
PROPORTIONAL WIDTH – OFF
ESC % A m n1...n11 CUSTOM FONT – ML
CREATE PATTERN – Draft DLL –
ASCENDER
ESC % D m n1...n11 CUSTOM FONT – ML
CREATE PATTERN – Draft DLL –
DESCENDER
ESC X Pn Lp Hp Select Font by Pitch and Point EPS FX
ESC DLE F Pro Pn Lp Hp Select Font by Pitch and Point IBM III/ML
ESC y n Select Font EPS FX

Appendix A – Command summary > 299

ASCII Code Function Name Compatibility

TEXT PRINT FEATURES

ESC – n UNDERLINE – ON/OFF EPS FX/IBM III
ESC__n OVERSCORE – ON/OFF IBM III
ESC C UNDERLINE – ON ML
ESC D UNDERLINE – OFF ML
ESC E EMPHASIZED – ON EPS FX/IBM III
ESC F EMPHASIZED – OFF EPS FX/IBM III
ESC G ENHANCED (DOUBLE STRIKE) – ON EPS FX/IBM III
ESC T EMPHASIZE – ON ML
ESC H ENHANCED – ON ML
ESC I EMPHASIZED AND ENHANCED – OFF ML
US DOUBLE WIDE – SELECT ML
ESC US n DOUBLE HIGH – SELECT ML
ESC H ENHANCED (DOUBLE STRIKE) – OFF EPS FX/IBM III
ESC W n DOUBLE WIDE (EXPANDED) – EPS FX/IBM III
ON/OFF
SO DOUBLE WIDE (EXPANDED) – EPS FX/IBM III
ONE LINE ONLY – ON
ESC SO DOUBLE WIDE (EXPANDED) – EPS FX
ONE LINE ONLY – ON
DC4 DOUBLE WIDE (EXPANDED) – EPS FX/IBM III
ONE LINE ONLY – OFF
ESC w n DOUBLE HEIGHT – ON/OFF EPS FX
ESC [@n1 n2 m1 m2 m3 m4 DOUBLE HEIGHT AND WIDTH – IBM III
ON/OFF
ESC S n SCRIPT – SUPER/SUB – SELECT EPS FX/IBM III
ESC T SCRIPTS – SUPER/SUB – CANCEL EPS FX/IBM III
ESC L SUBSCRIPTS – ON ML
ESC M SUBSCRIPTS – OFF ML
ESC J SUPERSCRIPT – ON ML
ESC K SUPERSCRIPT – OFF ML
ESC % G SLANT – ON IBM III
ESC % H SLANT – OFF IBM III
ESC ! / SLANT – ON ML
ESC ! * SLANT – OFF ML

Appendix A – Command summary > 300

ASCII Code Function Name Compatibility

GRAPHICS MODE
E S C * m n 1 n 2 ( G R A P H I C S BIT IMAGE GRAPHICS – EPS FX
DATA) SELECT DENSITY AND
ENTER GRAPHICS
E S C ^ m n 1 n 2 ( G R A P H I C S BIT IMAGE GRAPHICS – EPS FX
DATA) SELECT 9 PIN MODE
ESC ? m n BIT IMAGE GRAPHICS – REASSIGN EPS FX
GRAPHIC’S DENSITY COMMANDS
ESC K n1 n2 (GRAPHICS DATA) BIT IMAGE GRAPHICS – EPS FX/IBM III
DOUBLE HORIZONTAL DENSITY
ESC L n1 n2 (GRAPHICS DATA) BIT IMAGE GRAPHICS – EPS FX/IBM III
DOUBLE HORIZONTAL DENSITY –
NORMAL SPEED
ESC Y n1 n2 (GRAPHICS DATA) BIT IMAGE GRAPHICS – EPS FX/IBM III
DOUBLE HORZ DENSITY –
HIGH SPEED
ESC Z n1 n2 (GRAPHICS DATA) BIT IMAGE GRAPHICS – QUADRUPLE EPS FX/IBM III
HORIZONTAL DENSITY
ETX BIT IMAGE GRAPHICS – ENTER ML
ETX STX BIT IMAGE GRAPHICS – EXIT ML
ESC P BIT IMAGE GRAPHICS – TRUE SINGLE ML
HORIZONTAL DENSITY
ESC Q BIT IMAGE GRAPHICS – TRUE SINGLE ML
HORIZONTAL DENSITY
ESC R BIT IMAGE GRAPHICS – TRUE DOUBLE ML
HORIZONTAL DENSITY
ESC # Q BIT IMAGE GRAPHICS – DOUBLE SPEED ML
QUASI QUADRUPLE HORIZONTAL DENSITY
ETX LF BIT IMAGE GRAPHICS – ML
EXECUTE LF W/CR – TEXT AMOUNT
ETX DC2 BIT IMAGE GRAPHICS – ML
EXECUTE LF W/O CR – TEXT AMOUNT
ETX SO BIT IMAGE GRAPHICS – ML
EXECUTE LF W/CR – GRAPHICS AMOUNT
ETX DC4 BIT IMAGE GRAPHICS – ML
EXECUTE LF W/O CR – GRAPHICS
AMOUNT

COMPOSITE COMMANDS
ESC ! n COMPOSITE COMMANDS – EPS FX
SELECT PRINT FEATURES AND PITCH
ESC & n1 n2 n3 n4 : SELECT PRINT MODES AND FEATURES ML
ESC * n : BIT IMAGE GRAPHICS MODES AND ML
FEATURES
ESC ? n : CARRIAGE RETURN AND LINE FEED ML
CONTROL

Appendix A – Command summary > 301

ASCII Code Function Name Compatibility

GENERAL CONTROL
CAN RESET – CLEAR PRINT BUFFER PS FX/IBM III
ESC @ RESET – CLEAR BUFFER AND EPS FX
INITIALIZE PRINTER
ESC > MSB CONTROL – EPS FX
SET MSB EQUAL TO 1
ESC = MSB CONTROL – EPS FX
SET MSB EQUAL TO 0
ESC # MSB CONTROL – EPS FX
CANCEL MSB CONTROL
DC3 PRINT SUPPRESS – ON EPS FX
ESC Q ETX PRINT SUPPRESS – ON IBM III
ESC Q SYN PRINT SUPPRESS – ON IBM III
DC1 PRINT SUPPRESS – OFF EPS FX/IBM III
ESC s n PRINT SPEED – HALF – ON/OFF EPS FX
CAN RESET – CLEAR PRINT BUFFER ML
ESC CAN RESET – PRINT DATA AND INITIALIZE ML
PRINTER
DC3 PRINT SUPPRESS – ON ML
DC1 PRINT SUPPRESS – OFF ML
ESC < PRINT SPEED – HALF ML
ESC > PRINT SPEED – FULL ML
ESC j STOP PRINT IBM III
ESC { n EMULATION MODE SWITCHING EPS FX/IBM III/ML
ESC } NUL PRINTER INITIALIZATION EPS FX/IBM III/ML
ESC [ K Ln Hn Init Id Parm 1 SET INITIAL CONDITION IBM III
Parm 2
ESC ( U Ln Hn data Set Unit EPS FX
ESC DLE J P1 [DATA] Set Config Group EPS FX/IBM III/ML

BARCODE
ESC DLE A P1 N1 N2 N3 N4 SELECT BARCODE EPS FX/IBM III/ML
N5 N6 N7 N8
ESC DLE B P1 Pm [DATA] PRINT BARCODE DATA EPS FX/IBM III/ML
ESC DLE C P1 [DATA] PRINT POSTNET BARCODE DATA EPS FX/IBM III/ML
ESC ( B Ln Hn k m s PRINT BARCODE EPS FX
ESC [ f 06H 00H k m s v1 v2 c Setup Barcode Parameter IBM III
EAN13/8, CODE39/128, I2of5, UPC-A, Post-
Net
ESC [ p n1 n2 d1 d2 Setup Barcode Data IBM III
EAN13/8, CODE39/128, I2of5, UPC-A, Post-
Net

Appendix A – Command summary > 302

ML5790/ML5791
Command summary by intiator

ASCII Code Function Name Compatibility

BS BACKSPACE EPSON LQ/IBM

CAN CANCEL CODE EPSON LQ/IBM
CR CARRIAGE RETURN EPSON LQ/IBM
DC1 RESET PRINT SUPPRESS MODE EPSON LQ/IBM
DC2 RESET COMPRESSED CHARACTER PITCH EPSON LQ
DC2 SET 10 CPI IBM
DC3 SET PRINT SUPPRESS EPSON LQ
DC4 RESET IMMEDIATE DOUBLE WIDTH CHAR- EPSON LQ/IBM
ACTERS
DEL ONE CHARACTER DATA DELETE EPSON LQ
ESC ! n PRINT MODE SELECT EPSON LQ
ESC ! n SELECT INTERNATIONAL CHARACTER SET IBM
ESC # RESET 8 BIT MODE EPSON LQ
ESC # 0 Print Quality – Select HSD IBM
ESC $ n1 n2 EXECUTE ABSOLUTE HORIZONTAL DOT EPSON LQ
POSITION
ESC % 4 n FINE LINE FEED (n/360 INCH) IBM
ESC % 8 n SET n/360 INCH LINE SPACING IBM
ESC % G SET ITALICS CHARACTER IBM
ESC % H RESET ITALICS CHARACTERS IBM
ESC % n DLL FONT SELECT EPSON LQ
ESC & m n1 n2 d0 d1 d2 <DLL CHARACTER DEFINITION EPSON LQ
data>
ESC C – SELECT SCORE STYLE EPSON LQ
ESC * m n1 n2 <graphics data> ENTER/EXIT BIT IMAGE GRAPHICS EPSON LQ/IBM XL24
AGM
ESC – n SET/RESET UNDERLINING EPSON LQ/IBM
ESC / n SELECT VERTICAL TAB CHANNEL EPSON LQ
ESC 0 SET 1/8 INCH FIXED LINE SPACING EPSON LQ/IBM
ESC 1 SET 7/72 INCH FIXED LINE SPACING IBM
ESC 2 SET 1/6 INCH LINE SPACING EPSON LQ/IBM XL24
AGM
ESC 2 START LINE SPACING IBM PPR
ESC 3 n SET n/180 INCH LINE SPACING EPSON LQ/IBM PPR/
IBM XL24
ESC 4 SET ITALIC CHARACTERS EPSON LQ
ESC 4 TOP OF FORM SET IBM
ESC 5 RESET ITALIC CHARACTERS EPSON LQ
ESC 5 n SET/RESET AUTOMATIC LINEFEED IBM
ESC 6 SELECT CHARACTER SET II IBM
ESC 7 SELECT CHARACTER SET I IBM
ESC : SET 12 CPI IBM

Appendix A – Command summary > 303

ASCII Code Function Name Compatibility

ESC : NUL n NUL COPIES ROM CG TO RAM CG EPSON LQ

ESC < ONE LINE UNIDIRECTIONAL PRINTING EPSON LQ
ESC = SET BIT 7 CODE TO 0 EPSON LQ
ESC > SET BIT 7 CODE TO 1 EPSON LQ
ESC ? m n REASSIGN ALTERNATE GRAPHICS CODES EPSON LQ
ESC @ PRINTER INITIALIZATION EPSON LQ
ESC A n SET N/60 INCH LINE SPACING EPSON LQ/IBM PPR/
IBM XL24
ESC B n1 n2 … nk NUL SET VERTICAL TAB STOPS EPSON LQ/IBM
ESC C NUL n FORM LENGTH SET BY INCHES EPSON LQ/IBM
ESC C n FORM LENGTH SET BY LINES EPSON LQ/IBM
ESC D n1 n2 … nj nk NUL HORIZONTAL TAB SET EPSON LQ/IBM
ESC DLE @ SET PRINT POSITION EPSON LQ/IBM
ESC DLE A BAR CODE FORMAT EPSON LQ/IBM
ESC DLE B BAR CODE PRINT DATA EPSON LQ/IBM
ESC DLE C POSTNET ZIP CODE PRINT DATA EPSON LQ/IBM
ESC E SET EMPHASIZED PRINT MODE EPSON LQ/IBM
ESC EM I CUT SHEET FEEDERS SINGLE PAPER EPSON LQ/IBM
INSERT
ESC EM R CUT SHEET FEEDERS SINGLE PAPER EPSON LQ/IBM
EJECT
ESC F RESET EMPHASIZED PRINT MODE EPSON LQ/IBM
ESC G SET ENHANCED/DOUBLE STRIKE PRINT EPSON LQ/IBM
MODE
ESC H RESET ENHANCED/DOUBLE STRIKE PRINT EPSON LQ/IBM
MODE
ESC I n PRINT MODE SELECT IBM
ESC J n FINE LINE FEED (n/180 INCH) EPSON LQ/IBM PPR/
IBM XL24
ESC K n1 n2 <graphics data> SINGLE DENSITY GRAPHICS EPSON LQ/IBM
ESC L n1 n2 <graphics data> DOUBLE DENSITY GRAPHICS EPSON LQ/IBM
ESC M SET ELITE CHARACTER PITCH (12 CPI) EPSON LQ
ESC N n SET PERFORATION AUTO SKIP EPSON LQ/IBM
ESC O RESET PERFORATION AUTO SKIP EPSON LQ/IBM
ESC P SET PICA CHARACTER PITCH (10 CPI) EPSON LQ
ESC P n SET/RESET PROPORTIONAL SPACING IBM
ESC Q n PRINT SUPPRESS IBM
ESC Q n RIGHT MARGIN SET EPSON LQ
ESC R RESET TABLE SETTINGS TO POWER ON IBM
DEFAULT VALUES
ESC R n FOREIGN CHARACTER SET SELECT EPSON LQ
ESC S n SET SUBSCRIPT/SUPERSCRIPT EPSON LQ/IBM
ESC SI SET COMPRESSED CHARACTER PITCH EPSON LQ/IBM
ESC SO SET IMMEDIATE DOUBLE CHARACTERS EPSON LQ
ESC SP n SET CHARACTER SPACING EPSON LQ/IBM
ESC T RESET SUPER/SUBSCRIPT EPSON LQ/IBM

Appendix A – Command summary > 304

ASCII Code Function Name Compatibility

ESC U n SET/RESET UNIDIRECTIONAL PRINTING EPSON LQ/IBM

ESC US n SET/RESET DOUBLE HEIGHT CHARAC- EPSON LQ
TERS
ESC W n SET DOUBLE WIDTH OR EXPANDED EPSON LQ/IBM
CHARACTERS
ESC X n1 n2 SET LEFT/RIGHT MARGIN IBM
ESC Y n1 n2 <graphics data> QUASI-DOUBLE DENSITY GRAPHICS EPSON LQ/IBM
ESC Z n1 n2 <graphics data> SET QUADRUPLE DENSITY GRAPHICS EPSON LQ/IBM
ESC [ - Ln Hn p1 p2 SCORE SELECT IBM
ESC [ @ n1 n2 m1 m2 m3 m4 SET/RESET DOUBLE HEIGHT CHARAC- IBM
TERS
ESC [ d 01H 00H n SET PRINT QUALITY IBM
ESC [ I SELECT FONT IBM
ESC [ K SET INITIAL CONDITION IBM
ESC [ T SET CODE PAGE IBM
ESC [ \ 4 0 0 0 n1 n2 SET VERTICAL UNITS IBM
ESC [ f Ln Hn k m s v1 v2 c SET-UP BARCODE PARAMETER IBM
ESC [ g n1 n2 m data GRAPHICS RESOLUTION IBM XL24
ESC [ n SET n/360 INCH FINE LINE SPACING EPSON LQ
ESC [ p n1 n2 SET-UP BARCODE DATA IBM
ESC \ n1 n2 EXECUTE RELATIVE DOT POSITION EPSON LQ
ESC \ n1 n2 PRINT CONTINUOUSLY FROM ALL CHAR- IBM
ACTERS CHART
ESC ] n FINE LINE FEED (n/360 INCH) EPSON LQ
ESC * PRINT ONE CHARACTER FROM ALL IBM
CHARACTERS CHART
ESC _ n OVERSCORE SET/RESET IBM
ESC a n AUTO JUSTIFICATION EPSON LQ
ESC b n m1 m2 … mk NUL SET VERTICAL FORMAT UNIT (VFU) EPSON LQ
ESC d n1 n2 MOVE RIGHT RELATIVE DOT POSITION IBM
ESC e RELATIVE MOVE INLINE BACKWARD IBM
ESC g SET 15 CHARACTER PER INCH EPSON LQ/IBM
ESC j STOP PRINTING IBM
ESC j n REVERSE LINE FEED EPSON LQ
ESC k n SELECT TYPESTYLES EPSON LQ/IBM
ESC I n LEFT MARGIN SET EPSON LQ
ESC n SET ASPECT RATIO IBM
ESC p n SET/RESET PROPORTIONAL SPACING EPSON LQ
ESC q n SELECT CHARACTER STYLE EPSON LQ
ESC s n SET/RESET HALF SPEED PRINTING EPSON LQ
ESC t n SELECT CHARACTER TABLE EPSON LQ
ESC w n SET/RESET DOUBLE HEIGHT CHARAC- EPSON LQ
TERS
ESC x n SELECT CHARACTER FONT EPSON LQ
ESC y n SELECT FONT EPSON LQ

Appendix A – Command summary > 305

ASCII Code Function Name Compatibility

FF FORM FEED EPSON LQ/IBM

HT HORIZONTAL TAB EPSON LQ/IBM
LF LINE FEED EPSON LQ/IBM
SI SET COMPRESSED CHARACTER PITCH EPSON LQ/IBM
SO SET IMMEDIATE DOUBLE WIDTH CHARAC- EPSON LQ/IBM
TERS
VT VERTICAL TAB EPSON LQ/IBM
ESC + SELECT N/360 m LINE SPACING EPSON LQ
ESC 6 DISABLE UPPER ASCII CONTROL CODE EPSON LQ
ESC 7 ENABLE UPPER ASCII CONTROL CODES EPSON LQ
ESC 8 DISABLE PAPER OUT SENSOR EPSON LQ/IBM
ESC 9 ENABLE PAPER OUT SENSOR EPSON LQ/IBM
ESC } NUL SOFTWARE I-PRIME EPSON LQ/IBM
ESC ( - SCORE STYLE-SELECT EPSON LQ
ESC ( 0 PRINT QUALITY – SELECT HSD EPSON LQ
ESC ( B PRINT BARCODE EPSON LQ
ESC ( C PAGE LENGTH IN DEFINED UNIT-SET EPSON LQ
ESC ( G GRAPHIC MODE-SELECT EPSON LQ
ESC ( U UNIT-SET EPSON LQ
ESC ( V ABSOLUTE VERTICAL POSITION-SET EPSON LQ
ESC ( ^ PRINT DATA AS CHARACTERS EPSON LQ
ESC ( c PAGE FORMAT-SET EPSON LQ
ESC ( n PRINT POSITION MOTINION EPSON LQ
ESC ( t ASSIGN CHARACTER TABLE EPSON LQ
ESC ( v RELATIVE VERTICAL POSITION-SET EPSON LQ
ESC . PRINT RASTER GRAPHICS EPSON LQ
ESC X FONT BY PITCH AND POINT SET EPSON LQ
ESC ] FINE LINE FEED EXECUTE (n/360") EPSON LQ
ESC c HORIZONTAL MOTION INDEX (HMI) SET EPSON LQ
ESC i INCREMENTAL PRINT MODE EPSON LQ/IBM
ESC { n SELECT EMULATION MODE EPSON LQ/IBM
ESC DLE NUL PRINT ROM-FD VERSION EPSON LQ/IBM
ESC DLE SOH LOCAL TEST HEADER LOADING EPSON LQ/IBM
ESC DLE STX MENU FACTORY SET LOADING EPSON LQ/IBM
ESC DLE F FONT BY PITCH AND POINT SET IBM
ESC DLE G SET/RESET GRAPHIC MODE EPSON LQ
ESC DLE J SET CONFIG GROUP EPSON LQ/IBM

Appendix A – Command summary > 306

Command summary by function

Function Name ASCII Code Compatibility

AUTO JUSTIFICATION ESC a n EPSON LQ

BACKSPACE BS EPSON LQ/IBM
CANCEL CODE CAN EPSON LQ/IBM
CARRIAGE RETURN CR EPSON LQ/IBM
CHARACTER DEFINITION ESC & m n1 n2 d0 d1 d2 <DLL EPSON LQ
data>
COPIES FROM CG TO RAM CG ESC : NUL n NUL EPSON LQ
CUT SHEET FEEDERS SINGLE PAPER ESC EM R EPSON LQ/IBM
EJECT
CUT SHEET FEEDERS SINGLE PAPER ESC EM I EPSON LQ/IBM
INSERT
DLL FONT SELECT ESC % n EPSON LQ
DOUBLE DENSITY GRAPHICS ESC L n1 n2 <graphics data> EPSON LQ/IBM
ENABLE UPPER ASCII CONTROL CODES ESC 7 EPSON LQ/IBM
ENTER/EXIT BIT IMAGE GRAPHICS ESC * m n1 n2 <graphics data> EPSON LQ/IBM XL24
AGM
EXECUTE ABSOLUTE HORIZONTAL DOT ESC $ n1 n2 EPSON LQ
POSITION
EXECUTE RELATIVE DOT POSITION ESC \ n1 n2 EPSON LQ
FINE LINE FEED (n/180 INCH) ESC J n EPSON LQ/IBM PPR/
IBM XL24
FINE LINE FEED (n/360 INCH) ESC ] n EPSON LQ
FINE LINE FEED (n/360 INCH) ESC % 4 n IBM
FOREIGN CHARACTER SET SELECT ESC R n EPSON LQ
FORM FEED FF EPSON LQ/IBM
FORM LENGTH SET BY INCHES ESC C NUL n EPSON LQ/IBM
FORM LENGTH SET BY LINES ESC C n EPSON LQ/IBM
GRAPHICS RESOLUTION ESC [ g n1 n2 m data IBM PPR
HORIZONTAL TAB HT EPSON LQ/IBM
HORIZONTAL TAB SET ESC D n1 n2 … nj nk NUL EPSON LQ/IBM
LEFT MARGIN SET ESC I n EPSON LQ
LINE FEED LF EPSON LQ/IBM
MOVE RIGHT RELATIVE DOT POSITION ESC d n1 n2 IBM
ONE CHARACTER DATA DELETE DEL EPSON LQ
ONE LINE UNIDIRECTIONAL PRINTING ESC < EPSON LQ
OVERSCORE SET/RESET ESC _ n IBM
PRINT BARCODE ESC ( B EPSON LQ
PRINT CONTINUOUSLY FROM ALL CHAR- ESC \ n1 n2 IBM
ACTERS CHART
PRINT MODE SELECT ESC ! n EPSON LQ
PRINT MODE SELECT ESC / n IBM
PRINT ONE CHARACTER FROM ALL ESC * IBM
CHARACTERS CHART
PRINT POSITION MOTINION ESC ( n EPSON LQ
PRINT QUALITY – SELECT HSD ESC # 0 IBM

Appendix A – Command summary > 307

Function Name ASCII Code Compatibility

PRINT QUALITY – SELECT HSD ESC ( 0 EPSON LQ

PRINT SUPPRESS ESC Q n IBM
PRINTER INITIALIZATION ESC @ EPSON LQ
QUASI-DOUBLE DENSITY GRAPHICS ESC Y n1 n2 <graphics data> EPSON LQ/IBM
REASSIGN ALTERNATE GRAPHICS CODES ESC ? m n EPSON LQ
RESET 8 BIT MODE ESC # EPSON LQ
RESET COMPRESSED CHARACTER PITCH DC2 EPSON LQ
RESET EMPHASIZED PRINT MODE ESC F EPSON LQ/IBM
RESET ENHANCED/DOUBLE STRIKE PRINT ESC H EPSON LQ/IBM
MODE
RESET IMMEDIATE DOUBLE WIDTH CHAR- DC4 EPSON LQ/IBM
ACTERS
RESET ITALIC CHARACTERS ESC 5 EPSON LQ
RESET ITALICS CHARACTERS ESC % H IBM
RESET PERFORATION AUTO SKIP ESC 0 EPSON LQ/IBM
RESET PRINT SUPPRESS MODE DC1 EPSON LQ/IBM
RESET SUPER/SUBSCRIPT ESC T EPSON LQ/IBM
RESET TAB SETTINGS TO POWER-ON DE- ESC R IBM
FAULT VALUES
REVERSE LINE FEED ESC j n EPSON LQ
RIGHT MARGIN SET ESC Q n EPSON LQ
SCORE SELECT ESC L - Ln Hn P1 P2 IBM
SELECT CHARACTER FONT ESC X n EPSON LQ
SELECT CHARACTER SET II ESC 6 EPSON LQ/IBM
SELECT CHARACTER TABLE ESC t n EPSON LQ
SELECT FONT ESC y n EPSON LQ
SELECT INTERNATIONAL CHARACTER SET ESC ! n IBM
SELECT TYPESTYLES ESC k n EPSON LQ/IBM
SELECT VERTICAL TAB CHANNEL ESC / n EPSON LQ
SET PRINT QUALITY ESC [ d 01H 00H n IBM
SET/RESET DOUBLE HEIGHT CHARAC- ESC US n EPSON LQ
TERS
SET/RESET DOUBLE HEIGHT CHARAC- ESC w n EPSON LQ
TERS
SET/RESET DOUBLE HEIGHT CHARAC- ESC [ @ n1 n2 m1 m2 m3 m4 IBM
TERS
SET 1/6 INCH LINE SPACING ESC 2 EPSON LQ/IBM XL24
AGM
SET 1/8 INCH FIXED LINE SPACING ESC Ø EPSON LQ/IBM
SET 10 CPI DC2 IBM
SET 12 CPI ESC : IBM
SET 15 CHARACTER PER INCH ESC g EPSON LQ/IBM
SET 7/72 INCH FIXED LINE SPACING ESC 1 IBM
SET BIT 7 CODE TO 0 ESC = EPSON LQ
SET BIT 7 CODE TO 1 ESC > EPSON LQ
SET CHARACTER SPACING ESC SP n EPSON LQ

Appendix A – Command summary > 308

Function Name ASCII Code Compatibility

SET COMPRESSED CHARACTER PITCH ESC SI EPSON LQ/IBM

SET COMPRESSED CHARACTER PITCH SI EPSON LQ/IBM
SET DOUBLE WIDTH OR EXPANDED ESC W n EPSON LQ/IBM
CHARACTERS
SET ELITE CHARACTER PITCH (12 CPI) ESC M EPSON LQ
SET EMPHASIZED PRINT MODE ESC E EPSON LQ/IBM
SET ENHANCED/DOUBLE STRIKE PRINT ESC G EPSON LQ/IBM
MODE
SET IMMEDIATE DOUBLE WIDTH CHARAC- ESC S0 EPSON LQ
TERS
SET IMMEDIATE DOUBLE WIDTH CHARAC- SO EPSON LQ/IBM
TERS
SET ITALIC CHARACTERS ESC 4 EPSON LQ
SET ITALICS CHARACTER ESC % G IBM
SET LEFT/RIGHT MARGIN ESC X n1 n2 IBM
SET PERFORATION AUTO SKIP ESC N n EPSON LQ/IBM
SET PICA CHARACTER PITCH (10 CPI) ESC P EPSON LQ
SET PRINT SUPPRESS DC3 EPSON LQ
SET QUADRUPLE DENSITY GRAPHICS ESC Z n1 <graphics data> EPSON LQ/IBM
SET SUBSCRIPTS/SUPERSCRIPT ESC S n EPSON LQ/IBM
SET VERTICAL FORMAT UNIT (VFU) ESC b n m1 m2 … mk NUL EPSON LQ
SET VERTICAL TAB STOPS ESC B n1 n2 … nk NUL EPSON LQ/IBM
SET VERTICAL UNITS ESC [ \ 4 0 0 0 n1 n2 IBM
SET n/180 INCH LINE SPACING ESC 3 n EPSON LQ/IBM PPR/
IBM XL24
SET n/360 INCH FINE LINE SPACING ESC [ n EPSON LQ
SET n/360 INCH LINE SPACING ESC % 8 n IBM
SET n/60 INCH LINE SPACING ESC A n EPSON LQ/IBM PPR/
IBM XL24
SET/RESET AUTOMATIC LINEFEED ESC 5 n IBM
SET/RESET HALF SPEED PRINTING ESC s n EPSON LQ
SET/RESET PROPORTIONAL SPACING ESC p n EPSON LQ
SET/RESET PROPORTIONAL SPACING ESC P n IBM
SET/RESET UNDERLINING ESC — n EPSON LQ/IBM
SET/RESET UNIDIRECTIONAL PRINTING ESC U n EPSON LQ/IBM
SET-UP BARCODE DATA ESC [ p n1 n2 d1 d2 IBM
SET-UP BARCODE PARAMETER ESC [ f Ln Hn k m s v1 v2 c IBM
SINGLE DENSITY GRAPHICS ESC k n1 n2 <graphics data> EPSON LQ/IBM
START LINE SPACING ESC 2 IBM PPR
STOP PRINTING ESC j IBM
TOP OF FORM SET ESC 4 IBM
VERTICAL TAB VT EPSON LQ/IBM
SET n/360 INCH LINE SPACING ESC + n EPSON
DISABLED PAPER END SENSOR ESC 8 EPSON/IBM
ENABLED PAPER END SENSOR ESC 9 EPSON/IBM
SELECT CHARACTER STYLE ESC q n EPSON LQ/IBM

Appendix A – Command summary > 309

Function Name ASCII Code Compatibility

SELECT Draft/LQ PRINT QUALITY ESC x n EPSON LQ

PRINT ROM-FD VERSITION ESC DLE NUL EPSON LQ/IBM
LOCAL TEST HEADER LOADING ESC DLE SOH EPSON LQ/IBM
MENU FACTORY SET LOADING ESC DLE STX EPSON LQ/IBM
SET PRINT POSITION ESC DLE @ EPSON LQ/IBM
BARCODE FORMAT ESC DLE A EPSON LQ/IBM
BARCODE PRINT DATA ESC DLE B EPSON LQ/IBM
POSTNET ZIP CODE PRINT DATA ESC DLE C EPSON LQ/IBM
MENU DATA LOADING ESC DLE D EPSON LQ/IBM
SELECT FONT BY PITCH AND POINT ESC DLE F IBM
SELECT EMULATION MODE ESC { n EPSON LQ/IBM
SOFTWARE I-PRIME ESC } NUL EPSON LQ/IBM
SELECT SCORE STYLE ESC { - EPSON LQ
SET PAGE LENGTH IN DEFINED UNIT ESC ( C EPSON LQ
SELECT GRAPHICS MODE ESC ( G EPSON LQ
UNIT SET ESC ( U EPSON LQ
SET ABSOLUTE VERTICAL POSITION ESC ( V EPSON LQ
PRINT DATA AS CHARACTERS ESC ( ^ EPSON LQ
SET PAGE FORMAT ESC ( c EPSON LQ
ASSIGN CHARACTER TABLE ESC ( t EPSON LQ
SET RELATIVE VERTICAL POSITION ESC ( v EPSON LQ
PRINT RASTER GRAPHICS ESC . EPSON LQ
SELECT FONT ESC [ I IBM
SET INITIAL CONDITION ESC [ K IBM
SELECT CODE PAGE ESC [ T IBM
INCREMENTAL PRINT MODE ESC i EPSON LQ/IBM
RELATIVE MODE INLINE BACKWARD ESC e IBM
SELECT ASPECT RATIO ESC n IBM

Appendix A – Command summary > 310

APPENDIX B – PRINT MODES/FEATURES
ML5720/ML5721

IBM MODE
Priority 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Inter-character clearance
Enhanced (double strike)
Superscript/subscript

Overscore/underline
Proportional Print

Emphasized printing
Draft-ROM/RAM
NLQ-ROM/RAM
Priority

Double height
Line graphics

Double width
HSD-ROM
SSD-ROM

(horizontal)
17.1 CPI

Scalable
Firstfont
10 CPI
12 CPI
15 CPI

20 CPI

Italics
10 CPI – – – – – – –
12 CPI – – – – – – –
15 CPI – – – – – – –
1 17.1 CPI – – – – – – –
20 CPI – – – – – – –
Proportional Print – – – – – – × × –
Firstfont – – – – – – – – – – × ×
2 Line graphics × × ×
3 Superscript/subscript ×
HSD-ROM × – – – – × ×
SSD-ROM × – – – – × ×
4
Draft-ROM/RAM – – – – ×
NLQ-ROM/RAM – – – –
5 Scalable – – – – – – × × × × × × × – – –
6 Italics × ×
Emphasized printing ×
(horizontal)
Enhanced (double strike) ×
Double width –
7
Double height –
Overscore/underline ×
Inter-character clearance × × × –

– : No combination of model feature

× : Combination of model/feature disabled. The mode/feature with a lower priority level is suppressed.
: SSD is suppressed and HSD is printed.
Black : Combination of model/feature enabled.
NOTE
1. The following modifications are not made to Integral (F4H,F5H)
characters: Super Script/Sub Script, Italics, Overscore and Underline.
2. The following modifications are not made to an under-bar (5FH) character
and double under-bar (multilingual F2H) character:
Super Script/Sub Script
3. Inter-character clearance can be added to First Font and RAM CG feature.
4. The enhanced (double strike) feature includes emphasized printing.

Appendix B – Print modes/features > 311

EPSON MODE
Priority 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Inter-character clearance
Enhanced (double strike)
Superscript/subscript
Proportional Print

Emphasized printing
Draft-ROM/RAM
NLQ-ROM/RAM
Priority

Double height
Line graphics

Double width
HSD-ROM
SSD-ROM

Underline
(horizontal)
17.1 CPI

Scalable
10 CPI
12 CPI
15 CPI

20 CPI

Italics
10 CPI – – – – – –
12 CPI – – – – – –
15 CPI – – – – – –
1
17.1 CPI – – – – – –
20 CPI – – – – – –
Proportional Print – – – – – × × –
2 Line graphics × × ×
3 Superscript/subscript ×
HSD-ROM × – – – × ×
SSD-ROM × – – – × ×
4
Draft-ROM/RAM – – – ×
NLQ-ROM/RAM – – –
5 Scalable – – – – – – × × × × × × – – –
6 Italics × ×
Emphasized printing ×
(horizontal)
Enhanced (double strike) ×
Double width –
7
Double height –
Underline ×
Inter-character clearance × × –

– : No combination of model feature

× : Combination of model/feature disabled. The mode/feature with a lower priority level is suppressed.
: SSD is suppressed and HSD is printed.
Black : Combination of model/feature enabled.

NOTE
1. The following modifications are not made to Integral (F4H, F5H)
characters:
Super Script/Sub Script, Italics and Underline.
2. The following modifications are not made to an under-bar (5FH) character
and double under-bar (multilingual F2H) character:
Super Script/Sub Script.
3. RAM CG feature has priority, and Line Graphics combination with RAM CG
is not possible.
4. The enhanced double strike feature includes emphasised printing.

Appendix B – Print modes/features > 312

ML MODE
Priority 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Inter-character clearance
Enhanced (double strike)
Superscript/subscript
Proportional Printing

Emphasized printing
Draft-ROM/RAM
NLQ-ROM/RAM
Blocks graphics
Priority

Double height
Line graphics

Double width
HSD-ROM
SSD-ROM

Underline
(horizontal)
17.1 CPI

Scalable
10 CPI
12 CPI
15 CPI

20 CPI

Italics
10 CPI – – – – –
12 CPI – – – – –
1 15 CPI – – – – –
17.1 CPI – – – – –
20 CPI – – – – –
2 Proportional Printing × × –
Line graphics × × ×
3
Blocks graphics
4 Superscript/subscript ×
HSD-ROM × – – – × ×
SSD-ROM × – – – × ×
5
Draft-ROM/RAM – – – ×
NLQ-ROM/RAM – – –
6 Scalable – – – – – – × × × × × × – – –
7 Italics × ×
Emphasized printing ×
(horizontal)
Enhanced (double strike) × × × ×
Double width –
8
Double height –
Underline ×
Inter-character clearance × × –

– : No combination of model feature

× : Combination of model/feature disabled. The mode/feature with a lower priority level is suppressed.
: SSD is suppressed and HSD is printed.
Black : Combination of model/feature enabled.

NOTE
1. The following modifications are not made to Integral (F4H, F5H)
characters:
Super Script/Sub Script, Italics and Underline.
2. The following modifications are not made to an under-bar (5FH) character
and double under-bar (multilingual F2H) character:
Super Script/Sub Script.
3. RAM CG feature has priority, and Line Graphics combination with RAM CG
is not possible.
4. The enhanced double strike feature includes emphasised printing.

Appendix B – Print modes/features > 313

ML5790/ML5791

IBM MODE
Priority 1 2 3 4 5 6

Horizontal Expansion
Horizontal Enhancement

Vertical Expansion
Draft-ROM/RAM
NLQ-ROM/RAM

Outline/Shadow
Priority

Line Graphics
Proportional

Super/Subs

Double Strike
17.1 CPI

Scalable
10 CPI
12 CPI
15 CPI

20 CPI

Score
Italics
10 CPI – – – – – –
12 CPI – – – – – –
15 CPI – – – – – –
1
17.1 CPI – – – – – –
20 CPI – – – – – –
Proportional – – – – – –
2 Line Graphics × × × ×
3 Super/Sub ×
Draft-ROM/RAM – –
4 NLQ-ROM/RAM – –
Scalable – –
5 Italics ×
Horizontal Enhancement
Double Strike

Horizontal Expansion
6
Vertical Expansion
Outline/Shadow ×
Score ×

– : Combination is not provided.

× : Combination is impossible. A mode with the lower priority is suppressed.
No marking : Combination is possible.

Combinations are given for the case where modes are sent in the order, .

NOTE
1. The following modifications are not made to Integral (F4H, F5H)
characters:
Super Script/Sub Script, Italics, Outline/Shadow, Score
2. The following modifications are not made to an under-bar (5FH) character
and double under-bar (multilingual F2H) character:
Super Script/Sub Script, Italics, Outline/Shadow
3. For combination with Scalable, which may be special, see the command to
select a font for its pitch and point.

Appendix B – Print modes/features > 314

EPSON MODE

Priority 1 2 3 4 5 6

Horizontal Expansion
Horizontal Enhancement

Vertical Expansion
One-line Horizontal
Draft-ROM/RAM
NLQ-ROM/RAM

Outline/Shadow
Priority

Line Graphics
Proportional

Super/Subs

Double Strike

Clearance
Expansion
17.1 CPI

Scalable
10 CPI
12 CPI
15 CPI

20 CPI

Score
Italics

HMI
10 CPI – – – – – – –
12 CPI – – – – – – –
15 CPI – – – – – – –
1
17.1 CPI – – – – – – –
20 CPI – – – – – – –
Proportional – – – – – – –
2 Line Graphics × × × ×
3 Super/Sub ×
Draft-ROM/RAM – –
4 NLQ-ROM/RAM – –
Scalable – – – – – –
5 Italics ×
Horizontal Enhancement
Double Strike

Horizontal Expansion – –
One-line Horizontal – –
Expansion
6 Vertical Expansion – –
Outline/Shadow ×
Score ×
Clearance – –
HMI * * – –

– : Combination is not provided.

× : Combination is impossible. A mode with the lower priority is suppressed.
No marking : Combination is possible.
: Combination is impossible. A mode sent first is suppressed.
* : Condense mode is suppressed.

Combinations are given for the case where modes are sent in the order, .

NOTE
1. The following modifications are not made to Integral (F4H, F5H)
characters:
Super Script/Sub Script, Italics, Outline/Shadow, Score
2. The following modifications are not made to an under-bar (5FH) character
and double under-bar (multilingual F2H) character.
Super Script/Sub Script

Appendix B – Print modes/features > 315

APPENDIX C – CODE PAGES
ML5720/ML5721

Appendix C – Code pages > 316

Appendix C – Code pages > 317
Appendix C – Code pages > 318
Appendix C – Code pages > 319
Appendix C – Code pages > 320
Appendix C – Code pages > 321
Appendix C – Code pages > 322
Appendix C – Code pages > 323
Appendix C – Code pages > 324
Appendix C – Code pages > 325
Appendix C – Code pages > 326
Appendix C – Code pages > 327
Appendix C – Code pages > 328
Appendix C – Code pages > 329
Appendix C – Code pages > 330
ML5790/ML5791

Appendix C – Code pages > 331

Appendix C – Code pages > 332
Appendix C – Code pages > 333
Appendix C – Code pages > 334
Appendix C – Code pages > 335
Appendix C – Code pages > 336
Appendix C – Code pages > 337
Appendix C – Code pages > 338
Appendix C – Code pages > 339
APPENDIX D – MEDIA SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL

Unsuitable paper
The following paper is not to be used as paper feed instability may result, causing paper
jamming, paper folding, print misalignment or, at worst, printhead pin breaking.
> Ultra light or heavy paper (not meeting media specifications)
> Too small or too large paper (not meeting media specifications)
> Paper with cutouts or windows
> Paper with pins, clips and staples
> Creased or wrinkled paper
> Paper with exposed glue or with peeling areas
> Paper with embossed surfaces
> Continuous paper folded at places other than along horizontal perforations
> Multipart forms where not all parts are of the same size, or multipart continuous
forms where the number of parts varies along the length of the form
> Paper with torn or folded ends, sides or corners
> Paper bearing postage stamps or seals

Tear Peeling Fold Creases

Pre-printed paper
When printing on paper with pre-printed lines and tables, the print may not appear where
expected within the lines and table frames due to paper feed effects or misaligned paper
setting. Note the following points when using pre-printed paper.
> Carry out adequate test prints initially to ensure that there is no problem with the
print quality. (If the reflectance of printed part on the pre-print section becomes
60% or less (especially, black family), the paper detection sensors in the printer
may not detect the paper.)
> Make sure that there is no wet ink or ink that has not completely dried on the pre-
printed sheets, to prevent pieces of paper from sticking to each other.
> Do not use pre-printed sheets with print margins at the maximum possible printable
margin positions.

Appendix D – Media specifications > 340

> When pre-printing a vertical and horizontal border, allow space such that the
borders are positioned at the center of characters and lines as illustrated. This will
provide for any paper misalignment.
Vertical border

Horizontal border

ABC 123

Paper storage conditions

Paper is to be stored under environmental conditions of temperature 10 – 30°C and relative
humidity 30 – 70%. Also, when there is a difference in environmental conditions between
the storage area and where the paper is used, allow time for the paper to reach the
environmental conditions of where it is to be used before using it.

Usable paper types and assurance range

In the following table, “assurance” means that printer specifications, including print
specifications and paper feeding characteristics, are met. The symbols in the Assurance
column have the following meanings:
A: paper types usable, with assurance
B: paper types conditionally usable, but without assurance.

PAPER TYPE ASSURANCE CONDITIONS

Continuous paper A See “Continuous paper

(continuous forms)” on
page 342.

Continuous paper with B See “Binding holes” on

binding holes page 350.

Continuous paper with B See “Corner cuts” on

corner cut page 351.

Cut-Sheet paper A See “Cut-sheet paper”

on page 352.

Cut-Sheet paper with B See “Perforations” on

horizontal perforation page 353.
line

Envelope A See “Envelopes” on

page 356.

Card stock paper A See “Cardstock paper”

on page 358.

Label paper B See “Label paper” on

page 358.

Appendix D – Media specifications > 341

CONTINUOUS PAPER (CONTINUOUS FORMS)
Continuous paper must be fanfold paper with feed holes.
Y

Centre line Centre line

Horizontal perforation line

B
D

C T

E
90

A A
Vertical perforation line

Vertical and horizontal dimensions

(Measurement Condition: Temperatures 20 ± 2 °C, Relative Humidity: 65 ± 2%.)

Vertical dimension
The following is standard for the vertical dimension T.

T DIMENSION ALLOWANCE(MM)

279.4mm 11in ±0.5

For usable areas, see “Paper size and printing areas” on page 346.

Horizontal dimension
The following two types are standards for the horizontal dimension Y.

Y DIMENSION ALLOWANCE(MM)

254.0mm 10in ±0.5

381.0mm 15in

For usable areas, see “Paper size and printing areas” on page 346.

Folding dimension
The following is a standard folding dimension. Paper is to be fan-folded along perforations.

F DIMENSION CORRESPONDING
VERTICAL DIMENSION

279.4mm 11in 279.4mm

Appendix D – Media specifications > 342

Feed hole (sprocket hole) positions and sizes
Sprocket hole positions and sizes are shown below. For this section, a centre line is defined
as a centre-to-centre line between any two sprocket holes approximately 254 mm apart in
the direction of paper feed.

ITEM DIMENSION (MM) REMARKS

Distance between A 6.35 ±0.7 6.35 mm is

centre line and paper standard.
edge on same side

Sprocket hole D 4.0 ±0.1 The diameters

diameter of sprocket
holes with a
dentate edge
must be a
minimum of D
and a
maximum of
4.5 mm.

Centre-to-centre B 12.70 ± 0.05 Centre-to-

distance between centre distance
sprocket holes between
adjacent
sprocket holes.

Cumulative error in - Within ±0.3 Distance

centre-to-centre between any
distance between two sprocket
sprocket holes holes within
254 mm.

Deviation of sprocket C Within 0.1 Deviation of

hole centre from its sprocket hole
position from centre
line on that
hole side.

Vertical E Within 0.15 Amount of

misalignment misalignment
between horizontally between a line
corresponding that is drawn
sprocket holes through the
centre of any
left-side
sprocket hole
and vertically
to that-side
centre line, and
the centre of its
corresponding
right-side
sprocket hole.

Inclination of centre - Within 0.15 When both

line on each side centre lines are
moved parallel
to themselves
to overlap each
other at one
end, distance
between the
other ends.

Appendix D – Media specifications > 343

 NOTE
> The shape of sprocket holes must be a complete circle on both sides of the
paper, or a complete circle on the left and an oval on the right. Also,
dentate edges of the holes are allowable.
> Ensure that sprocket hole edges do not turn down.
> Oval hole size is shown below, dimensions in mm:

6–0.1

4–0.1

> Make sure that chad arising from sprocket hole punching does not remain
on the paper.

Perforation dimensions
> Perforations must be able to withstand full-speed paper feed and be easy to tear.
> Uncuts (i.e. uncut segments) of perforations must be uncut securely, and not be torn
at any position. Note that uncuts particularly on folding lines are apt to tear.
> For proper proportion of cut to uncut for perforations, which is determined according
to paper quality, weight and the number of form parts, the following is
recommended:

NUMBER OF CUT UNCUT

FORM PARTS LENGTH LENGTH

Horizontal 1–5 2 – 3 mm 1 mm
perforation Rear
tractor

Vertical perforation 1–5 3 mm 1 mm

Rear tractor

> Horizontal perforations

1 – 2 mm of each side edge is to be uncut.

Appendix D – Media specifications > 344

> Vertical perforations
Printing is not to be performed within 6.35 mm (1/4 in) of any vertical perforation
that runs in printing areas. The cuts of vertical and horizontal perforations are to
uncross each other at the points the perforations cross each other, to prevent paper
peeling.
Units:mm

1
Perforation Uncut Horizontal perforation
2~3
uncrossed Cut
Perforation crossing
(unallowable)

1~2 1~2
Uncut Uncut
1
Uncut
Vertical
perforations

12.7
2~3
Cut

12.7
Perforation
uncrossed 6.35 6.35
Printing prohibited Printing prohibited Perforation crossing
Horizontal perforation
in shaded area in shaded area (Allowable)

NOTE
Paper may float at any perforation cuts of its right or left side or of any
crosspoints of perforations and cause the carriage to snag on it.

Appendix D – Media specifications > 345

Paper size and printing areas

2nd layer
1st layer

3rd layer
4th layer
5th layer
6th layer
6.35 E F 6.35
1 st character 12.7
A’
6.35 12.7
12.7 A
12.7

50.8 L
f4

: Printing area
Paste spot
: Printable area detailed view
B B'
B''
C'' Paste spot
C C' See detailed view

Folds must be
straightened by
stretching the paper
D
G

DIMENSION NAME SPECIFICATION VALUE

ML5720/ML5790 ML5721/ML5791

W Paper width 76.2 to 254mm (3 to 76.2 to 406.4mm (3 to

10 in) 16 in)

L Paper length 76.2 to 355.6 mm (3 to 14 in).

However, 279.4 mm (11 in), an integral multiple of
25.4 mm (1 in), is standard.

A Positioning start 35mm (1.38 in) [A’ :2.12mm (1/12 in)]

position
(dimension)

B Print prohibition 16.9mm (2/3 in) [B’ Approx. 19.05mm (3/4 in) B”:
area 6.35mm (1/4 in)]

C Print prohibition 16.9mm (2/3 in) [C’ Approx. 19.05mm (3/4 in) C”:
area 6.35mm (1/4 in)]

D Print end detection Approx. Rear-push path 64mm (2.5 in), Front-push
position path 54mm (2.1 in). With override function,
printing can continue upto 0.5mm

E First character For paper width of 3 ~ For paper width of 3 ~

printing position 9.5 in: 11.73 ~20.32 15 in: 11.73 ~20.32
mm mm
For paper width of 10 For paper width of 16 in:
in: 20.32 mm 25.4mm

F Print prohibition For paper width of 3 ~ For paper width of 3 ~

area 9.5 in: 10.67 mm 15 in : 10.67 mm
(0.42 in) or more (0.42 in) or more
For paper width of 10 For paper width of 16 in:
in: 16.51 mm (0.65 16.51 mm (0.65 in) or
in) or more more
(upto the 80th (upto the 136th
character within the character within the
range of "E" value.) range of "E" value.)

G Print prohibition 6.35mm (1/4 in)

area

Appendix D – Media specifications > 346

 NOTE
> Line feed spacing is selectable between 4.23mm (0.167 in) (6 LPI) and
3.18mm (0.125 in) (8 LPI)
> Print specifications do not apply to the last sheet of paper.
> ML5721: When not less than 127 mm (5 inches) papers are used at the
rear tractor, the seat support placed between tractors should be removed.
> ML5791: When not less than 100 mm (4 inches) papers are used at the
rear tractor, the seat support placed between tractors should be removed.
> Printing is not assured on paper dislocated from the tractor unit and the
setting of the first print line will not be accurate.

Paper ream weight

> Single sheets paper:
Ream weight 45 to 90 g/m2 (12 to 24 lbs)
Suface coarseness:
Sheffield 75 ~ 300 sec
Bekk 90 ~ 7 sec
Paper thickness:
0.05 ~ 0.12mm (0.002 ~ 0.0049 in)
> Multiple-part paper:

PAPER TYPE REAM WEIGHT NO. OF SHEETS

ML5720/ML5721 ML5790/ML5791

Carbon-lined 35 to 40g/m2 Max. six sheets Max. five sheets

paper including original including original
(9 to 11 lbs)
Pressure- (Rear/Front push
sensitive paper feed)
Max. seven sheets
including original
(Front/Bottom pull
feed)

Interleaf paper 38 to 40 g/m2 (10 Max. five sheets Max. four sheets
to 12 lbs) including original including original
(Rear/Front push
Carbon paper
feed)
34g/m2 (9 lbs)
Max. six sheets
including original
(Front/Bottom pull
feed)

NOTE
> The printer can handle multi-part continuous forms with total thickness of
0.36mm (0.014 in) or less with Rear/Front Push feed and 0.44mm (0.017
in) or less with Rear/Front Push and Pull feed, 0.48mm (0.019) inches or
less with Bottom feed.
> Carbon paper weight should be of 34 g/m2 (9 lbs) with a thickness of
0.03mm or less.
> Multiple-part paper must be fastened by spot or crimping on both sides,
and must be free of winkles.

Appendix D – Media specifications > 347

Maximum paper thickness
> 0.36mm (0.014 inches) [when employing Rear/Front Push feed]
> 0.44mm (0.017 inches) [when employing Rear/Front Pull and Push feed]
> 0.48mm (0.019 inches) [when employing Bottom feed]

Methods for joining parts of multipart forms

Spot gluing or stapleless stapling is used for joining the parts of each multipart form. To
prevent misalignment between parts, gluing is required. Stapleless stapling may cause a
misalignment of about 3 mm between parts. Stapling with metal staples is strictly
prohibited.

Spot gluing
> Forms are to be spot glued at both sides (single-side spot gluing is not allowed).
> Each glue application spot must be glued evenly, and be of 3 to 5 mm in size. The
glue spot is to be accurately pressed to prevent its floating and there is to be no
significant creasing.
> For positioning of glue spots, see the illustration below.
> Spot gluing is to be applied in a staggered format.
ML5720/ML5721
2nd part
1st part

3rd part

4th part

5th part

6th part
50.8mm (2inches)

Glue spot

ML5790/ML5791

Glue spot

Gluing the lines

> The glue line area should be even, with a width of 1 – 2 mm.
> Always press the glue line area to prevent any lifting. Further, do not use any paper
which has significant wrinkling.
> Ensure that the glue does not extend outside the margins of the paper.

Appendix D – Media specifications > 348

> Be careful if the glue area is on thick (hard) paper, since this can affect paper feed
precision.

2nd part
1st part

3rd part

4th part

5th part

6th part
Glue area

1~2mm

Paper stapling
> Stapling of both sides of the paper is allowed. Stapling on only one side is not
allowed.
> The paper must always be stapled from the front of the paper. Ensure that the
staple does not emerge from the front page.
> The paper must be stapled with double staples in the paper feed direction. It is also
recommended that the staples are applied in order in the paper feed direction.
> Make sure that the paper is securely stapled without any lifting being evident.
> After the paper is stapled, it should be pressed to prevent any lifting.
> Paper that does not comply with the specifications shown in the diagram below will
not be guaranteed. It may suffer from slipping between layers and compromise
paper feed quality.

6.35 Paper feed direction 6.35

Single-type staple

Horizontal
perforation 2 or
more

25.4
3~4

Approx.1 Press to prevent lifting

50.8 interval

Stapled at
four points

Enlarged view of paper stapler

Horizontal perforation rising

Horizontal perforation rising on multipart forms is likely to cause print quality reduction,
paper feed instability or paper jamming. The height of any such rising must be within 1 mm.

1 mm or less

Horizontal perforation
Horizontal perforation
1 mm or less

Appendix D – Media specifications > 349

Misalignment between feed holes
Misalignment between feed holes of parts (resulting from misalignment between the parts
when being joined) must be less than 0.4 mm.
[All dimensions in mm]

Feed hole

Misalignment 0.4 or less

Sectional view of feed holes

Paper condition
Paper should be without creases and be zigzag-folded along horizontal perforations. In
particular, paper newly taken from its wrapping is likely to have creases in its first and last
few sheets. Do not use such sheets.

Mark made on
paper by folding

Line in paper

Do not use paper that exhibits wrinkling, curling or folds or paper that turns upward at the
top or bottom since this may compromise print quality or cause paper jams. Note that the
first few sheets of new paper have a tendency to curl easily and it may be advisable not to
use them.
Do not use paper bulging around folds as illustrated below as this can adversely affect
paper feed.

Bulge

Binding holes
The use of paper that contains binding holes is not assured. (If any problems occur with
the use of such paper, equipment or performance is not assured.)
When paper with binding holes is used in cases of absolute necessity, adequate prior testing
must be performed to check that problems do not occur. Some precautions for using paper
with binding holes are as follows:
> Do not print data within 5 mm of each binding hole.
> Ensure that the paper is free of any chad resulting from the punching of binding
holes.
> Binding holes falling on the printer’s paper detection switch are taken as paper ends.

Appendix D – Media specifications > 350

> Ensure binding hole edges do not rise as hole edge rising may cause the carriage to
snag.
> The locations of binding holes are shown below:

[All dimensions in mm]

10 or more 80 or more

10 or more
80 or more
5~6
Binding hole

10 (shaded area)
Printing prohibited

Corner cuts
The use of paper with corner cuts is not assured. (If any problems occur with the use of
such paper, equipment or performance is not assured.)
When paper with corner cuts is used in cases of absolute necessity, adequate prior testing
must be performed to check that problems do not occur. Some precautions for using paper
with corner cuts are as follows:
> Do not print data in the hatched areas illustrated below.
> Be sure that paper is free of any chad resulting from corner cutting.
> To prevent paper peeling and possible carriage snagging, do not connect the cuts of
vertical or horizontal perforations to corner cuts.
> Corner cuts falling on the printer’s paper detection switch are taken as paper ends or
paper jams.
> The locations of corner cuts are shown below:
[ All dimensions in mm]

5~8
5.05

5.05
5~8

Perforations uncut

Corner cut

The hatched area must not be printed on

Appendix D – Media specifications > 351

CUT-SHEET PAPER

Paper size and printing areas

Single-part forms
The standard paper size is A4.
1st character B C
(10CPI)

A’
A

Printable area

Printing area L

D’

DIMENSION NAME SPECIFICATION VALUE

ML5720/ML5790 ML5790/ML5791

W Paper width 99.1 – 216mm (3.9 – 8.5 in) 99.1 to 364mm (3.9 to 14.3 in)

L Paper length 99.1 to 356mm (3.9 to 14 in)

A Printing start 35mm (1.38 inches)

position (1st [ A' : 2.12mm (1/12 inches)]
line
positioning)

B First dot print 6.35 mm (1/4 in)

position

C Printing 6.35mm (1/4 inches) or > 6.35mm (1/4 inches) or >

prohibited
But up to the 80th character But up to the 136th character
margin
within the range of the "B" value within the range of the "B" value

D Printing Top path 25mm (0.98 in)

prohibited Front path 55mm (2.16 in)
margin [ D' : 6.35mm (1/4 inch) or more ]

NOTE
1. Paper longer than A4 paper (297 mm) exhibits reduced paper loading
performance.
2. The length-to-width ratio of paper is 1 : 2/3 – 2.
3. Use paper that is neither folded nor distorted.

Appendix D – Media specifications > 352

Paper quality
In case of friction feed SASF (Single Auto Sheet Feeder)

Maximum weight 45 ~ 90 g/m2 (12 – 24 lbs)

Smoothness

Sheffield 75 ~ 300 sec

Bekk 7 ~ 90 sec

Paper thickness 0.05 ~ 0.12mm

(0.002 ~0.0049 in)

In case of CSF

Maximum weight 60 ~ 90 g/m2 (16 – 24 lbs)

Smoothness

Sheffield 75 ~ 300 sec

Bekk 7 ~ 90 sec

Paper thickness 0.07 ~ 0.12mm (0.0027

~0.0049 in)

NOTE
> Use fine-quality paper.
> Do not use wrinkled paper.

Perforations
The use of paper that contains out-of-specification perforations is not assured. (If any
problems occur with the use of such paper, equipment or performance is not assured.)
When paper with such perforations is used in cases of absolute necessity, adequate prior
testing must be performed to check that problems do not occur. Some precautions for using
paper with perforations outside the assurance range are as follows:
> The specifications for perforations conform to those defined in “Perforation
dimensions” on page 344.
> An example of paper with perforations is illustrated below.
> Printing data in the hatched area (illustrated below) around perforations is not
allowed.
> Perforations should not have any rough edges.
> Paper should be smooth on the cut edge.

Appendix D – Media specifications > 353

> Perforations should be evenly applied.

Vertical perforation

Cuts uncrossed

Horizontal perforation

5.05 (1/5 in)

5.05 (1/5 in)

Uncut
4 portions

5.08
(1/5 in)
5.08 [All dimensions in mm]
(1/5 in)

The hatched area must not be printed on.

Folds, bends and curls of cut-sheet paper

Cut-sheet paper is likely to have folds, bends or curls through handling, carrying or
stacking, or depending on storage conditions. To avoid such effects interfering with paper
feed, suggestions are offered below.
Do not use cut-sheet paper which is out-of-specification as this can have a detrimental
effect on its feed. If any problems occur with using such paper, equipment or performance
is not assured.

Folds
> Cut sheets folded all the way from side to side are unusable.
> Cut sheets with corner folds is less than 2 mm high, as shown below, are usable.

Corrected to
2 mm or less

15 mm or above

Paper folded completely across Corner fold

its width is unusable.

NOTE
Corner folds in a cut sheet are unusable with automatic cut-sheet feeders.

Appendix D – Media specifications > 354

Bends, curls
> Cut sheets curled in an arc are usable, when the amount of curling is within 5mm
(for manual feeding) and within 2mm (for auto-feed such as Cut-sheet feeding) (see
below).
> Cut sheets with bends of more than 2mm high within less than 15mm of any bend
point (see below) cannot be used.

5mm or less
Arc (manual feed)

2 mm or less
(auto feed)

Curled paper
Corrected to
2 mm or less

15 mm or more

Bent paper

Appendix D – Media specifications > 355

ENVELOPES

Individual
> Paper size and printable area
Direction for paper insertion Within ±0.3˚ for the
perpendicular line
W of the base
Base line

MARK NAME STANDARD VALUE

A The start position 8.9mm (0.35 in)

B The start position 4.06mm (0.16 in)

C Printing prohibited area 25.4mm (1 in) or >

NOTE
> Both front and rear side of an envelope is printable.
> Always insert envelope in landscape orientation.
> Do not print close to the glue area (even if it falls in the print area) on an
envelope, printing on such area will result in blurred print.

> Dimensions

SIZE (W X L) FRICTION CSF

FEED
(SASF/SIG)

165mm (6-1/2 in) × 92mm (3-5/8 in) A B

225.4mm (8 7/8 in) × 98.4mm (3 7/8 in) A B

241mm (9 1/2 in) × 104.8mm (4 1/8 in) A A

NOTE
A denotes can be used, B denotes cannot be used.

> Paper ream weight

Maximum weight 90 gsm (24lb)

Smoothness

Sheffield 75 - 300 sec

Bekk 90 - 7 sec

Paper thickness <= 0.41 mm (0.016 in)

Appendix D – Media specifications > 356

> Curl degree

Curl degree (A) must be less than or equal to 3 mm.

Continuous
> Paper ream weight

Maximum weight 90 gsm (24lb)

Paper thickness 0.36mm (0.014 in)

Envelopes also confirm to dimensions and specifications as specified in “Vertical and

horizontal dimensions” on page 342.

Envelopes

Ground paper

Envelopes must not

overlap

NOTE
> Equipment performance is not assured if problems arise from using
continuous feed envelopes with adhesive, perforations or cutouts.
> Continuous envelopes can be fed to the printer using the optional pull
tractor or bottom push tractor.

Appendix D – Media specifications > 357

CARDSTOCK PAPER
Use of cardstock paper is not assured. If any problems occur with the use of it, equipment
of performance is not assured. You can load cardstock paper only using Bottom Pull tractor
(option).
> Dimensions:
127mm x 203.2mm (5 in x 8 in)
> Paper weight

Maximum weight 90 gsm (40 lb)

Paper thickness 0.2mm (0.008 in)

> Cardstock paper also confirms to the dimensions and specifications as specified in
“Vertical and horizontal dimensions” on page 342.

LABEL PAPER
The use of label paper is not assured. If any problems occur with the use of it, equipment
or performance is not assured.
When label paper is used in cases of absolute necessity, adequate prior testing must be
performed to check that problems do not occur. Some precautions for using label paper are
given below.

NOTE
Label paper is paper stock that has labels (facestock) placed on coated single-
part continuous form paper used as its substrate. Label paper must have a low
shrinkage difference between its facestock and substrate, and have labels
distributed evenly over all of the substrate. Also, label paper must have strong
label adhesion and high durability.

> Dimensions
Substrate dimensions:
Max. 216mm x 83mm (8.5 in x 3.25 in) (ML5720/ML5790)
Max. 318mm x 83mm (15 in x 3.25 in) (ML5721/ML5791)
Dimensions conform to those of continuous paper specified in “Vertical and horizontal
dimensions” on page 342. The size of each label must be 50 mm or more horizontally
and 25 mm or more vertically.
> Paper thickness: Maximum 0.28mm (0.011 in) (including substrate)
> Adhesive

Appendix D – Media specifications > 358

 Adhesive adhesion must be 10 g/in or more in peel strength. Also, when label paper
is wound a half turn around a 27 mm-diameter core, adhesion must be such that the
labels do not peel off the substrate.
F

Substrate

Facestock
Width 1 inch (25.4 mm)
Peel strength >10g/inch

Substrate

27 mm
Label

The adhesive strength is given as a guideline. It is essential that label paper is kept
in a condition which does not allow labels to peel during printing or paper feeding.
> Waste Removal
Waste facestock around labels is not to be removed. Label paper from which waste is
removed as illustrated below is not to be used as it results in surface level differences.

Label

Waste removed

Label
Substrate
Level difference caused

Label corners must be rounded (R4 to R5 mm).

> Labels can be loaded using the Bottom Push tractor or the Optional Pull tractor.
> Cuts
Label cuts are to be made only in the facestock.
Label cuts corresponding to substrate horizontal perforations are to coincide with
those perforations, with an uncut within 1 to 2 mm of each side.
An uncut (approx. 0.5 – 1 mm) is to be provided around both upper corners of each
label.
> Label adhesive squeeze-out must not be allowed onto the front surface of label
paper.
> Ensure that the label paper is not skewed as it is fed into the printer. Do not use
Labels which are damaged, curled or wrinkled.
> Labels are sensitive to temperature and humidity. Ensure that they are used in
normal operating conditions i.e. 15 ~ 25oC (50 ~ 75oF); 30 ~ 60%RH.

Appendix D – Media specifications > 359

> Ensure Labels do not remain in the printer as they can curl around the platen and
cause a paper jam, when printing is resumed.
> The use of label paper with cloth facestock is prohibited.
Paper feeding direction

50 or more 0.5~1
0.5~1 Uncut
Uncut

25 or more B B
C
R4~R5
each corner
A D
F
G

E E
Horizontal
perforation

Uncut
(each side)
F
1~2

All dimensions in mm

Dimensions conform to those of continuous paper specified in “Vertical and horizontal

dimensions” on page 342.

DIMENSION VALUE

A 12.7 ~ 25.4mm (1/2 ~ 1 inch)

B 3.81mm

C 4mm or more

D 12.7mm (1/2 in) or more

E 6.35mm (1/4 in) or more

F 6.35mm (1/4 in) or more

(12.7 mm or more is desirable)

G 10.58mm (5/12 inches) or more (line feed

accuracy assurance range: 25.4 mm or
more.)

Appendix D – Media specifications > 360

APPENDIX E – BARCODE
BARCODE EXTERNAL CODE LIST EAN8
Barcode External Code List EAN8

L H 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 @
0
Check digit
1
1

2
2

3
3

4
4

5
5

6
6

7
7

8
8

9
9

Appendix E – Barcode > 361

BARCODE EXTERNAL CODE LIST EAN13
Barcode External Code List EAN13

L H 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 @
0
Check digit
1
1

2
2

3
3

4
4

5
5

6
6

7
7

8
8

9
9

Appendix E – Barcode > 362

BARCODE EXTERNAL CODE LIST UPC - A
Barcode External Code List UPC-A

L H 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 @
0
Check digit
1
1

2
2

3
3

4
4

5
5

6
6

7
7

8
8

9
9

Appendix E – Barcode > 363

BARCODE EXTERNAL CODE LIST UPC - E
Barcode External Code List UPC-E

L H 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0
0

1
1

2
2

3
3

4
4

5
5

6
6

7
7

8
8

9
9

Appendix E – Barcode > 364

BARCODE EXTERNAL CODE LIST CODE39
Barcode External Code List CODE39

L H 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
SP 0 @ P
0
Check digit
1 A Q
1

2 B R
2

3 C S
3

$ 4 D T
4

% 5 E U
5

6 F V
6

7 G W
7

8 H X
8

9 I Y
9

* J Z
A

+ K
B

L
C

– M
D

. N
E

/ O
F

Appendix E – Barcode > 365

BARCODE EXTERNAL CODE LIST INTERLEAVED 2-OF-5
Barcode External Code List Interleaved 2-of-5

L H 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 @
0
Check digit
1
1

2
2

3
3

4
4

5
5

6
6

7
7

8
8

9
9

Appendix E – Barcode > 366

BARCODE 128 CODE LIST CODE TYPE: A
BARCODE 128 Code List Code type: A

L H 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
NUL DLE SP 0 @ P FNC3
0

SOH DC1 ! 1 A Q FNC2

1

STX DC2 " 2 B R SHIFT

2

ETX DC3 # 3 C S CODE C

3

EOT DC4 $ 4 D T CODE B

4

ENQ NAK % 5 E U FNC4

5

ACK SYN & 6 F V FNC1

6

BEL ETB ' 7 G W Check digit

7

BS CAN ( 8 H X
8

HT EM ) 9 I Y
9

LF SUB * : J Z
A

VT ESC + ; K [
B

FF FS , < L \
C

CR GS – = M ]
D

SO RS . > N ^
E

SI US / ? O _
F

Appendix E – Barcode > 367

BARCODE 128 CODE LIST CODE TYPE: B
BARCODE 128 Code List Code type: B

L H 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
SP 0 @ P ` p
0

! 1 A Q a q
1

" 2 B R b r
2

# 3 C S c s
3

$ 4 D T d t
4

% 5 E U e u
5

& 6 F V f v
6

' 7 G W g w
7

Check digit ( 8 H X h x
8

FNC3 ) 9 I Y i y
9

FNC2 * : J Z j z
A

SHIFT + ; K [ k {
B

CODE C , < L \ l |
C

FNC4 – = M ] m }
D

CODE A . > N ^ n ~
E

FNC1 / ? O _ o DEL
F

Start character (set B) Code No. 104

Stop character Code No. 106

Appendix E – Barcode > 368

BARCODE 128 CODE LIST CODE TYPE: C
BARCODE 128 Code List Code type: C

L H 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 @
0
Check digit

1
1

2
2

3
3

4
4

5
5

6
6

7
7

8
8

9
9

CODE B
A

CODE A
B

FNC1
C

Start character (set C) Code No. 105

Stop character Code No. 106

Appendix E – Barcode > 369

BARCODE EXTERNAL CODE LIST POSTNET
Barcode External Code List Postnet

L H 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 @
0
Check digit
1
1

2
2

3
3

4
4

5
5

6
6

7
7

8
8

9
9

Appendix E – Barcode > 370

APPENDIX F – PRINTING SPECIFICATIONS
MEASUREMENT CONDITIONS AND SPECIFICATION VALUE DEFINITIONS
> Measurement is made on all-letter or H-letter print data in internal fonts. Letter H is
used to illustrate print data.
> Specification values are given for printing in a room of ordinary temperature (59 to
860F (15 to 300C), 40 to 70% RH). These values do not include paper expansion or
contraction.
> Media:
Continuous paper: Single-part forms of 55kg paper with feed holes.
Cut-sheet paper: A4 single-part forms of 55kg paper, inserted in portrait orientation.
(Printing specifications do not apply to the last sheet of paper.)
> Printing area:
Printing areas conform to those defined in Media Specification (printing assurance
ranges). For details, see “Appendix D – Media specifications” on page 340.
> Specifications do not apply within 6 LPI (2/3 in) of each folding line of pin-fed paper.
> Cut-sheet paper must be loaded carefully, using a left paper guide when inserting.

SPECIFICATIONS
NOTE
> These specifications exclude media effects.
> The specifications provided below is common to both Cut-sheet paper and
Continuous paper, unless specified.

> Vertical position accuracy of First Line of data printed:

A

(“A” is a setting.)

Continuous paper A = A±1 mm (single part)

A = A±2 (any media type)
Cut-sheet paper A = A±1 mm (single part)
A = A±2 mm (any media type)

NOTE
> Paper must be loaded carefully.
> Specification values do not include inclination of the line of characters
(they are given for data measured with the sensor located at the first
character).

Appendix F – Printing specifications > 371

> Vertical print pitch accuracy

(1st Line)

A
(2nd Line)
B

(40th Line)

Continuous paper Single part: In 1/6 in Linefeed A = 4.23±0.5 mm

B = 165.1±1 mm
Multi-parts: In 1/6 in Linefeed A = 4.23±0.8 mm
B = 165.1±1 mm
Cut-sheet paper In 1/6 in Linefeed A = 4.23±0.5 mm
B = 165.1±2 mm

> Registration

Uni-directional printing C = 0.15 mm or less

Bi-directional printing C = LQ = 0.15 mm or less
Draft = 0.2 mm or less
(Adjustment by menu)

> Skew of lines of characters printed with automatic paper loading

(a) Continuous paper:
D = within 1.0 mm/n characters
(ML5790: n = 80; ML5791: n = 136) (with respect to line drawn between feed
holes on both sides of paper)
(b) Cut-sheet paper (A4 size, manual feed)
D = within 1.0 mm/40 characters
Envelopes: D = within 2mm/40 characters
D

NOTE
Ensure both cut-sheet and continuous paper is fed properly.

Appendix F – Printing specifications > 372

> Form feed accuracy
Continuous paper

A
HHHH
A - B = ±3 mm
(First Page)
(Based on the first page)

B
HHHH
(n Page)

> Gap between layers

(last layer)
(original)

5th layer
1st layer

A = 4 mm or less

Condition: No paper jam h a s occurred.

H
H H
A

H Horizontal perforation

Appendix F – Printing specifications > 373

INDEX
A O
agency approvals ................ 290 operator panel ...................... 27
alarm/error indications ......... 33
appendix P
barcode ........................... 361 print mode
code pages ..................... 316 EPSON ............................ 315
command summary ........ 295 IBM ................................. 314
media specifications ....... 340 print position ......................... 58
print modes printer components
and features ................. 311 front view ......................... 13
printing specifications ..... 371 internal view ..................... 14
auto parking .......................... 57 rear view .......................... 14
automatic paper loading ....... 56 printer features ..................... 10

C Q
command descriptions .......... 59 quiet printing ........................ 58
commands
barcode ........................... 279 R
character set .................. 227 reference guide
composite ....................... 268 printing ............................... 9
font description............... 241
general control ............... 270 S
graphics mode ................ 261 self test
horizontal control............ 203 print .................................. 53
text print features .......... 253 rolling ASCII ..................... 54
vertical control ................ 213 specifications
configuration ......................... 12 electrical insulation ......... 289
connectors and cable ............ 15 environmental ................ 289
noise ............................... 290
F paper .............................. 293
form tear off.......................... 57 physical .......................... 288
power ............................. 288
H print ................................ 290
hex dump mode .................... 55 ribbon ...................... 293, 294
high-copy printing ................. 58
U
I user documentation ................ 8
indicator LEDs ....................... 31
interface details
option ............................... 21
parallel .............................. 15
USB................................... 17

M
media
continuous paper ............ 342
cut sheet paper .............. 352
envelopes ....................... 356
general ........................... 340
label paper ...................... 358
menus
general ............................. 37
items................................. 38
operation .......................... 37
mode
hex dump ......................... 30
menu ................................ 30
print .................................. 28
test ................................... 30

Index > 374

OKI PRINTING SOLUTIONS CONTACT DETAILS
Oki Systems (UK) Limited Oki Systèmes (France) S.A. Oki Systems (Österreich)
550 Dundee Road 44-50 Av. du Général de Gaulle Campus 21
Slough Trading Estate 94246 L'Hay les Roses Businesszentrum Wien Sued
Slough Paris Liebermannstrasse A02 603
Berkshire 22345 Brun am Gebirge
Tel:+33 01 46 15 80 00
SL1 4LE
Télécopie:+33 01 46 15 80 60 Tel: +43 223 6677 110
Tel:+44 (0) 1753 819819 Website: www.oki.fr Drucker Support:
Fax:+44 (0) 1753 819899 +43 (0) 2236 677110-501
OKI Systems (Magyarország) Kft.
http://www.oki.co.uk Fax Support:
Capital Square
+43 (0) 2236 677110-502
Oki Systems Ireland Limited Tower 2
Website: www.oki.at
The Square Industrial Complex 7th Floor
Tallaght H-1133 Budapest, OKI Europe Ltd. (Ukraine)
Dublin 24 Váci út 76 Raisy Opkinoy Street,8
Hungary Building B, 2nd Floor,
Tel:+353 (0) 1 4049590
Kiev 02002
Fax:+353 (0)1 4049591 Telefon: +36 1 814 8000
Ukraine
http://www.oki.ie Telefax: +36 1 814 8009
Website: www.okihu.hu Tel: +380 44 537 5288
Oki Systems Ireland Limited - e-mail: [email protected]
OKI Systems (Italia) S.p.A.
Northern Ireland Website: www.oki.ua
via Milano, 11,
19 Ferndale Avenue
20084 Lacchiarella (MI) OKI Sistem ve Yazıcı Çözümleri Tic.
Glengormley
Ltd. Şti.
BT36 5AL Tel:+39 (0) 2 900261
Harman sok Duran Is Merkezi,
Northern Ireland Fax:+39 (0) 2 90026344
No:4, Kat:6,
Website: www.oki.it
Tel:+44 (0) 7767 271447 34394, Levent
Fax:+44 (0) 1 404 9520 OKI Printing Solutions İstanbul
http://www.oki.ie Platinium Business Park II, 3rd Floor
Tel: +90 212 279 2393
ul. Domaniewska 42
Technical Support for all Ireland: Faks: +90 212 279 2366
02-672 Warsaw
Tel:+353 1 4049570 Web: www.oki.com.tr
Poland
Fax:+353 1 4049555 www.okiprintingsolutions.com.tr
E-mail: [email protected] Tel:+48 22 448 65 00
Oki Systems (Belgium)
Fax:+48 22 448 65 01
OKI Systems (Czech and Slovak), Medialaan 24
Website: www.oki.com.pl
s.r.o. 1800 Vilvoorde
E-mail: [email protected]
IBC – Pobřežní 3
Hotline: 0800 120066 Helpdesk: 02-2574620
186 00 Praha 8
E-mail: [email protected] Fax: 02 2531848
Czech Republic
Website: www.oki.be
Oki Systems (Ibérica) S.A.
Tel: +420 224 890158
Sucursal Portugal AlphaLink Bulgaria Ltd.
Fax:+420 22 232 6621
Edifício Prime - 2 Kukush Str.
Website: www.oki.cz, www.oki.sk
Av. Quinta Grande 53 Building "Antim Tower", fl. 6
Oki Systems (Deutschland) GmbH 7º C Alfragide 1463 Sofia, Bulgaria
Hansaallee 187 2614-521 Amadora
tel: +359 2 821 1160
40549 Düsseldorf Portugal
fax: +359 2 821 1193
Tel: 01805/6544357** Tel:+351 21 470 4200 Website: http://bulgaria.oki.com
01805/OKIHELP** Fax:+351 21 470 4201
OKI Printing Solutions
Fax: +49 (0) 211 59 33 45 Website:www.oki.pt
Herstedøstervej 27
Website: E-mail : [email protected]
2620 Albertslund
www.okiprintingsolutions.de
Oki Service Danmark
[email protected]
Serviço de apoio técnico ao
Adm.: +45 43 66 65 00
**0,14€/Minute aus dem dt. Festnetz Cliente
Hotline: +45 43 66 65 40
der T-Com (Stand 11.2008) Tel: 808 200 197
Salg: +45 43 66 65 30
E-mail : [email protected]
Διανομέας των συστημάτων OKI Fax: +45 43 66 65 90
CPI S.A1 Rafailidou str. OKI Europe Ltd. (Russia) Website: www.oki.dk
177 78 Tavros Office 702, Bldg 1
Athens Oki Systems (Finland) Oy
Zagorodnoye shosse
Greece Polaris Capella
117152, Moscow
Τel: +30 210 48 05 800 Vänrikinkuja 3
Fax:+30 210 48 05 801 Tel: +74 095 258 6065 02600 Espoo
EMail:[email protected] Fax: +74 095 258 6070
Tel: +358 (0) 207 900 800
Oki Systems (Iberica), S.A.U e-mail: [email protected]
Fax: +358 (0) 207 900 809
C/Teide, 3 Website: www.oki.ru
Website: www.oki.fi
San Sebastian de los Reyes Technical support:
28703, Madrid Oki Systems (Holland) b.v.
Tel: +7 495 564 8421
Neptunustraat 27-29
Tel:+34 91 3431620 e-mail: [email protected]
2132 JA Hoofddorp
Fax: +34 91-3431624
Atención al cliente: 902 36 00 36 Helpdesk: 0800 5667654
Website: www.oki.es Tel:+31 (0) 23 55 63 740
Fax:+31 (0) 23 55 63 750
Website: www.oki.nl

Oki Printing Solutions contact details > 375

Oki Systems (Norway) AS
Tevlingveien 23
N-1081 Oslo

Tel:+47 (0) 63 89 36 00
Telefax:+47 (0) 63 89 36 01
Ordrefax:+47 (0) 63 89 36 02
Website: www.oki.no

General Systems S.R.L.

(Romania)
Sos. Bucuresti-Ploiesti Nr. 135.
Bucharest 1
Romania

Tel: +40 21 303 3138

Fax: +40 21303 3150
Website: http://romania.oki.com

Var vänlig kontakta din Återförsäljare

i första hand, för konsultation. I andra
hand kontakta

Oki Systems (Sweden) AB

Borgafjordsgatan 7
Box 1191
164 26 Kista

Tel. +46 (0) 8 634 37 00

e-mail:
[email protected] för allmänna frågor om
Oki produkter

[email protected] för teknisk support

gällandes Oki produkter

Vardagar: 08.30 - 12.00,

13.00 - 16.00
Website: www.oki.se

Oki Systems (Schweiz)

Baslerstrasse 15
CH-4310 Rheinfelden

Support deutsch +41 61 827 94 81

Support français +41 61 827 94 82
Support italiano +41 061 827 9473
Tel: +41 61 827 9494
Website: www.oki.ch

Oki Printing Solutions contact details > 376